Technical Specification Section: Switchgear-Cb Revision-11

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION: SWITCHGEAR-CB
REVISION-11
Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

C/ENGG/SPEC/SWGR/CB, DEC-2016 Page 1 of 27
Summary of major changes made in this revision w.r.t earlier Technical Specification,
Section: Switchgear, Chapter-CB, Rev.10A & Section: Switchgear, Chapter 765kV
CB, Rev.02
1) Technical specification, Section: Switchgear, Chapter 765kV CB, Rev.02 and Section:
Switchgear, Chapter CB, Rev.10A are merged to prepare this combined technical
specification section up to 765kV CB.
2) All 765kV & 400kV Circuit Breaker control schematics shall be finalized in such a
way, that it may operate with or without CSD (refer clause 1.6)
3) Some duty requirements parameters added/modified (refer clause 2.0)
4) SF6 gas for main CBs shall be supplied in returnable cylinders (refer clause 5.0)
5) Insulators for Circuit breakers can be of Porcelain/polymer type (refer clause 6.0)
6) Included Indicative platform & ladder drawing for 400kV&765kV CB (refer clause
9.0)
7) Included Plug-in type arrangement for termination of inter pole cables (refer clause
11.0)
8) Included Technical parameters for 72.5kV CB (refer clause 16.0)
9) Some parameters like dielectric, creepage, seismic requirement etc w.r.t CBs are
included (refer clause 16.0)
10) Included Actions required for defects observed during defect liability period (refer
clause 18.0)
Note:
Changes made in this document are shown with bold letters, further major changes
are listed above; however for complete details of changes, please refer the complete
technical specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

SECTION: SWITCHGEAR–CB (CIRCUIT BREAKER)
CONTENTS
Clause.No. Description Page No.
1.0 General 4
2.0 Duty requirements 4
2.6 Controlled Switching Device (CSD) 7
3.0 Total Break Time 9
4.0 Constructional Features 9
5.0 Sulphur Hexafluoride Gas (SF6 Gas) 11
6.0 Insulators 11
7.0 Spare Parts and Maintenance Equipment 11
8.0 Operating Mechanism and Control 12
9.0 Support Structure 15
10.0 Terminal Connector Pad 16
11.0 Inter-pole Cabling 16
12.0 Fittings and Accessories 17
13.0 Additional Data to be Furnished 18
14.0 Dead Tank Type Circuit Breaker 19
15.0 Tests 19
16.0 Technical Parameters for Circuit Breaker 21
17.0 Pre-commissioning tests 24
18.0 Actions required for defects observed during defect

Liability period 26
9.b) drg: Indicative drawing for Platform details of 400kV&

765kV CB 27

SECTION: SWITCHGEAR–CB (CIRCUIT BREAKER)
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 The circuit breakers and accessories shall conform to IEC: 62271-100, IEC:
62271-1 and other relevant IEC standards except to the extent explicitly
modified in the specification and shall also be in accordance with
requirements specified in Section-GTR.
1.2 800/420/245/145/72.5kV circuit breakers offered would be of sulphur

hexafluoride (SF6) type and of class C2-M2 as per IEC. The bidder may offer
circuit breakers of either live tank type or dead tank type of proven design.
1.3 The circuit breaker shall be complete with operating mechanism, common
marshalling box, piping, inter-pole cables, cable accessories like glands,
terminal blocks, marking ferrules, lugs, pressure gauges, density monitors
(with graduated scale), galvanised support structure, platform with ladder
for CB, their foundation bolts and all other accessories required for carrying
out all the functions of the CB.
All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable circuit breaker

installation such as terminal pads, control parts and other devices shall be
provided.
1.4 Painting shall be done in line with Section – GTR. Paint shade RAL-7032 or
similar shades can be used for painting. The support structure, platform &
ladder of circuit breaker shall be hot dip galvanised. Exposed hardware items
shall be hot dip galvanised or Electro-galvanised.
1.5 The circuit breakers shall be designed for use in the geographic and
meteorological conditions as given in Section-Project.
1.6 All 765kV & 400kV Circuit Breaker control schematics shall be finalized
in such a way, that it may operate with or without CSD by using a
suitable selector switch irrespective of whether circuit breakers to be
supplied are envisaged along with CSD or not as per bid price schedules.
2.0 DUTY REQUIREMENTS
2.1 The circuit breakers shall be capable of performing their duties without
opening resistors.
2.2 The circuit breaker shall meet the duty requirements for any type of fault or
fault location and also for line switching when used on effectively grounded
system and perform make and break operations as per the stipulated duty
cycles satisfactorily.

2.2.1 PRE-INSERTION RESISTER
800kV & 420kV circuit breakers shall be provided with single step pre-
insertion closing resistors (wherever the requirement of PIR is explicitly
specified in bid price schedules) to limit the switching surges. The
resistance value of pre-insertion resistor and the duration of pre-insertion time
is given in clause 16.0 of this section. The resistor shall have thermal rating
for the following duties:
i) TERMINAL FAULT
Close .... 1 Min .... Open Close Open…..2 min ..... Close ..... 1 Min ........
Open Close Open.
ii) RECLOSING AGAINST TRAPPED CHARGES
Duty shall be the same as under (i) above. The first, third and fourth closures
are to be on de - energised line while second closing is to be made with lines
against trapped charge of 1.2 p.u. of opposite polarity.
iii) OUT OF PHASE CLOSING
One closing operation under phase opposition, that is with twice the voltage
across the terminals.
iv) No allowance shall be made for heat dissipation of resistor during time
interval between successive closing operations. The resistors and resistor
supports shall perform all these duties without deterioration. Test reports of
resistors proving thermal rating for duties specified above shall be furnished
during detailed engineering. The calculations shall be provided to take care
of the effect of tolerances on resistance values and insertion time.
2.3 The breaker shall be capable of:
i) Interrupting the steady and transient magnetizing current corresponding

to Power transformers as follows:
Voltage rating of CB Type of Transformer Rating (in MVA)
800kV 765/400kV 250 to 1500
420kV 765/400kV 250 to 1500
400/220kV 250 to 630
400/132kV 160 to 315
245kV 400/220kV 200 to 630
220/132kV 50 to 200

220/66kV 50 to 200
145kV 220/132kV 50 to 200
132/33kV 10 to 50
ii) Interrupting line/cable charging current as per IEC without use of

opening resistors. The breaker shall be able to interrupt the rated
line charging current as per IEC-62271-100 with test voltage
immediately before opening equal to the product of U/√3 and 1.4
iii) Clearing short line fault (kilometric faults) with source impedance
behind the bus equivalent to symmetrical fault current specified.
iii) Breaking 25% of the rated fault current at twice rated voltage under
phase opposition condition.
iv) Withstanding all dielectric stresses imposed on it in open condition

at lock out pressure continuously (i.e. shall be designed for 2 p.u.
across the breaker continuously, for validation of which a power
frequency withstand test conducted for a duration of at least 15
minutes is acceptable).
v) Circuit breakers shall be able to switch in and out the shunt reactor
as detailed below:
Voltage rating of Reactor Rating Max. rise of over

CB (in MVAR) voltage (in p.u.)
800kV 150 to 330 1.9
420kV 50 to 150 2.3
245kV 25 to 50 2.3
a. Capability of 400 kV circuit breakers to interrupt inductive

current below 100 A without giving rise to overvoltage more than
2.3 p.u. (As specified in IEC-62271-110) shall be validated by
carrying out the simulation study/analysis (EMTP/PSCAD) by
modeling an equivalent circuit comprising all circuit component
i.e. Inductance of Shunt Reactor, Stray capacitance of Shunt
Reactor, Circuit Breaker, Stray capacitance of Bus Connection,
Capacitance of grading Capacitor, inductance of neutral
grounding reactor, Network Thevenin’s equivalent, any other
series/parallel inductance/capacitance connected to simulate the
actual inductive load switching.

b. Current chopping capability (chopping number) of circuit breaker
as per IEC-62271-306 to be figured out from actual Laboratory
test and / or field test report and same Current chopping
capability (chopping number) shall be used in above said
simulation study/analysis.
c. To validate the results of above said simulation study/analysis

report, the same study shall be carried out for capability of tested
circuit breaker and the study/analysis results shall be comparable
with actual Laboratory test and / or field test reports.
d. Laboratory test/ field test reports shall be submitted for 400 kV

CBs in case there is change in design including change in
following:
i. Different short circuit current capability
ii. Different model/type
vi) The breakers shall also withstand the voltages specified under clause
16.0 of this section.
2.6 CONTROLLED SWITCHING DEVICE (CSD) :
Circuit Breakers shall be equipped with controlled switching device with

consequent optimization of switching behavior, when used in:
- Switching of transformer (from 765kV and 400kV side circuit

breakers only)
- Switching of shunt Reactor
The CSD shall be provided in Circuit breaker of switchable line reactor bay
and in Main & Tie bay circuit breakers of Transformers, line with non-
switchable line reactors and Bus reactors. The CSD shall be supplied as
per bid price schedules.
2.6.1 Technical Requirement for controlled switching device:
a) The CSD shall be designed to operate correctly and satisfactorily with the
excursion of auxiliary A/C & DC voltages and frequency as specified in
section - GTR.
b) The CSD shall meet the requirements of IEC-61000-4-16 class IV for HF

disturbance test (for short and long durations both) and fast transient
test shall be as per IEC-61000-4-4 level IV and insulation test as per IEC
60255–5.
c) The CSD shall have functions for switching ON & OFF the circuit
breakers.

d) The CSD shall get command to operate the breakers manually. The
controller shall be able to analyze the current and voltage waves available
through the signals from secondaries of CTs & CVTs for the purpose of
calculation of optimum moment of the switching the circuit breaker and
issue command to circuit breaker to operate.
e) The CSD shall also have an adaptive control feature to consider the next
operating time of the breaker in calculation of optimum time of issuing the
switching command. In calculation of next operating time of the breaker,
the CSD must consider all factors that may affect the operating time of the
breaker such as, but not limited to, ambient temperature, control voltage
variation, SF6 gas density variations etc. Schematic drawing for this
purpose shall be provided by the contractor. The accuracy of the operating
time estimation by the controller shall be better than ± 0.5 ms.
f) The CSD should have display facility at the front for the display of
settings and measured values.
g) The CSD shall be PC compatible for the setting of various parameters and
down loading of the settings and measured values, date, time of switching
etc. Window based software for this purpose shall be supplied by the
contractor to be used on the owner’s PC.
h) The controller shall be suitable for current input of 1 ampere from the
secondary of the CTs. and 110 V (Ph to Ph) from the CVTs. The CSD
shall withstand transient and dynamic state values of the current from the
secondary of the CTs and CVTs.
i) The CSD shall have time setting resolution of 0.1 ms or better.
j) The CSD shall have sufficient number of output/input potential free

contacts for connecting the monitoring equipment and annunciation
system available in the control room. Necessary details shall be worked
out during engineering of the scheme.
k) The CSD shall also record and monitor the switching operations and
make adjustments to the switching instants to optimize the switching
behavior as necessary. It shall provide self-diagnostic facilities,
signaling of alarms and enable downloading of data captured from
the switching events.
l) The provision for bypassing the Controlled switching device shall be

provided through BCU and SCADA both so that whenever, the CSD is
not healthy due to any reason (including auxiliary supply failure),
uncontrolled trip/close command can be extended to the circuit

Breaker. Alternatively, in case of any non-operation of the CSD after
receiving a close/trip command after a pre-determined time delay, the
CSD should automatically be bypassed so as to ensure that the trip and
close commands are extended to the Trip/Close coils through subsequent
command.
m) The CSD shall be provided with a communication port to facilitate

online communication of the CSD with Substation automation system
directly on IEC 61850 protocols. If the CSD does not meet the
protocols of IEC 61850, suitable gateway shall be provided to enable
the communication of CSD as per IEC 61850.
3.0 TOTAL BREAK TIME
3.1 The total break time as specified under this section shall not be exceeded
under any of the following duties:
i) Test duties T10, T30, T60, T100a, and T100s (with TRV as per IEC:
62271-100)
ii) Short line fault L75, L90 (with TRV as per IEC: 62271-100)
3.2 The total break time of the breaker shall not be exceeded under any duty
conditions specified such as with the combined variation of the trip coil
voltage (70-110%), arc extinguishing medium pressure etc. While furnishing
the proof of the total break time of complete circuit breaker, the effect of non-
simultaneity between contacts within a pole or between poles shall be
brought out to establish guaranteed total break time.
3.3 The values guaranteed shall be supported with the type test reports.
4.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
The features and constructional details of circuit breakers shall be in

accordance with requirements stated hereunder:
4.1 Contacts
4.1.1 The gap between the open contacts shall be such that it can withstand at least
the rated phase to ground voltage for 8 hours at zero gauge pressure of SF6
gas due to the leakage. The breaker should be able to withstand all dielectric
stresses imposed on it in open condition at lock out pressure continuously (i.e.
2 p.u. across the breaker continuously, for validation of which a power
frequency dielectric with stand test conducted for a duration of at least 15
minutes is acceptable).
4.2 If multi-break interrupters are used, these shall be so designed and augmented
that a uniform voltage distribution is developed across them. Calculations/

test reports in support of the same shall be furnished. The thermal and voltage
withstand rating of the grading elements shall be adequate for the service
conditions and duty specified.
4.3 The SF6 Circuit Breaker shall meet the following additional requirements:
a) The circuit breaker shall be single pressure type. The design and
construction of the circuit breaker shall be such that there is a minimum
possibility of gas leakage and entry of moisture. There should not be
any condensation of SF6 gas on the internal insulating surfaces of the
circuit breaker.
b) All gasketted surfaces shall be smooth, straight and reinforced, if

necessary, to minimise distortion and to make a tight seal, the operating
rod connecting the operating mechanism to the arc chamber (SF6
media) shall have adequate seals. The SF6 gas leakage should not
exceed 0.5% per year and the leakage rate shall be guaranteed during
the warrantee period. In case the leakage under the specified
conditions is found to be greater than 0.5% per year after
commissioning of circuit breaker during the warrantee period, the
manufacturer will have to supply free of cost, the total gas requirement
for subsequent ten (10) years, based on actual leakage observed during
the warrantee period.
c) In the interrupter assembly there shall be an absorbing product box to

minimise the effect of SF6 decomposition products and moisture. The
material used in the construction of the circuit breakers shall be fully
compatible with SF6 gas decomposition products.
d) Each pole shall form an enclosure filled with SF6 gas independent of
two other poles (for 800, 420 & 245 kV CBs) and the SF6 density of
each pole shall be monitored individually. For CBs of voltage class of
145 kV or less, a common SF6 scheme/density monitor shall be
acceptable.
e) The dial type SF6 density monitor shall be adequately temperature

compensated to model the pressure changes due to variations in ambient
temperature within the body of circuit breaker as a whole. Separate
density monitor and dial type temperature compensated pressure
guage is also acceptable. The density monitor shall have graduated
scale and it shall be possible to dismantle the density monitor for
checking/replacement without draining the SF6 gas by providing
suitable interlocked non return valve coupling.
f) Circuit Breaker shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of minimum

8 millibars without distortion or failure of any part.

g) Sufficient SF6 gas (including that will be required for gas analysis
during filling) shall be provided to fill all the circuit breakers being
supplied. Spare gas shall be supplied in separate unused cylinders as
per requirement specified in BPS.
4.4 Provisions shall be made for attaching an operational analyser to record

contact travel, speed and making measurement of operating timings, pre
insertion timings of closing resisters if used, synchronisation of contacts in
one pole.
4.5 The CO (Close-open) operation and its timing shall be such as to ensure
complete travel/insertion of the contact during closing operation and
then follow the opening operation.
5.0 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE GAS (SF6 GAS)
a) The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC 60376 and shall be suitable in all
respects for use in the switchgear under the operating conditions.
b) The high pressure cylinders in which the SF6 gas is shipped and stored
at site shall comply with requirements of the relevant standards and
regulations. SF6 gas shall be supplied (in returnable cylinders) for
all circuit breakers. However, SF6 gas for spare circuit breakers
and mandatory spare quantity of SF6 gas shall be supplied in non-
returnable cylinders.
c) Test: SF6 gas shall be tested for purity, dew point, air, hydro-soluble
fluorides and water content as per IEC 60376 and test certificates shall
be furnished to Employer indicating all the tests as per IEC 60376 for
each lot of SF6 gas and Material safety datasheet shall be provided. Gas
bottles should be checked for leakage during receipt at site.
6.0 INSULATORS
a) The porcelain/polymer of the insulators shall conform to the

requirements stipulated under Section-GTR.
b) The mechanical characteristics of insulators shall match with the

requirements specified under this section.
c) All porcelain & polymer hollow column insulators shall conform to

IEC-62155 & IEC-61462 respectively.
d) Hollow Porcelain/polymer for pressurised columns/chambers should be

in one integral piece in green and fired stage.
7.0 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

The bidder shall include in his proposal, spare parts and maintenance
equipment in accordance with BPS. Calibration certificates of each
maintenance equipment shall be supplied along with the equipment.
8.0 OPERATING MECHANISM AND CONTROL
8.1 General Requirements
8.1.1 Circuit breaker shall be operated by spring charged mechanism. The

mechanism box shall meet the requirements of IP-55.
8.1.2 The operating mechanism box shall be strong, rigid, rebound free and shall
be readily accessible for maintenance.
8.1.3 The mechanism shall be anti-pumping and trip free under every method of
closing.
8.1.4 The mechanism shall be such that the failure of any auxiliary spring will not
prevent tripping and will not cause unwanted trip or closing operation of the
Circuit Breaker
8.1.5 A mechanical indicator shall be provided to show open and close position of
the breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be visible to a man
standing on the ground level with the mechanism housing closed. An
operation counter shall also be provided in the common marshalling box.
8.1.6 Working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion resisting material,

bearings which require grease shall be equipped with pressure type grease
fittings. Bearing pin, bolts, nuts and other parts shall be adequately pinned or
locked to prevent loosening or changing adjustment with repeated operation
of the breaker.
8.1.7 The contractor shall furnish detailed operation and maintenance manual of
the mechanism alongwith the operation manual for the circuit breaker. The
instruction manuals shall contain exploded diagrams with complete storage,
handling, erection, commissioning, troubleshooting, servicing and
overhauling instructions.
8.1.8 Size of common marshalling Box shall be such that adequate space is
available for working in the panel and all wiring shall be routed through
non-inflammable wire troughs with covers.
8.1.9 Space shall be available in 765kV CB common marshalling box to mount

monitoring device, of about 300x300x150mm size and of approximately
7kg weight, by the owner in future.
8.1.10 Operating mechanism and Marshalling box should be provided with

space heater with thermostat, CFL/LED lamp and AC point /Socket.

8.2 Control:
8.2.1 The close and trip circuits shall be designed to permit use of momentary
contact switches and push buttons.
8.2.2 Each breaker shall be provided with two (2) independent tripping circuits,
pressure switches and coils each to be fed from separate DC sources.
8.2.3 The breaker shall normally be operated by remote electrical control.

Electrical tripping shall be performed by shunt trip coils. However,
provisions shall be made for local electrical control. For this purpose a
local/remote selector switch and close and trip control switch/push buttons
shall be provided in the Breaker common marshalling box.
8.2.4 The trip coils shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision during both open
and close position of breaker.
8.2.5 Closing coil and associated circuits shall operate correctly at all values of
voltage between 85% and 110% of the rated voltage. Shunt trip coil and
associated circuits shall operate correctly under all operating conditions of the
circuit breaker up to the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and at
all values of supply voltage between 70% and 110% of rated voltage.
However, even at 50% of rated voltage the breaker shall be able to open. If
additional elements are introduced in the trip coil circuit their successful
operation and reliability for similar applications on outdoor circuit breakers
shall be clearly brought out during detailed engineering.
8.2.6 The 765kV kV, 3-Phase circuit breakers suitable for single phase
switching shall be suitable for taking a spare pole into service in case of
any operational requirement and their marshalling box shall be suitable
for accommodating the additional relays etc. required for changeover
arrangement of all contacts, alarms, signals, indications, interlocks and
lockouts.
8.2.7 In trip and closing circuits, relays/relay contacts shall preferably be used
instead of contactors.
8.2.8 Controlled switching scheme/device, wherever required shall be

considered as integral part of CB and shall be commissioned along with
CB.
8.2.9 Density Monitor contacts and pressure switch contacts shall be preferably
suitable for direct use as permissive in closing and tripping circuits. The
devices shall provide continuous & automatic monitoring of the state of
the gas as follows:
a) 'Gas Refill' level

This contact will be used for remote indication/ to annunciate the need
for gas refilling.
b) ‘SF6 gas density Low’ Alarm level - 1

This contact will be used for remote indication/ to annunciate the need
for the urgent gas refilling.
c) ‘SF6 gas density Low’ Alarm level - 2

This contact will be used to annunciate the need for gas refilling under
emergency or trip the Circuit Breaker.
d) 'Breaker Block' level

This is the minimum gas density at which the manufacturer will
guarantee the rated fault interrupting capability of the breaker. At this
level the breaker block contact shall operate & the tripping & closing
circuit shall be blocked.
It shall be possible to test all gas monitoring relays/devices without de-

energizing the primary equipment & without reducing pressure in the
main section. Plugs & sockets shall be used for test purposes. It shall also
damp the pressure pulsation while filling the gas in service, so that
flickering of the pressure switch contacts does not take place.
The density monitor shall be placed suitably inclined in such a way so that the
readings are visible from ground level with or without using binoculars.
Separate contacts have to be used for each of tripping and closing circuits. If
contacts are not suitably rated and multiplying relays are used then fail safe
logic/schemes are to be employed. DC supplies for all auxiliary circuits shall
be monitored and provision shall be made for remote annunciations and
operation lockout in case of D.C. failures. Density monitors are to be so
mounted that the contacts do not change on vibration during operation of
circuit Breaker.
8.2.10 The auxiliary switch of the breaker shall be positively driven by the breaker
operating rod.
8.3 Spring operated mechanism:
a) Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor as per

manufacturer practice. Opening spring and closing spring with limit
switch for automatic charging and other necessary accessories to make
the mechanism a complete operating unit shall also be provided.
b) As long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of

the closing and opening operations shall be possible. The motor shall
have adequate thermal rating for this duty.

c) After failure of power supply to the motor one close open operation
shall be possible with the energy contained in the operating mechanism.
d) Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor which shall be

used solely for compressing the closing spring. Facility for manual
charging of the closing spring shall also be provided. The motor rating
shall be such that it requires not more than 30 seconds for full charging
of the closing spring.
e) Closing action of circuit breaker shall compress the opening spring

ready for tripping.
f) When closing springs are discharged after closing a breaker, closing

springs shall be automatically charged for the next operation and an
indication of this shall be provided in the local and remote control
cabinet.
g) Provisions shall be made to prevent a closing operation of the breaker

when the spring is in the partial charged condition. Mechanical
interlocks shall be provided in the operating mechanism to prevent
discharging of closing springs when the breaker is already in the closed
position.
h) The spring operating mechanism shall have adequate energy stored in

the operating spring to close and latch the circuit breaker against the
rated making current and also to provide the required energy for the
tripping mechanism in case the tripping energy is derived from the
operating mechanism.
i) The spring charging failure alarm shall be provided with a time

delay relay having setting range from 0-1minute.
j) Separate MCBs shall be provided for each spring charging motor

and the rating of MCBs shall be suitably selected to match the
starting, running and stalling time.
k) An overload relay shall be provided for protection of the spring

charging motor.
9.0 SUPPORT STRUCTURE
a) The structure design shall be such that during operation of circuit

breaker vibrations are reduced to minimum.
b) Ladder and Maintenance platform for 400kV and 765kV Circuit

breaker:

A suitable ladder with the safety cage and a free standing
maintenance platform with railing for each pole of the circuit
breaker shall be supplied along with the equipment and it’s support
structure. The platform shall be suitable for maintenance personnel
to stand and carryout the activities along with the tools and plant.
The ladder cum maintenance platform shall be designed as a free
standing structure without taking any support from the main
circuit breaker structure. The ladder having height more than 3.0m
shall have at least 15 degree slope and is to be provided with safety
guard above 2.0m level. All structural steel for the platform shall
be as per IS: 2062 and to be galvanized. An indicative drawing of
ladder and platform (Drg.Ref.: C-ENGG-IND.DWG-PLATFORM-
CB, Rev.0) is added at page 27 of 27 with this specification for
guidance which may be modified to suit the requirement of CB by
CB manufacturer. However, the minimum size of the structural
members shall be maintained as mentioned in the drawing.
c) For 220kV, 132kV & 66kV circuit breakers a suitable platform cum
ladder shall be provided as per manufacturer design.
10.0 TERMINAL CONNECTOR PAD
The circuit breaker terminal pads shall be made up of high quality electrolytic
copper or aluminium and shall be conforming to Australian Standard AS-
2935 or equivalent standard for rated current. The terminal pad shall have
protective covers which shall be removed before interconnections.
11.0 INTER-POLE CABLING
11.1 All cables to be used by contractor shall be armoured and shall be as per IS –
1554/ IEC-60502 (1100 Volts Grade). All cables within & between circuit
breaker poles and its marshaling box and up to the controlled switching
device is included in the scope of work. Special cables like screened cable if
required for Circuit Breaker, temperature Transducer/CB Status Signals
for CSD and its associated C&R panel shall be laid in 50mm diameter PVC
pipe. Suitable supports for PVC pipe shall be included in the scope of Supply.
11.2 Only stranded conductor shall be used. Minimum size of the conductor for
inter-pole control wiring shall be 1.5 sq.mm. Copper.
11.3 The cables shall be with oxygen index Minimum 29 and temperature index as
250oC as per relevant standards.
11.4 Separate cables shall be used for AC, DC-I, DC-II and selected DC.
11.5 All inter-pole cabling of Circuit breakers and up to common marshalling

box shall be done by plug-in type arrangement. Suitable removable type

encasing cover shall be provided in case plug-in type connection
arrangement is provided exterior side of LCC/MB. The plug-in type
cable termination shall be conforming to IP-67 as per IEC60529. Cable
sealing arrangement shall be provided (as per requirement) to avoid
entry of moisture etc.
11.6 Vertical run of cables to the operating mechanism box shall be properly
supported by providing the perforated closed type galvanized cable tray
(Cable tray also to be supplied along with the Circuit Breaker) to be
fixed as an integral part of the structures. The load of the cable shall not
be transferred to the mechanism box/plug-in type terminal arrangement
in any circumstances. Hanging or loose run of cable is not permitted.
The drawing of cable tray including fixing arrangement shall be
incorporated in the GA drawing of CB also.
11.7 Wiring shall be done with stud type terminals and ring type lugs. More than
two wires shall not be connected on each side of terminal.
12.0 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
12.1 Following is list of some of the major fittings and accessories to be furnished
by Contractor in the common marshalling box. Number and exact location
of these parts shall be indicated in the drawing.
i) Cable glands (Double compression type), Lugs, Ferrules etc.
ii) Local/remote changeover switch.
iii) Operation counter
iv) Control switches to cut off control power supply.
v) Fuses/MCBs as required.
vi) The number of terminals provided shall be adequate enough to wire out
all contacts and control circuits plus 24 terminals spare for future use.
vii) Anti-pumping relay.
viii) Pole discrepancy relay (for electrically ganged CBs).
ix) D.C. Supervision relays.
x) Rating plate description in accordance with IEC incorporating year of

manufacture.
xi) Controlled switching accessories like sensors, timers, relays etc.(as

applicable)

xii) Transducers/Fixtures required for travel measurement shall be
supplied by CB manufacturer. The complete set of
Transducers/Fixtures for measurement of complete 3-phase CB
shall be supplied for each station. Further, one set of gas filling
adopter (Including coupling, regulator, connecting hose pipe up to
ground level) shall be supplied as per BPS.
13.0 ADDITIONAL DATA TO BE FURNISHED
a) Drawing, showing contacts in close, arc initiation, full arcing, arc

extinction and open position.
b) The temperature v/s pressure curves for each setting of density monitor
along with details of density monitor.
c) Method of checking the healthiness of voltage distribution devices

(condensers) provided across the breaks at site.
d) Data on capabilities of circuit breakers in terms of time and number of

operations at duties ranging from 100% fault currents to load currents
of the lowest possible value without requiring any maintenance or
checks.
e) Maximum non-simultaneity between contacts, between poles and

effect of the same on the guaranteed total break time.
f) Sectional view of non-return couplings used for SF6 pipes.
g) Details & type of filters used in interrupter assembly and also the
operating experience with such filters.
h) Details of SF6 gas:
i) The test methods used in controlling the quality of gas used in the
circuit breakers particularly purity and moisture content.
ii) Proposed tests to assess the conditions of the SF6 within a circuit
breaker after a period of service particularly with regard to
moisture contents of the gas.
j) Shall furnish curves supported by test data indicating the opening time
under close open operation with combined variation of trip coil voltage.
k) Detailed literature and schematic diagrams of switching mechanism for

closing resistor showing the duration of insertion shall also be furnished
alongwith the calculations in respect of thermal rating of resistors for
the duties specified under clause 2.2.1 of this section in case of 420 kV
& 800kV circuit breakers.

l) All duty requirements as applicable to 800 kV, 420 kV, 245 kV, 145 kV
& 72.5kV CBs specified under Clause 2.0 of this section shall be
provided with the support of adequate test reports.
14.0 DEAD TANK TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER

14.1 In case dead tank type circuit breaker is offered, the Bidder shall offer
bushing type CTs (whose secondary parameters are given in under Section:
Switchgear-Instrument Transformer and in case of 765kV and 400kV
these secondaries shall be provided in sets of 3 cores, i.e., 2 cores of PX class
and one core of metering, on both sides of dead tank circuit breaker instead of
conventional outdoor CTs.
14.2 The enclosure shall be made of either Al/Al Alloy or mild steel (suitably hot
dip galvanized). The enclosure shall be designed for the mechanical and
thermal loads to which it is subjected in service. The enclosure shall be
manufactured and tested according to the pressure vessel codes {i.e., latest
edition of the ASME code for pressure vessel - Section VIII of BS-5179,
IS4379, IS-7311 (as applicable) and also shall meet Indian Boiler
Regulations}.
The maximum temperature of enclosure with CB breaker carrying full load

current shall not exceed the ambient by more than 20 deg C.
14.3 The enclosure has to be tested as a routine test at 1.5 times the design
pressure for one minute. A bursting pressure test shall be carried out at 5
times the design pressure as type test on the enclosure.
15.0 TESTS
15.1 In accordance with the requirements stipulated under Section-GTR the circuit
breaker alongwith its operating mechanism shall conform to the type tests as
per IEC: 62271-100.
15.2 The type test reports as per IEC and the following additional type test reports
shall also be submitted for purchaser’s/employer’s review:
i) Corona extinction voltage test (procedure as per Annexure-A of

Section-GTR).
ii) Out of phase closing test as per IEC: 62271-100.
iii) Line charging interrupting current for proving parameters as per clause
no. 16.0 of this section.
iv) Test to demonstrate the Power Frequency withstand capability of

breaker in open condition at Zero Gauge pressure and at lockout
pressure (Ref. Clause 4.1.1).

v) Seismic withstand test (procedure as per Annexure-B of Section-GTR)
in unpressurised condition.
vi) Verification of the degree of protection.
vii) Low temperature test (applicable only for minimum ambient

temperatures of less than (-) 10 deg.C application purpose) and
High temperature test. Contractor can also submit the field
performance report in line with IEC stipulations.
viii) Static Terminal Load test.
ix) Critical Currents test (if applicable).
x) Switching of Shunt Reactors. Test reports shall be submitted as per

IEC. Calculations shall be submitted for meeting the
requirements of clause 2.3(v) of this section.
xi) Circuit breakers meant for controlled switching shall conform to

requirements of IEC/TR-62271 – 302. The contractor shall submit
test reports to demonstrate that the offered CB conforms to the
requirements of performance verification tests and parameter
definition tests as per IEC/TR 62271-302. The contractor shall
also furnish the report for the re-ignition free arcing window for
switching 3-phase shunt reactor as demonstrated in the shunt
reactor switching test.
15.3 Routine Tests
Routine tests as per IEC:62271-100 shall be performed on all circuit breakers.
In addition to the mechanical and electrical tests specified by IEC, the

following tests shall also be performed.
i) Speed curves for each breaker shall be obtained with the help of a
suitable operation analyzer to determine the breaker contact movement
during opening, closing, auto reclosing and trip free operation under
normal as well as limiting operating control voltage conditions. The
tests shall show the speed of contacts directly at various stages of
operation, travel of contacts, opening time, closing time, shortest time
between separation and meeting of contacts at break make operation
etc. This test shall also be performed at site for which the necessary
operation analyzer along with necessary transducers, cables, console
etc. shall be arranged by the contractor at his own cost.
ii) During testing of CB, dynamic contact resistance measurement

(DCRM) shall be carried out for close-open (CO) operations with
delay of 300ms between close and trip operations. Minimum 100A

current shall be injected for DCRM test. Travel characteristics,
injected current, trip/close coil current shall also be recorded along
with DCRM test.
iii) Routine tests on Circuit breakers with Controlled switching device

as per IEC/TR 62271-302.
iv) Tan delta and Capacitance measurement for grading capacitors at

rated voltage and also at 10kV (for reference).
16.0 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER
(In addition to those indicated in section-GTR)
Sl. Parameter 765kV 400kV 220kV 132 kV 66 kV

no. system system system system system
1. Rated voltage (Umax) 800 420 245 145 72.5
kV (rms)
2. Rated frequency (Hz) 50 50 50 50 50
3. No. of poles 3 3 3 3 3
4. Type of circuit breaker SF6 gas SF6 gas SF6 gas SF6 gas SF6 gas
insulated insulated insulated insulated insulated
5. Rated continuous current 3150/4000 2000/3150/ 1600/2500 1250 1250
(A) at an ambient 4000 (as
temperature of 500C (as applicable)
applicable)
6. Rated short circuit capacity 50kA 40/50/63kA 40/50 kA 31.5kA 25kA
with percentage of DC (As (As ( As
component as per IEC- applicable) applicable ) applicable )
62271-100 corresponding
to minimum opening time
under operating conditions
specified.
7. Symmetrical interrupting 50 40/50/63 (As 40/50 (As 31.5 25
capability kA (rms) applicable) applicable)
8. Rated short circuit making 125 100/125/ 100/125 80 63
current kAp 157.5 (As (As
applicable) applicable)
9. Short time current carrying 50 40/50/63 40/50 31.5 25
capability kA (rms) for one As applicable As for one for three
second for one applicable second second
second for one
second
10. Out of phase breaking 12.5 10/12.5/15.75 As per IEC As per IEC As per
current carrying capability (As IEC
kA (rms) applicable)
11. Rated line charging 900 600 As per IEC As per IEC As per IEC
interrupting current at 90
deg. Leading power factor
angle (A rms) (The breaker
shall be able to interrupt
the rated line charging
current with test voltage
immediately before

opening equal to the
product of U/√3 and 1.4 as
per IEC-62271-100
12. First pole to clear factor 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.5
13. Temperature rise over an As per IEC: As per IEC: As per IEC: As per IEC: As per
ambient temperature of 62271-100 62271-100 62271-100 62271-100 IEC:
500C 62271-100
14. Rated break time as IEC 40 40 60 60 Less than
(ms) 75
15. Total break time (ms) 45 45 65 65 Less than

80
16. Total closing time (ms) Not more Not more Not more Not more Not more
than 150 than 150 than 150 than 150 than 150
17. Operating mechanism or a Spring Spring Spring Spring Spring
combination of these
18. Rated operating duty cycle O-0.3s-CO- O-0.3s-CO-3 O-0.3s-CO- O-0.3s-CO- O-0.3s-CO-
3 min-CO min-CO 3 min-CO 3 min-CO 3 min-CO
19. Reclosing Single phase Single phase Single phase Three phase Three
&Three &Three phase &Three auto phase auto
phase auto auto phase auto reclosing. reclosing.
reclosing. reclosing. reclosing. (Single
phase auto
reclosing if
specified in
section-
project)
20. Pre-insertion resistor As per BPS As per BPS NA NA NA
requirement
i) Rating (ohms) 450(max.) 400(max.) NA NA NA

with with
tolerance as tolerance as
applicable applicable
ii) Minimum electrical 9 8 NA NA NA

(mechanical insertion time
+pre-arcing time) pre-
insertion time (ms)
iii) Opening of PIR contacts PIR contacts PIR contacts NA NA NA

should open should open
immediately immediately
after closing after closing
of main of main
contacts contacts
OR OR
At least 5 At least 5 ms
ms prior to prior to
opening of opening of
main main contacts
contacts at at rated
rated air/gas air/gas
pressure pressure
where the where the

PIR contacts PIR contacts
remain remain closed
closed
21. Max. difference in the 2.5(within a 2.5(within a 3.3(opening) 3.3(opening) As per IEC
instants of closing/opening pole) pole) 5.0(closing) 3.3(closing)
of contacts (ms) between 3.3(opening) 3.3(opening)
poles at rated control 5.0(closing) 5.0(closing)
voltage and rated operating
& quenching media
pressures
22. Maximum allowable 1.9 p.u. 2.3 p.u. As per IEC As per IEC As per IEC
switching over voltage
under any switching
condition
23. Trip coil and closing coil 220V DC 220V DC 220V DC 220V DC 220V DC
voltage with variation as or 110V DC or 110V
specified DC
24. Noise level at base and up As per IEC 140dB 140dB 140dB 140dB
to 50 m distance from base (max.) (max.) (max.) (max.)
of circuit breaker
25. Rating of Auxiliary 10A at 10A at 10A at 10A at 10A at
contacts 220V DC 220V DC 220V DC 220V DC 220V DC
26. Breaking capacity of Aux. 2A DC with 2A DC with 2A DC with 2A DC with 2A DC
Contacts circuit time circuit time circuit time circuit time with circuit
constant not constant not constant not constant not time
less than less than less than less than constant
20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms not less
than 20ms
27. Rated insulation levels
i) Full wave impulse ±2100kVp ±1425 kVp ±1050 kVp ±650 kVp ±325 kVp
withstand (1.2 /50 µs)
between line terminals and
ground
ii) Full wave impulse 2100kVp 1425 kVp ±1050 kVp + 650kVp ±325 kVp
withstand (1.2 /50 µs) impulse on impulse on
between terminals with one terminal one terminal
circuit breaker open & 455 kVp & 240 kVp
power power
frequency frequency
voltage of voltage of
opposite opposite
polarity on polarity on
the other the other
terminal terminal
iii) Rated switching impulse + 1550kVp +1050 kVp NA NA NA
withstand voltage
(250/2500 µs) Dry & wet
between line terminals and
ground .
iv) Rated switching impulse 1175kVp 900 kVp NA NA NA
withstand voltage impulse on impulse on
(250/2500 µs) Dry &wet one terminal one terminal
Between terminals with & 650 kVp & 345 kVp
circuit breaker open power power
frequency frequency

voltage of voltage of
opposite opposite
polarity on polarity on
the other the other
terminal terminal
v) One minute power 830kV rms 520 kV rms. 460 kV rms. 275 kV rms 140 kV
frequency dry withstand rms
voltage between line
terminals and ground
vi) One minute power 1150kV rms 610 kV rms. 460 kV rms. 275 kV rms 160 kV
frequency dry withstand rms
voltage between terminals
with circuit breaker open
28. Minimum corona 508 kV rms 320kV rms 156 kV rms 92 kV rms NA
extinction voltage with CB
in all positions
29. Max. radio interference 2500 µV 1000 µV 1000 µV 500µV NA
voltage for frequency (at 508kV (at 266kV (at 156kV (at 92kV
between 0.5 MHz and 2 rms) rms) rms) rms)
MHz (Micro volts)
30. Minimum Creepage
distance*
i) Phase to ground 20000mm 10500mm 6125mm 3625mm 1813mm
(25mm/kV)
ii) Between CB terminals 18000mm 10500mm 6125mm 3625mm 1813mm
31. System neutral earthing Effectively earthed
32. Rated terminal load As per IEC or as per the value calculated based on specific switchyard
layout requirement, whichever is higher.
33. Auxiliary contacts Besides requirement of technical specification, the manufacturer/contractor
shall wire up 10 NO + 10 NC contacts exclusively for purchaser’s use and
wired up to common marshalling box.
34. No. of terminals in All contacts & control circuits to be wired out up to common marshalling
common marshalling box box + minimum 24 terminals exclusively for purchaser’s future use
35. Seismic level 0.5g horizontal for the site location under the Zone-V as per IS-1893
0.3g horizontal for the site location under other than the Zone-V as per IS-
1893
* The values indicated are for specific creepage of 25mm/kV. In case of specific
creepage of 31mm/kV specified, the Minimum Creepage distance values shall be
concidered proportionately.
17.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING TESTS
17.1 An indicative list of tests is given below. All routine tests except power frequency
voltage dry withstand test on main circuit breaker shall be repeated on the
completely assembled breaker at site. For Pre-commissioning tests, procedures
and formats for circuit breakers, POWERGRID document no. CF/CB/03/R-4
dated 01/04/2013 of document no. D-2-01-03-01-04 dated 01-04-2013 will be the
reference document. This document will be available at respective sites and shall
be referred by the contractor. Contractor shall perform any additional test based
on specialties of the items as per the field Q.P./instructions of the equipment
Supplier or Employer without any extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor

shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests alongwith
calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Employer for
approval.
(a) Insulation resistance of each pole.
(b) Check adjustments, if any suggested by manufacturer.
(c) Breaker closing and opening time.
(d) Slow and Power closing operation and opening.
(e) Trip free and anti pumping operation.
(f) Minimum pick-up voltage of coils.
(g) Dynamic Contact resistance measurement.
(h) Functional checking of control circuits interlocks, tripping through

protective relays and auto reclose operation.
(i) Insulation resistance of control circuits, motor etc.
(j) Resistance of closing and tripping coils.
(k) SF6 gas leakage check.
(l) Dew Point Measurement
(m) Operation check of pressure switches and gas density monitor during
gas filling.
(n) Checking of mechanical ‘CLOSE’ interlock, wherever applicable.
(o) Testing of grading capacitor.
(p) Resistance measurement of main circuit.
(q) Checking of operating mechanisms
(r) Check for annunciations in control room.
(s) Point of wave switching test (wherever applicable)
17.2 The contractor shall ensure that erection, testing and commissioning of circuit
breaker shall be carried out under the supervision of the circuit breaker
manufacturer's representative. The commissioning report shall be signed by the
manufacturer’s representative.

18.0 ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR DEFECTS OBSERVED DURING DEFECT
LIABILITY PERIOD
The actions required to be taken by contractor in case of defects observed in AIS type
Circuit Breakers of ratings 132kV & above during the warranty period (defect liability
period) shall be as per following. Further, the replaced/repaired/ refurbished equipment
(or part of equipment) shall have warranty in line with the GCC clause 22 in SCC.
Sl.no. Nature of problem Corrective measures to be taken by

contractor
1. Blasting of interrupter, PIR, pole column, Replacement of compete CB pole
Including SF6 gas
a. Abnormal DCRM and Travel Measurement Repair/replacement of affected assembly/
b. Contact assembly and internal component component based on repair procedure
damage, misalignment not leading to approved by QA
complete failure of interrupter/ PIR
2. Crack in insulator, cementing joint of interrupter , Replacement of affected part
PIR , pole column
3. SF6 gas leakage from sealing and bolted joints. Rectification by replacement of gasket,
SF6 gas leakage detectable by any Leakage O-ring, sealing, Interrupter or affected
Detection Method part to be replaced etc
If unable to arrest the leakage in 02
attempts, replacement of interrupter/
column
4. SF6 gas low dew point: > (-)35 deg C at Re-conditioning of gas.
atmospheric pressure. If does not improve, complete evacuation
of CB, replacement filter material and
gas
5. Oil leakage of grading capacitor Replacement or Refurbishment of
Change in Capacitance value beyond +/- 5 % grading capacitor
w.r.t. to value of Capacitance obtained at site
during pre-commissioning test.
6. Pole/ break discrepancy (during O&M) Rectification/replacement of affected
Limits: parts
Break to Break (Opening/Closing) : max. 2.5 ms
Phase to Phase (Opening) : max. 3.33 ms
Phase to Phase (Closing) : max 5 ms
7. Static Contact Resistance: increase >50% from Rectification/Replacement of pole
factory/ pre-commissioning value or
>75 micro-ohm/ break whichever is lower
8. Drive mechanism assembly failure Rectification/ Replacement of affected
part
9. Trip/ close coil, density monitor, relays and Replacement of affected part
contactors and components of common MB
Note: 1) Replaced/Repaired/Refurbished Equipment (or part of equipment) shall

have 2 years warranty without prejudice to contractual warranty period.
2) The measurement at site shall be carried out as per POWERGRID

standard Pre-commissioning procedures as indicated in Technical
Specification.

SECTION-GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
पावर �ग्रड काप�रे शन आफ इिन्डया �ल�मटे ड

(भारत सरकार का उद्यम)
Power Grid Corporation of India Limited
(A Government of India Enterprises)
Document No.: C/ENGG/SPEC/GTR (Rev.14) Jan’ 2017

MODEL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SECTION‐GTR
(GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT)
[Rev. No. 14]

SECTION- GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIRMENT (GTR)
Followings are the major changes made in the Technical Specification, Section-GTR (Rev.- 14)
Clause No. Major Modifications

4.6 - Creepage of insulator strings has been linked with Section-Switchyard Erection
- Section Clearance for 33kV & 11kV system has been revised as 2800mm
- Duration of Rated short circuit current for 66kV, 33kV & 11kV system has been
revised as 3 secs in place 1 sec
4.6.1 Major Technical Parameters for switchyard equipments have been deleted from
section-GTR and to be referred in technical specification of respective
equipment
5.1 Comprehensive list of drawings/documents which are to be submitted to the
Employer is enclosed in Annexure-E
8.0 Quality assurance programme has been modified
8.2 Quality assurance documents has been modified
8.3 Inspection, Testing & Inspection certificate has been modified
9.2 - Type Test witnessed by reputed consultant has been deleted
- Type Test Report Validity has been modified to 10 years for CT & CVT
- Following is deleted
“Further, in case type tests are required to be conducted/repeated and the
deputation of Inspector/Employer's representative is required, then all the
expenses shall be borne by the contractor. The Employer shall bear the
expenses for deputation of Employer’s representative(s) for witnessing the type
tests”.
9.5 New clause added – “The list of makes of various items, for which Type test
reports are not required to be submitted are specified in Compendium of
Vendors (COV)’ has been added.
12.2.1 Minimum weight of the zinc coating is 900 gm/sq.m for coastal area (30km
from sea shore approximately) is specified.
12.3.7 No painting is envisaged for the surface of stainless steel
13.3 Specification for open storage platform alongwith drawing has been included.
14.1 All T&P shall be taken back by the contractor after commissioning of the system
14.2 The scope of special tools and tackles are to be decided during detail engineering
and the list of special tools and tackles, if any shall be finalized and the same
shall be supplied without any additional cost implication to the Employer.
17.8 Current carrying parts (500A and above) of the clamp/connector shall be
provided with minimum four numbers of bolts preferably for 132kV &
above.
18.2 Control cabinets, junction boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes shall be
made of stainless steel of atleast 1.5 mm thick or aluminum enclosure of
atleast 1.6 mm thick and shall be dust, water and vermin proof. Stainless
steel used shall be of grade SS304 (SS316 for coastal area) or better.
19.0 New Clause for ‘DISPOSAL OF PACKING MATERIAL & WASTE FROM
CONSTRUCTION SITE ‘ has been added
22.9 RTV Coating on porcelain insulators (for coastal area) has been included.
24.0 Clause 24.0 (TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT OF EQUIPMENTS) has been revised as
per technical approval vide ref. no. C/ENGG/GTR/REV dated 08.8.2016 (except
for GIS):
- Circuit Breaker, Isolator, Current Transformer, Capacitive Voltage
transformer, Inductive Voltage transformer, Surge Arrester and Wave Trap
- 765kV class Transformer
- 765kV class Reactor
Clause No. Major Modifications
- 400kV, 220kV, 132kV and 110kV class Transformer
- 400kV, 220kV and 132kV class Reactor
- 400 kV Grade XLPE Power Cables
- 220KV Grade XLPE Power Cables
- 132KV, 110kV, 66kV Grade XLPE Power Cables
- 1.1 KV Grade PVC Control Cable
- 1.1 KV Grade PVC Power Cable
- Battery
- Battery Charger
- LT Transformer
- Composite Long Rod Polymer Insulator (765kV & 400kV)
- Control, Relay & Protection System and Sub-station Automation System
- Analog and digital PLCC panels (765kV, 400kV, 220kV & 132kV)
- “Indian Associate” for execution of on shore supply and services for 765 kV
Transformer & Reactor package
Annexure-D List of drawings for second advance has been revised
NOTES:-
1. The above is the list of major changes w.r.t. the previous revision (Rev.-13). However, Bidders
are advised to read the entire section-GTR for other changes and quote accordingly.
SECTION- GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIRMENT (GTR)
INDEX
CLAUSE NO. ITEM PAGE NO.

1.0 Foreword 1
2.0 General Requirement 1
3.0 Standards 1
4.0 Services to be performed by the Equipment being furnished 2
5.0 Engineering Data and Drawings 5
6.0 Material/Workmanship 7
7.0 Design Improvements/Coordination 9
8.0 Quality Assurance Programme 9
9.0 Type Testing, Inspection & Inspection Certificate 15
10.0 Tests 16
11.0 Packaging & Protection 17
12.0 Finishing of Metal Surfaces 17
13.0 Handling, Storing & Installation 19
14.0 Tools 20
15.0 Auxiliary Supply 21
16.0 Support Structure 21
17.0 Clamps and Connectors including Terminal Connectors 22
18.0 Control Cabinets, Junction Boxes, Terminal Boxes & 23
Marshalling Boxes for Outdoor Equipment
19.0 Disposal of packing material & waste from construction site 24
20.0 Terminal Blocks and Wiring 24
21.0 Lamps and Sockets 25
22.0 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support Insulators 26
23.0 Motors 26
24.0 Technical Requirement of Equipments 28
Annexure-A Corona and Radio Interference Voltage (RIV) Test 2 sheets
Annexure-B Seismic Withstand Test Procedure 1 sheet
Annexure-C List of General Standards and Codes 23 sheets
Annexure-D List of Drawings/Documents for second advance 2 sheets
Annexure-E Comprehensive List of drawings 9 sheets
Annexure-F Assessment report from Main Contractor for proposed sub- 1 sheet
vendor’s – List of enclosures
Annexure-G MQP & Inspection Level Requirement 3 sheets
Annexure-H Specification of RTV coating on porcelain insulators 2 sheets
Annexure-I Standard Drawing for open platform 1 sheet
SECTION-GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (GTR)
1.0 FOREWORD
The provisions under this section are intended to supplement requirements for the
materials, equipments and services covered under other sections of tender documents
and are not exclusive.
2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
2.1 The contractor shall furnish catalogues, engineering data, technical information, design
documents, drawings etc., fully in conformity with the technical specification during
detailed engineering.
2.2 It is recognised that the Contractor may have standardised on the use of certain
components, materials, processes or procedures different from those specified herein.
Alternate proposals offering similar equipment based on the manufacturer’s standard
practice will also be considered provided such proposals meet the specified designs,
standard and performance requirements and are acceptable to Employer.
2.3 Wherever a material or article is specified or defined by the name of a particular brand,
Manufacturer or Vendor, the specific name mentioned shall be understood as
establishing type, function and quality and not as limiting competition.
2.4 Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all mountings, fittings,
fixtures and standard accessories normally provided with such equipment and/or
needed for erection, completion and safe operation of the equipment as required by
applicable codes though they may not have been specifically detailed in the Technical
Specifications unless included in the list of exclusions. Materials and components
which are minor in nature and incidental to the requirement but not specifically stated
in the specification and bid price schedule, which are necessary for commissioning and
satisfactory operation of the switchyard/ substation unless specifically excluded shall
be deemed to be included in the scope of the specification and shall be supplied
without any extra cost. All similar standard components/parts of similar standard
equipment provided, shall be inter-changeable with one another.
2.5 The Contractor shall also be responsible for the overall co-ordination with internal
/external agencies; Supplier of Employer’s supplied equipments, project management,
training of Employer’s manpower, loading, unloading, handling, insurance, moving to
final destination for successful erection, testing and commissioning of the substation
/switchyard.
2.6 The bidder shall be responsible for safety of human and equipment during the working.
It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to co-ordinate and obtain Electrical
Inspector's clearance before commissioning. Any additional items, modification due to
observation of such statutory authorities shall be provided by the Contractor at no
extra cost to the Employer.
3.0 STANDARDS
3.1 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered, manufactured,
built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules, Laws and
Regulations of India.
3.2 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest issue
with all amendments (as on the originally scheduled date of bid opening) of standard
specified under Annexure-C of this section, unless specifically mentioned in the
specification.
3.3 The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not mutually
exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to compliment each other.
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 34
C/ENGG/SPEC/GTR (Rev. No.:-14, Jan 2017)
3.4 The Contractor shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification is
not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in
conjunction with specific IS/IEC.
3.5 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specifications exceed or differ than
those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall
take precedence.
3.6 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better
performance than that specified in the standards specified under Annexure-C/
individual sections for various equipments shall also, be accepted, however the salient
points of difference shall be clearly brought out during detailed engineering along with
English language version of such standard. The equipment conforming to standards
other than specified under Annexure-C/individual sections for various equipments
shall be subject to Employer’s approval.
4.0 SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED
4.1 The 800kV and 420kV system is being designed to limit the switching surge over
voltage of 1.9 p.u. and 2.5 p.u., respectively and the power frequency over voltage of 1.4
p.u. and 1.5 p.u., respectively. In case of the 420kV system, the initial value of the
temporary overvoltages could be 2.0 p.u. for 1-2 cycles. The equipment furnished
under this specification shall perform all its functions and operate satisfactorily
without showing undue strain, restrike etc under such over voltage conditions.
4.2 All equipments shall also perform satisfactorily under various other electrical,
electromechanical and meteorological conditions of the site of installation.
4.3 All equipment shall be able to withstand all external and internal mechanical, thermal
and electromechanical forces due to various factors like wind load, temperature
variation, ice & snow, (wherever applicable) short circuit etc for the equipment.
4.4 The bidder shall design terminal connectors of the equipment taking into account
various forces that are required to withstand.
4.5 The equipment shall also comply to the following:
a) To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled at site shall be
“match marked”.
b) All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet/operating mechanism to
marshalling box of the equipment, shall bear proper identification to facilitate
the connection at site.
4.6 System Parameter
765kV, 400kV & 220kV System
SL Description of 765kV 400kV 220kV

No parameters System System System
1. System operating voltage 765kV 400kV 220kV

2. Maximum operating 800kV 420kV 245kV
voltage of the system
(rms)
3. Rated frequency 50HZ 50Hz 50Hz
4. No. of phase 3 3 3
5. Rated Insulation levels
____________________________________________________________________________
SL Description of 765kV 400kV 220kV

No parameters System System System
i) Full wave impulse 2100kVp 1550kVp 1050

withstand voltage kVp
(1.2/50 microsec.)
ii) Switching impulse 1550kVp 1050kVp -
withstand voltage
(250/2500 micro sec.)
dry and wet
iii) One minute power 830kV 630kV -
frequency dry withstand
voltage (rms)
iv) One minute power - - 460kV
frequency dry and wet
withstand voltage (rms)
6. Corona extinction 508 kV 320kV -
voltage
7. Max. radio interference 2500 µV 1000 µV 1000 µV
voltage for frequency at 508 kV rms at 266kV rms at 156kV rms
between 0.5 MHz and 2
MHz
8. Minimum creepage 20000 mm 10500 mm 6125 mm
distance - for Equipment (24800 mm for (13020 mm (7595 mm for
other than Insulator coastal area) for coastal coastal area)
string area)
Minimum creepage As specified in Section-Switchyard Erection
distance - for Insulator
String
9. Min. clearances
i. Phase to phase 7600mm 4000mm 2100 mm
(for conductor- (for conductor-
conductor conductor
configuration) configuration)
9400mm (for 4200mm (for
rod-conductor rod -conductor
configuration) configuration)
ii. Phase to earth 4900mm 3500 mm 2100 mm
(for conductor-
structure)
6400mm (for
rod- structure)
iii) Sectional clearances 10300 mm 6500 mm 5000 mm
10. Rated short circuit 40kA/50kA (as 40kA/50kA/ 40kA/
current for 1 sec. applicable) 63 kA 50kA(as
duration (as applicable)
applicable)
11. System neutral earthing Effectively Effectively Effectively
earthed earthed earthed
____________________________________________________________________________
132kV, 66kV, 33kV & 11kV System

SL Description of 132 kV 66kV 33 kV 11kV
No parameters System System System System
1. System operating voltage 132kV 66kV 33kV 11kV

2. Maximum operating 145kV 72.5kV 36kV 12kV
voltage of the
system(rms)
3. Rated frequency 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz
4. No. of phase 3 3 3 3
5. Rated Insulation levels
i) Full wave impulse 650 325 170 75
withstand voltage kVp kVp kVp kVp
(1.2/50 microsec.)
ii) One minute power 275kV 140kV 70kV 28kV
frequency dry and wet
withstand voltage (rms)
6. Max. radio interference 500 µV at - - -
voltage for frequency 92kV rms
between 0.5 MHz and 2
MHz
7. Minimum creepage 3625 mm 1813 mm 900 mm 300 mm
distance (4495mm (2248mm (1116mm (372mm
for for for coastal for
coastal coastal area) coastal
area) area) area)
8. Min. clearances
i. Phase to phase 1300 mm 750 mm 320 mm 280 mm
ii. Phase to earth 1300 mm 630 mm 320 mm 140 mm
iii. Sectional clearances 4000 mm 3000 mm 2800 mm 2800 mm
9. Rated short circuit 40kA/ 31.5 kA 25 kA 25 kA

current 31.5 kA for 3 sec for 3 sec for 3 sec
(as
applicable)
for 1 sec
10. System neutral earthing Effectively Effectively Effectively Effectively
earthed earthed earthed earthed
Notes:
1. The above parameters are applicable for installations up to an altitude of 1000m above
mean sea level. For altitude exceeding 1000m, necessary altitude correction factor shall
be applicable as per relevant IEC.
2. The insulation and RIV levels of the equipments shall be as per values given in the
Technical Specification of respective equipment.
3. Corona and radio interference voltage test and seismic withstand test procedures for
equipments shall be in line with the procedure given at Annexure-A and Annexure-B
respectively.
____________________________________________________________________________
5.0 ENGINEERING DATA AND DRAWINGS

5.1 The list of drawings/documents which are to be submitted to the Employer is enclosed
in Annexure-E. In case any additional drawings/documents are required, the same
shall also be submitted during execution of the contract.
5.2 The Contractor shall submit 4 (four) sets of drawings/ design documents /data /
detailed bill of quantity and 1 (one) set of test reports for the approval of the Employer.
The contractor shall also submit the softcopy of the above documents in addition to
hardcopy.
5.3 Drawings
5.3.1 All drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the
type, size, arrangement, material description, Bill of Materials, weight of each
component, break-up for packing and shipment, dimensions, internal & the external
connections, fixing arrangement required and any other information specifically
requested in the specifications.
5.3.2 Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name of the
Employer, the unit designation, the specifications title, the specification number and
the name of the Project. POWERGRID has standardized a large number of
drawings/documents of various make including type test reports which can be used
for all projects having similar requirements and in such cases no project specific
approval (except for list of applicable drawings alongwith type test reports) is
required. However, distribution copies of standard drawings/documents shall be
submitted as per provision of the contract. All titles, noting, markings and writings on
the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be in SI units.
5.3.3 The review of these data by the Employer will cover only general conformance of the
data to the specifications and documents, interfaces with the equipment provided
under the specifications, external connections and of the dimensions which might
affect substation layout. This review by the Employer may not indicate a thorough
review of all dimensions, quantities and details of the equipment, materials, any
devices or items indicated or the accuracy of the information submitted. This review
and/or approval by the Employer shall not be considered by the Contractor, as limiting
any of his responsibilities and liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the
requirements, specified under these specifications and documents.
5.5 All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the
approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractor’s risk. The Contractor may make
any changes in the design which are necessary to make the equipment conform to the
provisions and intent of the Contract and such changes will again be subject to
approval by the Employer. Approval of Contractor’s drawing or work by the Employer
shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities and liabilities under the
Contract.
5.6 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process including review
and approval by the Employer shall form part of the Contract Document and the entire
works performed under these specifications shall be performed in strict conformity,
unless otherwise expressly requested by the Employer in Writing.
5.7 Approval Procedure
The following schedule shall be followed generally for approval and for providing final
documentation.
i) Approval/comments/ As per L2 schedule
by Employer on initial
submission
____________________________________________________________________________
ii) Resubmission Within 3 (three) weeks

(whenever from date of comments
required)
iii) Approval or comments Within 3 (three) weeks of
receipt of resubmission.
iv) Furnishing of distribution 2 weeks from the date
copies (2 hard copies to each of approval
substation and one scanned
copy (pdf format)
v) Furnishing of distribution
copies of test reports
(a) Type test reports 2 weeks from the date
(one scanned softcopy in of final approval
pdf format to each substation
plus one for corporate centre
& one hardcopy per substation)
(b) Routine Test Reports -do-
(one copy for each
substation)
vi) Furnishing of instruction/ On completion of Engineering
operation manuals (2 copies
per substation and one softcopy
(pdf format) for corporate centre
& per substation)
(vii) As built drawings (two sets of On completion of entire works
hardcopy per substation & one
softcopy (pdf format) for
corporate centre & per substation)
NOTE :
(1) The contractor may please note that all resubmissions must incorporate all
comments given in the earlier submission by the Employer or adequate
justification for not incorporating the same must be submitted failing which the
submission of documents is likely to be returned.
(2) All drawings should be submitted in softcopy form, however substation design
drawings like SLD, GA, all layouts etc. shall also be submitted in AutoCAD
Version. SLD, GA & layout drawings shall be submitted for the entire substation
in case of substation extension also.
(3) The instruction Manuals shall contain full details of drawings of all equipment
being supplied under this contract, their exploded diagrams with complete
instructions for storage, handling, erection, commissioning, testing, operation,
trouble shooting, servicing and overhauling procedures.
(4) If after the commissioning and initial operation of the substation, the instruction
manuals require any modifications/additions/changes, the same shall be
incorporated and the updated final instruction manuals shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Employer.
(5) The Contractor shall furnish to the Employer catalogues of spare parts.
(6) All As-built drawings/documents shall be certified by site indicating the changes
before final submission.
____________________________________________________________________________
5.8 The list of major drawings/documents to be approved to qualify for second advance as
per Section SCC, shall be as per Annexure–D.
6.0 MATERIAL/ WORKMANSHIP
6.1 General Requirement
6.1.1 Where the specification does not contain references to workmanship, equipment,
materials and components of the covered equipment, it is essential that the same must
be new, of highest grade of the best quality of their kind, conforming to best
engineering practice and suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.
6.1.2 In case where the equipment, materials or components are indicated in the
specification as “similar” to any special standard, the Employer shall decide upon the
question of similarity. When required by the specification or when required by the
Employer the Contractor shall submit, for approval, all the information concerning the
materials or components to be used in manufacture. Machinery, equipment, materials
and components supplied, installed or used without such approval shall run the risk of
subsequent rejection, it is to be understood that the cost as well as the time delay
associated with the rejection shall be borne by the Contractor.
6.1.3 The design of the Works shall be such that installation, future expansions,
replacements and general maintenance may be undertaken with a minimum of time
and expenses. Each component shall be designed to be consistent with its duty and
suitable factors of safety, subject to mutual agreements. All joints and fastenings shall
be devised, constructed and documented so that the component parts shall be
accurately positioned and restrained to fulfill their required function. In general, screw
threads shall be standard metric threads. The use of other thread forms will only be
permitted when prior approval has been obtained from the Employer.
6.1.4 Whenever possible, all similar part of the Works shall be made to gauge and shall also
be made interchangeable with similar parts. All spare parts shall also be
interchangeable and shall be made of the same materials and workmanship as the
corresponding parts of the Equipment supplied under the Specification. Where
feasible, common component units shall be employed in different pieces of equipment
in order to minimize spare parts stocking requirements. All equipment of the same
type and rating shall be physically and electrically interchangeable.
6.1.5 All materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation(s). Only first-class work in accordance with the best
modern practices will be accepted. Installation shall be considered as being the
erection of equipment at its permanent location. This, unless otherwise specified, shall
include unpacking, cleaning and lifting into position, grouting, levelling, aligning,
coupling of or bolting down to previously installed equipment bases/foundations,
performing the alignment check and final adjustment prior to initial operation, testing
and commissioning in accordance with the manufacturer’s tolerances, instructions and
the Specification. All factory assembled rotating machinery shall be checked for
alignment and adjustments made as necessary to re-establish the manufacturer’s limits
suitable guards shall be provided for the protection of personnel on all exposed
rotating and / or moving machine parts and shall be designed for easy installation and
removal for maintenance purposes. The spare equipment(s) shall be installed at
designated locations and tested for healthiness.
6.1.6 The Contractor shall apply oil and grease of the proper specification to suit the
machinery, as is necessary for the installation of the equipment. Lubricants used for
installation purposes shall be drained out and the system flushed through where
necessary for applying the lubricant required for operation. The Contractor shall apply
all operational lubricants to the equipment installed by him.
____________________________________________________________________________
6.1.7 All oil, grease and other consumables used in the Works/Equipment shall be purchased
in India unless the Contractor has any special requirement for the specific application
of a type of oil or grease not available in India. If such is the case, he shall declare in the
proposal, where such oil or grease is available. He shall help Employer in establishing
equivalent Indian make and Indian Contractor. The same shall be applicable to other
consumables too.
6.2 Provisions For Exposure to Hot and Humid climate
Outdoor equipment supplied under the specification shall be suitable for service and
storage under tropical conditions of high temperature, high humidity, heavy rainfall
and environment favourable to the growth of fungi and mildew. The indoor
equipments located in non-air conditioned areas shall also be of same type.
6.2.1 Space Heaters
6.2.1.1 The heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation at 240V as supply voltage. On-
off switch and fuse shall be provided.
6.2.1.2 One or more adequately rated thermostatically connected heaters shall be supplied to
prevent condensation in any compartment. The heaters shall be installed in the
compartment and electrical connections shall be made sufficiently away from below
the heaters to minimize deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be
suitable to maintain the compartment temperature to prevent condensation.
6.2.2 FUNGI STATIC VARNISH
Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall be
applied on parts which may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of fungi due
to the presence or deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall not be applied to
any surface of part where the treatment will interfere with the operation or
performance of the equipment. Such surfaces or parts shall be protected against the
application of the varnish.
6.2.3 Ventilation opening
Wherever ventilation is provided, the compartments shall have ventilation openings
with fine wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of insects and to reduce to a
minimum the entry of dirt and dust.
6.2.4 Degree of Protection
The enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling Boxes, panels
etc. to be installed shall comply with following degree of protection as detailed here
under:
a) Installed out door: IP- 55
b) Installed indoor in air conditioned area: IP-31
c) Installed in covered area: IP-52
d) Installed indoor in non-air conditioned area where possibility of entry of water is
limited: IP-41.
e) For LT Switchgear (AC & DC distribution Boards): IP-52
The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS:13947 (Part-I)/IEC-60947

(Part-I)/IS 12063/IEC-60529. Type test report for IP-55 or higher degree of protection
test, shall be submitted for approval.
6.3 RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS
6.3.1 Each main and auxiliary item of substation is to have permanently attached to it in a
conspicuous position a rating plate of non-corrosive material upon which is to be
engraved manufacturer’s name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or serial
____________________________________________________________________________
number together with details of the loading conditions under which the item of
substation in question has been designed to operate, and such diagram plates as may
be required by the Employer. The rating plate of each equipment shall be according to
IEC requirement.
6.3.2 All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates of transformers, reactors, CB, CT,
CVT, SA, Isolators, C & R panels and PLCC equipments shall be bilingual with Hindi
inscription first followed by English. Alternatively two separate plates one with Hindi
and the other with English inscriptions may be provided.
6.4 FIRST FILL OF CONSUMABLES, OIL AND LUBRICANTS
All the first fill of consumables such as oils, lubricants, filling compounds, touch up
paints, soldering/brazing material for all copper piping of circuit breakers and
essential chemicals etc. which will be required to put the equipment covered under the
scope of the specifications, into operation, shall be furnished by the Contractor unless
specifically excluded under the exclusions in these specifications and documents.
7.0 DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS / COORDINATION
7.1 The bidder shall offer the equipment meeting the requirement of the technical
specification. However, the Employer or the Contractor may propose changes in the
specification of the equipment or quality thereof and if the contractor & Employer
agree upon any such changes, the specification shall be modified accordingly.
7.2 If any such agreed upon change is such that it affects the price and schedule of
completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the price
and/or schedule of completion before the Contractor proceeds with the change.
Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been
amended accordingly.
7.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate
equipments to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the entire system. The
basic design requirements are detailed out in this Specification. The design of various
components, sub-assemblies and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy
field assembly and maintenance.
7.4 The Contractor has to coordinate designs and terminations with the agencies (if any)
who are Consultants/Contractor for the Employer. The names of agencies shall be
intimated to the successful bidders.
7.5 The Contractor will be called upon to attend design co-ordination meetings with the
Engineer, other Contractor’s and the Consultants of the Employer (if any) during the
period of Contract. The Contractor shall attend such meetings at his own cost at
POWERGRID Corporate Centre, Gurgaon (Haryana) or at mutually agreed venue as and
when required and fully cooperate with such persons and agencies involved during
those discussions.
8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
8.1 To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this Contract, whether
manufactured or performed within the Contractor’s Works or at his Sub-Contractor’s
premises or at the Employer’s site or at any other place of Work as applicable, are in
accordance with the specifications, the Contractor shall ensure suitable quality
assurance programme to control such activities at all points necessary. A quality
assurance programme of the Contractor shall be in line with ISO requirements & shall
generally cover the following:
a) The organisation structure for the management and implementation of the
proposed quality assurance programme.
____________________________________________________________________________
b) System for Document and Data Control.

c) Qualification and Experience data of Bidder’s key personnel.
d) The procedure for purchases of materials, parts, components and selection of sub-
Contractor’s services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw
material inspection, verification of material purchases etc.
e) System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including process
controls, fabrication and assembly control.
f) System for Control of non-conforming products including deviation
dispositioning, if any and system for corrective and preventive actions based on
the feedback received from the Customers and also internally documented system
for Customer complaints.
g) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.
h) System for Control of calibration of testing and measuring equipment and the
indication of calibration status on the instruments.
i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.
j) System of Internal Quality Audits, Management review and initiation of corrective
and Preventive actions based on the above.
k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the Employer.
l) System for maintenance of records.
m) System for handling, storage and delivery.
n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and procedure
adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each item of
equipment furnished and /or service rendered.
o) System for various field activities i.e. unloading, receipt at site, proper storage,
erection, testing and commissioning of various equipment and maintenance of
records. In this regard, the Employer has already prepared Standard Field Quality
Plan for transmission line/substation equipments as applicable, Civil/erection
Works which is required to be followed for associated works.
The Employer or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to carry out
quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and procedure of the
Contractor/his vendor’s quality management and control activities.
8.2 Quality Assurance Documents

The Contractor shall ensure availability of the following Quality Assurance Documents:
i) All Non-Destructive Examination procedures, stress relief and weld repair
procedure actually used during fabrication, and reports including radiography
interpretation reports.
ii) Welder and welding operator qualification certificates.
iii) Welder’s identification list, welding operator’s qualification procedure and
welding identification symbols.
iv) Raw Material test reports on components as specified by the specification and in
the quality plan.
____________________________________________________________________________
v) The Manufacturing Quality Plan(MQP) indicating Customer Inspection Points

(CIPs) at various stages of manufacturing and methods used to verify that the
inspection and testing points in the quality plan were performed satisfactorily.
vi) Factory test results for testing required as per applicable quality plan/technical
specifications/GTP/Drawings etc.
vii) Stress relief time temperature charts/oil impregnation time temperature charts,
wherever applicable.
8.3 INSPECTION, TESTING & INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

8.3.1 Contractor shall procure bought out items from sub-vendors as per the list in
“Compendium of Vendors” available on POWERGRID web-site
www.powergridindia.com after ensuring compliance to the requirements/conditions
mentioned therein. Contractor shall explore first the possibilities of procuring the
bought out items from POWERGRID approved existing vendors. In case of their
unavailability / non-response, Contractor may approach POWERGRID for additional
sub-vendor approval. In that case, the assessment report of proposed sub vendor by
Contractor along with the enclosures as per Annexure-F shall be submitted within 60
days of the award. The proposal shall be reviewed and approval will be accorded based
on the verification of the document submitted and/or after the physical assessment of
the works as the case may be. The physical assessment conducted by POWERGRID, if
required, shall be on chargeable basis. Charges shall be as per the POWERGRID norms
prevailing at that time, which shall be intimated by POWERGRID separately. If proposal
for sub-vendor is submitted after 60 days, the Contractor’s proposal normally will not
be considered for current LOA. However, POWERGRID may process the case for
developing more vendors for referred items, if found relevant. In all cases, It is the
responsibility of the Contractor that Project activities do not suffer on account of delay
in approval/non approval of a new sub-vendor.
The responsibility and the basis of inspection for various items & equipment is placed
at Annexure-G along with the requirement of MQP (Manufacturing Quality Plan),
ITP(Inspection & Test Plan), FAT(Factory Acceptance Test) which should be valid &
POWERGRID approved and Level of inspection envisaged against each item.
Contractor shall ensure that order for items where MQP/ITP/FAT is required will be
placed only on vendors having valid MQP/ITP/FAT and where the supplier’s
MQP/ITP/FAT is either not valid or has not been approved by POWERGRID, MQP shall
be generally submitted as per POWERGRID format before placing order.
Items not covered under MQP/ITP/FAT shall be offered for inspection as per
POWERGRID LOA/technical Specifications/POWERGRID approved data sheets/
POWERGRID approved drawings and relevant Indian/International standards.
Inspection Levels: For implementation of projects in a time bound manner and to avoid
any delay in deputation of POWERGRID or its authorized representative, involvement
of POWERGRID for inspection of various items / equipment will be based on the level
below:
Level –I: Contractor to raise all inspection calls and review the report of tests
carried out by the manufacturer, on his own, as per applicable standards/
POWERGRID specification, and submit to concerned POWERGRID
inspection office/Inspection Engineer. CIP/MICC will be issued by
POWERGRID based on review of test reports/certificates of
manufacturers.
____________________________________________________________________________
Level – II: Contractor to raise all inspection calls and carry out the inspection on
behalf of POWERGRID on the proposed date of inspection as per
applicable standards/specification. However, in case POWERGRID wishes
to associate itself during inspection, the same would be intimated to
Contractor and CIP/MICC will be issued by POWERGRID. Else, Contractor
would submit their test reports/certificates to POWERGRID. CIP/MICC
will be issued by POWERGRID based on review of test reports/
certificates.
Level - III: Contractor to raise inspection calls for both, stage (as applicable) & final
inspection and carry out the stage inspections (if applicable) on behalf of
POWERGRID on the proposed date of inspection as per applicable
standards/specification. However, in case POWERGRID wishes to
associate itself during stage inspection, the same would be intimated to
Contractor and CIP will be issued by POWERGRID. Else, Contractor would
submit the test reports / certificates of stage inspection after their own
review and CIP will be issued by POWERGRID based on review of test
reports / certificates. Final inspection will be carried out by POWERGRID
and CIP/MICC will be issued by POWERGRID.
Level – IV: Contractor to raise inspection calls for both, stage (as applicable) & final
inspections. POWERGRID will carry out the inspection for both stage &
final inspection as per applicable standards/specification and CIP/MICC
will be issued by POWERGRID.
8.3.2 Contractor shall ensure that to implement the above inspection levels, particularly for
the quality control and inspection at sub-vendor’s works, they would depute sufficient
qualified & experienced manpower in their Quality Control and Inspection department.
Further, to assure quality of construction, Contractor shall have a separate workforce
having appropriate qualification & experience and deploy suitable tools and plant for
maintaining quality requirement during construction in line with applicable Field
Quality Plan (FQP).
8.3.3 The Employer, his duly authorised representative and/or outside inspection agency
acting on behalf of the Employer shall have at all reasonable times access to the
Contractor’s premises or Works and shall have the power at all reasonable times to
ensure that proper Quality Management practices / norms are adhered to, inspect and
examine the materials & workmanship of the Works, to carry out Quality/Surveillance
Audit during manufacture or erection and if part of the Works is being manufactured
or assembled at other premises or works. The Contractor shall obtain for the Employer
and for his duly authorised representative permission to inspect as if the works were
manufactured or assembled on the Contractor’s own premises or works. The
item/equipment, if found unsatisfactory with respect to workmanship or material is
liable to be rejected. The observations for improvements during product/ process
inspection by POWERGRID shall be recorded in Quality Improvement Register
(available & maintained at works) for review & timely compliance of observations.
8.3.4 Contractor shall submit inspection calls over internet through POWERGRID website.
The required vendor code and password to enable raising inspection call will be
furnished to the main Contractor within 30 days of award of contract on submission of
documents by Contractor. After raising the inspection calls, Contractor shall then
proceed as per the message of that particular call which is available on the message
board.
8.3.5 The Employer reserves the right to witness any or all type, acceptance and routine
tests specified for which the Contractor shall give the Employer/Inspector Twenty
one (21) days written notice of any material being ready for testing for each stage of
____________________________________________________________________________
testing as identified in the approved quality plan as customer inspection point(CIP)

for indigenous inspections. All inspection calls for overseas material shall be given at
least forty five (45) days in advance. Such tests shall be to the Contractor’s account
except for the expenses of the Inspection Engineer. The Employer/inspector, unless
witnessing of the tests is waived by Employer, will attend such tests within Twenty
one (21) days of the date of which the equipment is notified as being ready for
test/inspection, failing which the Contractor may proceed with the test which shall be
deemed to have been made in the Inspector’s presence and he shall forthwith forward
to the Inspector three copies of tests, duly certified. Contractor shall ensure, before
giving notice for type test, that all drawings and quality plans have been got approved.
The equipment shall be dispatched to site only after approval of Routine and
Acceptance test results and Issuance of Dispatch Clearance in writing by the Employer.
CIP/Material Inspection clearance certificate (MICC) shall be issued by the Employer
after inspection of the equipment or review of test reports as applicable. Employer
may waive off the presence of Employer’s inspecting engineer. In that case test will be
carried out as per approved QP and test certificate will be furnished by the supplier for
approval. CIP/MICC will be issued only after review and approval of the test reports.
8.3.6 Contractor shall generally offer material for inspection as per supply bar chart
approved by POWERGRID and not before 30 days from schedule indicated in the bar
chart. In case Contractor offers material(s) for inspection prior to 30 days from the
scheduled date with necessary approval of POWERGRID, POWERGRID shall inspect the
material and issue CIP only. However, in such an exceptional case, MICC shall be issued
only as per provision of original / revised approved supply schedule.
8.3.7 Contractor shall minimize the number of inspection calls by offering optimum
quantities in each inspection call at the respective manufacturer’s works.
8.3.8 Contractor shall inspect the material themselves and only after they are fully convinced
about the Quality, they shall offer the material for POWERGRID inspection and shall
also ensure that relevant portion of LOA/NOA, approved drawing and data sheets
along with applicable Quality Plans are available at the works of Contractor or their
Sub-vendor before the material is offered for inspection.
8.3.9 Contractor shall ensure that material which has been cleared for dispatch after
inspection will be dispatched within 30 days in case of domestic supplies and within 60
days in case of Off-shore supplies from the date of issuance of CIP. Material which is
not dispatched within stipulated time as above will be reoffered for POWERGRID
inspection or specific approval of POWERGRID QA&I shall be obtained for delayed
dispatch.
8.3.10 The Employer or IE shall give notice in writing to the Contractor, of any objection
either to conformance to any drawings or to any equipment and workmanship which
in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall give due
consideration to such objections and shall either make the modifications that may be
necessary to meet the said objections or shall confirm in writing to the
Employer/Inspection Engineer giving reasons therein, that no modifications are
necessary to comply with the Contract.
8.3.11 All Test Reports and documents to be submitted in English during final inspection of
equipment by POWERGRID or as and when required for submission.
8.3.12 When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor’s or Sub-Contractor’s
works, the Employer/Inspection Engineer(IE) shall issue a certificate to this effect
within fifteen (15) days after completion of tests & submission of documents by
Contractor/manufacturer but if the tests are not witnessed by the Employer/IE, the
certificate shall be issued within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contractor’s Test
certificate by the Employer/IE. Contractor shall, on completion of all tests, submit test
____________________________________________________________________________
reports within Ten (10) days to POWERGRID IE. Failure of the Employer/IE to issue
such a certificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the Works.
The completion of these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the Employer
to accept the equipment should, it, on further tests after erection, be found not to
comply with the Contract.
8.3.13 In all cases, where the Contract provides for tests whether at the premises or works
of the Contractor or of any Sub- Contractor, the Contractor, except where otherwise
specified, shall provide free of charge such items as labour, materials, electricity, fuel,
water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably demanded by the
Employer/Inspector or his authorised representative to carry out effectively such tests
of the equipment in accordance with the Contract and shall give facilities to the
Employer/Inspection Engineer or to his authorised representative to accomplish
testing.
8.3.14 The inspection and acceptance by Employer and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon
shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of
the agreed quality assurance programme forming a part of the Contract, or if such
equipment is found to be defective at a later stage.
8.3.15 The Employer will have the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of
reasonable nature carried out at Contractor’s premises or at site or in any other place
in addition of aforesaid type and routine tests, to satisfy that the material comply with
the specification.
8.3.16 The Employer reserves the right for getting any additional field tests conducted on the
completely assembled equipment at site to satisfy that material complies with
specifications.
8.3.17 Rework/ Re-engineering, if any, on any item/equipment shall be carried out only after
mutual discussions and in accordance with mutually agreed procedure. Contractor
shall submit Joint Inspection Report of equipments under Re-Work/Re-Engineering
alongwith procedure for the same to POWERGRID for approval, before taking up the
Re-Work/Re-Engineering, failing which POWERGRID reserves the right to reject the
equipment.
8.3.18 Contractor may establish a field test Laboratory to execute Civil Construction testing
requirements at site with the condition that all testing equipment shall be calibrated
from POWERGRID approved accredited Testing laboratories, with calibration
certificates kept available at site and all testing personnel employed in the Field
Testing Laboratories to be qualified and experienced Engineers or testing to be carried
out at POWERGRID approved Third Party Laboratories.
8.3.19 Contractor shall ensure that all possible steps are taken to avoid damages to the
equipment during transport, storage and erection.
8.3.20 Contractor shall implement additional stringent quality checks and preparation during
installation of GIS at site (if applicable) as per POWERGRID approved
guidelines/Technical specifications.
8.3.21 Contractor shall ensure commissioning of all CSDs along with Circuit Breakers
wherever applicable.
8.3.22 For EHV transformers/reactors:
Insulation oil shall be as per POWERGRID Technical specifications and same grade
shall be used for impregnation of the active part & testing at the works of
Transformer/Reactor Manufacturer and as well as for filling the Transformer/Reactors
at site. Contractor to ensure that windings for Transformer/Reactors are made in air-
conditioned environment. Core-coil assembly shall be performed in positive
____________________________________________________________________________
pressurized dust controlled environment. Dust measurements shall be monitored

regularly at Transformer / Reactor Manufacturer works. Contractor shall ensure that
respective civil foundations & Fire walls for Transformer/Reactors units to be
commissioned, shall be made ready at concerned sites before receipt of
Transformer/Reactors units. All the requisite material for Neutral & Delta Bus
formation required for charging of complete bank of 765KV class 1-ph
Transformer/Reactor units shall be made available at the concerned sites before
receipt of the Transformer/Reactor units at site.
8.3.23 The Employer reserves the right to increase or decrease their involvement in
inspections at Contractor’s Works or at his Sub-Contractor’s premises or at the
Employer’s site or at any other place of Work based on performance of
Contractor/sub-Contractor.
9.0 TYPE TESTING & CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE
9.1 All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests as per technical specification
and shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with requirements stipulated under
respective sections.
9.2 The reports for all type tests as per technical specification shall be furnished by the
Contractor alongwith equipment / material drawings. However, type test reports of
similar equipments/ material already accepted in POWERGRID shall be applicable for
all projects with similar requirement. The type tests conducted earlier should have
either been conducted in accredited laboratory (accredited based on ISO / IEC Guide
25 / 17025 or EN 45001 by the national accreditation body of the country where
laboratory is located) or witnessed by POWERGRID or representative authorized by
POWERGRID or Utility or representative of accredited test lab.
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the type test reports submitted shall be of the
tests conducted within last 10 (ten) years from the date of NOA. In case the test reports
are of the test conducted earlier than 10 (ten) years from the date of NOA, the
contractor shall repeat these test(s) at no extra cost to the Employer.
Further, in the event of any discrepancy in the test reports i.e. any test report not
acceptable due to any design/manufacturing changes or due to non-compliance with
the requirement stipulated in the Technical Specification or any/all type tests not
carried out, same shall be carried out without any additional cost implication to the
Employer.
The Contractor shall intimate the Employer the detailed program about the type tests
atleast two (2) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies & six (6) weeks in
advance in case of foreign supplies.
9.3 The Employer intends to repeat those type tests which are indicated in the price
schedule and the same shall be payable as per provision of contract. The price of
conducting type tests shall be included in Bid price and break up of these shall be given
in the relevant schedule of Bid Proposal Sheets. These Type test charges would be
considered in bid evaluation. In case Bidder does not indicate charges for any of the
type tests or does not mention the name of any test in the price schedules, it will be
presumed that the particular test has been offered free of charge. Further, in case any
Bidder indicates that he shall not carry out a particular test, his offer shall be
considered incomplete and shall be liable to be rejected. The Employer reserves the
right to waive the repeating of type tests partly or fully and in case of waival, test
charges for the same shall not be payable.
____________________________________________________________________________
9.4 The Employer reserves the right to witness any or all the type tests. The Employer
shall bear all expenses for deputation of Employer’s representative(s) for witnessing
the type tests.
9.5 The list of makes of various items, for which Type test reports are not required to
be submitted are specified in Compendium of Vendors (COV).
10.0 TESTS
10.1 Pre-commissioning Tests
On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item of the
equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by the Employer and
the Contractor for correctness and completeness of installation and acceptability for
charging, leading to initial pre-commissioning tests at Site. The list of pre-
commissioning tests to be performed are given in respective chapters and shall be
included in the Contractor’s quality assurance programme.
10.2 Commissioning Tests
10.2.1 The available instrumentation and control equipment will to be used during such tests
and the Employer will calibrate, all such measuring equipment and devices as far as
practicable.
10.2.2 Any special equipment, tools and tackles required for the successful completion of the
Commissioning Tests shall be arranged by the Contractor at his own cost.
10.2.3 The specific tests requirement on equipment have been brought out in the respective
chapters of the technical specification.
10.3.4 PRECOMMISSIONING, COMMISSIONING, TRIAL-RUN & COMPLETION
As soon as the Facilities covered by these specifications are physically completed in all
respects, the Pre commissioning, Commissioning, Trial-run and Completion of the
Facilities, as mentioned below, shall be attained in accordance with the procedure given
in the Conditions of Contract, Vol.-I of the Bidding Documents.
(i) Pre commissioning : As per relevant Sections
(ii) Commissioning : Charging of the Facilities at rated voltage.
Further, wherever appearing in these specifications, the words–‘commissioning

checks’, ‘installation checks’, ‘site tests’, ‘performance guarantee tests for fire protection
system’, are to be considered as ‘pre commissioning checks’.
(iii) Trial-run : Operation of the Facilities or any part thereof by the
Contractor immediately after the Commissioning for a
continuous period of 72 (Seventy two) hours
continuously. In case of interruption due to problem/
failure in the respective equipment, the contractor shall
rectify the problem and after rectification, continuous
72 (Seventy two) hours period start after such
rectification.
(iv) Completion : Upon successful completion of Trial-run.
‘Guarantee Test(s)’ and/or ‘Functional Guarantees’ are applicable only for Substation
Automation System as specified in Section-‘Substation Automation System.’
10.3. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the
concerned authorities for commissioning the equipment and the switchyard. However
necessary fee shall be reimbursed by POWERGRID on production of requisite
documents.
____________________________________________________________________________
11.0 PACKAGING & PROTECTION

11.1 All the equipments shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated to
prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at Site till the
time of erection. On request of the Employer, the Contractor shall also submit packing
details/associated drawing for any equipment/material under his scope of supply, to
facilitate the Employer to repack any equipment/material at a later date, in case the
need arises. While packing all the materials, the limitation from the point of view of
availability of Railway wagon sizes in India should be taken into account. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation, handling
and storage due to improper packing. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges
claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor.
Employer takes no responsibility of the availability of the wagons.
11.2 All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discolouration and any
other damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected with either a
metallic or a non-metallic protecting device. All ends of all valves and pipings and
conduit equipment connections shall be properly sealed with suitable devices to
protect them from damage.
12.0 FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES
12.1 All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion protection. All
ferrous surfaces for external use unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification
or specifically agreed, shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. All steel conductors
including those used for earthing/grounding (above ground level) shall also be
galvanized according to IS: 2629.
12.2 HOT DIP GALVANISING
12.2.1 The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq.m and minimum average
thickness of coating shall be 86 microns for all items having thickness 6mm and above
and 900 gm/sq.m for coastal area (30km from sea shore approximately) or as
specified in Section-Project. For items lower than 6mm thickness requirement of
coating thickness shall be as per relevant ASTM. For surface which shall be embedded
in concrete, the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq.m minimum and 900 gm/sq.m for
coastal area as specified in Section-Project.
12.2.2 The galvanized surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick coating of zinc,
firmly adhering to the surface of steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth
and shall be free from defects like discoloured patches, bare spots, unevenness of
coating, spelter which is loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered
surface, flaking or peeling off, etc. The presence of any of these defects noticed on visual
or microscopic inspection shall render the material liable to rejection.
12.2.3 After galvanizing, no drilling or welding shall be performed on the galvanized parts of
the equipment excepting that nuts may be threaded after galvanizing. Sodium
dichromate or alternate approved treatment shall be provided to avoid formation of
white rust after hot dip galvanization.
12.2.4 The galvanized steel shall be subjected to four numbers of one minute dips in copper
sulphate solution as per IS-2633.
12.2.5 Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5 mm shall be able to withstand four immersions of
the Standard Preece test. All other coatings shall withstand six immersions. The
following galvanizing tests should essentially be performed as per relevant Indian
Standards.
- Coating thickness
- Uniformity of zinc
____________________________________________________________________________
- Adhesion test
- Mass of zinc coating
12.2.6 Galvanised material must be transported properly to ensure that galvanised surfaces
are not damaged during transit. Application of touch-up zinc rich paint at site shall be
allowed with approval of Engineer Incharge.
12.3 PAINTING
12.3.1 All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated in accordance with the IS-
6005 “Code of practice for phosphating iron and sheet”. All surfaces, which will not be
easily accessible after shop assembly, shall beforehand be treated and protected for the
life of the equipment. The surfaces, which are to be finished painted after installation
or require corrosion protection until installation, shall be shop painted with at least
two coats of primer. Oil, grease, dirt and swaf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion
cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by
washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
12.3.2 After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by
final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate coating
shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc
chromate primer. The first coat may be “flash dried” while the second coat shall be
stoved.
12.3.3 After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be
applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be applied after
inspection of first coat of painting.
12.3.4 The exterior and interior colour of the paint in case of new substations shall preferably
be RAL 7032 for all equipment, marshalling boxes, junction boxes, control cabinets,
panels etc. unless specifically mentioned under respective sections of the equipments.
Glossy white colour inside the equipments /boards /panels/junction boxes is also
acceptable. The exterior colour for panels shall be matching with the existing panels in
case of extension of a substation. Each coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of
slightly different shade to enable inspection of the painting. A small quantity of
finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after
installation of the equipments.
12.3.5 In case the contractor proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and
protection procedures or any other established painting procedures, like electrostatic
painting etc., the procedure shall be submitted during detailed engineering for
Employer’s review & approval.
12.3.6 The colour scheme as given below shall be followed for Fire Protection and Air
Conditioning systems
S.No. PIPE LINE Base colour Band colour

Fire Protection System
1 Hydrant and Emulsifier system FIRE RED -
pipeline
2 Emulsifier system detection line – FIRE RED Sea Green
water
3 Emulsifier system detection line –Air FIRE RED Sky Blue
4 Pylon support pipes FIRE RED
Air Conditioning Plant
5 Refrigerant gas pipeline – at Canary Yellow -
compressor suction
____________________________________________________________________________
S.No. PIPE LINE Base colour Band colour

6 Refrigerant gas pipeline – at Canary Yellow Red
compressor discharge
7 Refrigerant liquid pipeline Dark Admiralty -
Green
8 Chilled water pipeline Sea Green -
9 Condenser water pipeline Sea Green Dark Blue
The direction of flow shall be marked by → (arrow) in black colour.
Base Colour Direction of flow Band Colour

12.3.7 For aluminium casted surfaces, the surface shall be with smooth finish. Further, in case
of aluminium enclosures, the surface shall be coated with powder (coating thickness of
60 microns) after surface preparation for painting. For stainless steel surfaces, no
painting is envisaged.
13.0 HANDLING, STORING AND INSTALLATION
13.1 In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on manufacturer’s
drawings or as directed by the Employer or his representative, the Contractor shall
unload, store, erect, install, wire, test and place into commercial use all the equipment
included in the contract. Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner
so that it is level, plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented. Commercial use of
switchyard equipment means completion of all site tests specified and energisation at
rated voltage.
13.2 Contractor may engage manufacturer’s Engineers to supervise the unloading,
transportation to site, storing, testing and commissioning of the various equipment
being procured by them separately. Contractor shall unload, transport, store, erect, test
and commission the equipment as per instructions of the manufacturer’s supervisory
Engineer(s) and shall extend full cooperation to them.
13.3 The contractor must ensure that the open storage platform (as per Drawing No. C-
ENGG-CVL-STD-PLATFORM-01, Rev.0) is constructed for storage of outdoor type
equipment/material prior to commencement of delivery at site. Outdoor equipment
shall be stored on open storage platform, properly covered with waterproof and
dustproof covers to protect them from water seepage and moisture ingress.
However, all indoor equipments including control & protection panels, Communication
equipments and operating mechanism boxes etc. of outdoor equipments shall be
stored indoors.
Storage of equipment on top of another one is not permitted if the wooden packing is
used and there is possibility of equipment/packing damage. Material opened for joint
inspection shall be repacked properly as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
During storage of material regular periodic monitoring of important parameters like
oil level / leakage, SF6 / Nitrogen pressure etc. shall be ensured by the contractor.
13.4 In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of
manufacturer’s drawings or instructions, necessary clarifications shall be obtained
from the Employer. Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to the
equipment consequent to not following manufacturer’s drawings/instructions
correctly.
13.5 Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Contractor shall make all
necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections including the
connection between buses. Contractor shall also do necessary adjustments/alignments
____________________________________________________________________________
for proper operation of circuit breakers, isolators and their operating mechanisms. All
components shall be protected against damage during unloading, transportation,
storage, installation, testing and commissioning. Any equipment damaged due to
negligence or carelessness or otherwise shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.
13.6 Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the Employer
immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the purpose of Employer’s
information only. The Contractor shall submit to the Employer every week a report
detailing all the receipts during the weeks. However, the Contractor shall be solely
responsible for any shortages or damages in transit, handling and/or in storage and
erection of the equipment at Site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges
claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor.
13.7 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material until the same is
handed over to the Employer in an operating condition after commissioning.
Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the equipment/material while
in storage as well as after erection until taken over by Employer, as well as protection
of the same against theft, element of nature, corrosion, damages etc.
13.8 Where material / equipment is unloaded by Employer before the Contractor arrives at
site or even when he is at site, Employer by right can hand over the same to Contractor
and there upon it will be the responsibility of Contractor to store the material in an
orderly and proper manner.
13.9 The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities, to
store all equipment which requires indoor storage.
13.10 The words ‘erection’ and ‘installation’ used in the specification are synonymous.
13.11 Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the requirements
of electrical and other statutory safety codes.
13.12 The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering
practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life. If at any stage
during the execution of the Contract, it is observed that the erected equipment(s) do
not meet the above minimum clearances the Contractor shall immediately proceed to
correct the discrepancy at his risks and cost.
13.13 Equipment Bases
A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment
which is to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed to by the Employer.
Each base plate shall support the unit and its drive assembly, shall be of a neat design
with pads for anchoring the units, shall have a raised lip all around, and shall have
threaded drain connections.
14.0 TOOLS
14.1 TOOLS & PLANTS (T&P)
The Contractor shall arrange all T&P (such as necessary supports, cranes, ladders,
platforms etc.) for erection, testing & commissioning of the system at his own cost.
Further, all consumables, wastage and damages shall be to the account of contractor.
All such T&P shall be taken back by the contractor after commissioning of the system.
14.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES

The contractor shall supply all special tools and tackles required for Operation and
maintenance of equipment. The special tools and tackles shall only cover items which
____________________________________________________________________________
are specifically required for the equipment offered and are proprietary in nature. The
list of special tools and tackles, if any, shall be finalized during detail engineering and
the same shall be supplied without any additional cost implication to the Employer.
14.3 FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE EMPLOYER

14.3.1 Employer shall make available the auxiliary supplies at a single point in the substation
on chargeable basis. The prevailing energy rates of the state shall be applicable. All
further distribution from the same for construction supply shall be made by the
contractor. However, in case of failure of power due to any unavoidable circumstances,
the contractor shall make his own necessary arrangements like diesel generator sets
etc. at his own cost so that progress of work is not affected and Employer shall in no
case be responsible for any delay in works because of non-availability of power.
14.3.2 Employer shall make available construction water supply at a single point in the
substation. All further distribution for the same shall be made by the Contractor. In
case of non-availability or inadequate availability of water for construction work, the
contractor shall make his own arrangement at his own cost and the Employer shall in
no case be responsible for any delay in works because of non-availability or inadequate
availability of water.
15.0 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
15.1 The auxiliary power for station supply, including the equipment drive, cooling system
of any equipment, air-conditioning, lighting etc shall be designed for the specified
Parameters as under. The DC supply for the instrumentation and PLCC system shall
also conform the parameters as indicated in the following table:
Normal Variation in Frequency in Phase/Wire Neutral
Voltage Voltage HZ connection
415V + 10% 50 + 5% 3/4 Wire Solidly Earthed.
240V + 10% 50 + 5% 1/2 Wire Solidly Earthed.
220V 190V to 240V DC Isolated 2 -
wire System
110V 95V to 120V DC Isolated 2 -
wire System
48V -- DC 2 wire -
system (+)
earthed
Combined variation of voltage and frequency shall be limited to + 10%.

16.0 SUPPORT STRUCTURE
16.1 The equipment support structures shall be suitable for equipment connections at the
first level i.e 14.0 meter, 8.0 meter, 5.9 meter and 4.6 meter from plinth level for
765kV, 400kV, 220kV and 132kV substations respectively. All equipment support
structures shall be supplied alongwith brackets, angles, stools etc. for attaching the
operating mechanism, control cabinets & marshalling box (wherever applicable) etc.
16.2 The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of the
bushing, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of the equipment
base, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be 2.55 metres.
17.0 CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS INCLUDING TERMINAL CONNECTORS
____________________________________________________________________________
17.1 All power clamps and connectors shall conform to IS:5561 or other equivalent
international standard and shall be made of materials listed below :
Sl. No. Description Materials
a) For connecting ACSR Aluminum alloy casting, conforming to
conductors/AAC conductors/ designation A6 of IS:617 and all test shall
Aluminium tube conform to IS:617
b) For connecting equipment Bimetallic connectors made from
terminals mad of copper with aluminum alloy casting, conforming to
ACSR conductors/AAC designation A6 of IS:617 with 2mm thick
conductors/ Aluminium tube bimetallic liner/strip and all test shall
conform to IS:617
c) For connecting G.I Galvanised mild steel shield wire
d) Bolts, nuts & plain washers Electro-galvanised for sizes below M12,
for others hot dip galvanised.
e) Spring washers Electro-galvanised mild steel suitable for
atleast service condition-3 as per IS:1573
17.2 Necessary clamps and connectors shall be supplied for all equipment and connections.
If corona rings are required to meet these requirements they shall be considered as
part of that equipment and included in the scope of work.
17.3 Where copper to aluminum connections are required, bi-metallic clamps shall be used,
which shall be properly designed to ensure that any deterioration of the connection is
kept to a minimum and restricted to parts which are not current carrying or subjected
to stress.
17.4 Low voltage connectors, grounding connectors and accessories for grounding all
equipment as specified in each particular case, are also included in the scope of Work.
17.5 No current carrying part of any clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick. All ferrous parts
shall be hot dip galvanised. Copper alloy liner/strip of minimum 2 mm thickness shall
be cast integral with aluminum body or 2 mm thick bi-metallic liner/strips shall be
provided for Bi-metallic clamps.
17.6 All casting shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp
edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
17.7 Flexible connectors, braids or laminated straps made for the terminal clamps for bus
posts shall be suitable for both expansion or through (fixed/sliding) type connection of
IPS AL tube as required. In both the cases the clamp height (top of the mounting pad to
centre line of the tube) should be same.
17.8 Current carrying parts (500A and above) of the clamp/connector shall be provided
with minimum four numbers of bolts preferably for 132kV & above.
17.9 All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.
17.10 Power Clamps and connectors shall be designed to control corona as per requirement.
17.11 Tests
Clamps and connectors should be type tested as per IS:5561 and shall also be subjected
to routine tests as per IS:5561. Following type test reports shall be submitted for
____________________________________________________________________________
approval. Type test once conducted shall hold good. The requirement of test conducted
within last ten years, shall not be applicable.
i) Temperature rise test (maximum temperature rise allowed is 35°C over 50°C
ambient)
ii) Short time current test
iii) Corona (dry) [for 400kV and above] and RIV (dry) test [for 132kV and above
voltage level clamps]
iv) Resistance test and tensile test
18.0 CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOXES & MARSHALLING
BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
18.1 All types of boxes, cabinets etc. shall generally conform to & be tested in accordance
with IS-5039/IS-8623, IEC-60439, as applicable, and the clauses given below:
18.2 Control cabinets, junction boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes shall be made of
stainless steel of atleast 1.5 mm thick or aluminum enclosure of atleast 1.6 mm thick
and shall be dust, water and vermin proof. Stainless steel used shall be of grade SS304
(SS316 for coastal area) or better. The box shall be properly braced to prevent
wobbling. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance
to vibrations and rigidity during transportation and installation. In case of aluminum
enclosed box the thickness of aluminum shall be such that it provides adequate rigidity
and long life as comparable with sheet steel of specified thickness.
18.3 A canopy and sealing arrangements for operating rods shall be provided in marshalling
boxes / Control cabinets to prevent ingress of rain water.
18.4 Cabinet/boxes shall be provided with double hinged doors with padlocking
arrangements. The distance between two hinges shall be adequate to ensure uniform
sealing pressure against atmosphere.
18.5 All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with suitably
profiled EPDM/Neoprene/PU gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in accordance with
approved quality plan, IS:11149 and IS:3400. Ventilating Louvers, if provided, shall
have screen and filters. The screen shall be fine wire mesh made of brass.
Further, the gasketing arrangement shall be such that gaskets are pasted in slots (in
door fabrication/gasket itself) in order to prevent ingression of dust and moisture
inside the panels so that no internal rusting occurs in panels during the operation of
the equipment.
18.6 All boxes/cabinets shall be designed for the entry of cables by means of weather proof
and dust-proof connections. Boxes and cabinets shall be designed with generous
clearances to avoid interference between the wiring entering from below and any
terminal blocks or accessories mounted within the box or cabinet. Suitable cable gland
plate above the base of the marshalling kiosk/box shall be provided for this purpose
along with the proper blanking plates. Necessary number of cable glands shall be
supplied and fitted on this gland plate. Gland plate shall have provision for some future
glands to be provided later, if required. The Nickel plated glands shall be dust proof,
screw on & double compression type and made of brass. The gland shall have provision
for securing armour of the cable separately and shall be provided with earthing tag.
The glands shall conform to BS:6121.
18.7 A 240V, single phase, 50 Hz, 15 amp AC plug and socket shall be provided in the
cabinet with ON-OFF switch for connection of hand lamps. Plug and socket shall be of
industrial grade.
____________________________________________________________________________
18.8 LED based illumination of minimum 9 watts shall be provided. The switching of the
fittings shall be controlled by the door switch.
For junction boxes of smaller sizes such as lighting junction box, manual operated
earth switch mechanism box etc., plug socket, heater and illumination is not required
to be provided.
18.9 All control switches shall be of MCB/rotary switch type and Toggle/piano switches
shall not be accepted.
18.10 Earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two separate earthing pads. The
earth wire shall be terminated on to the earthing pad and secured by the use of self
etching washer. Earthing of hinged door shall be done by using a separate earth wire.
18.11 The bay marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a diagram showing
the numbering/connection/feruling by pasting the same on the inside of the door.
18.12 The following routine tests alongwith the routine tests as per IS:5039 shall also be
conducted:
i) Check for wiring
ii) Visual and dimension check
18.13 The enclosure of bay marshalling kiosk, junction box, terminal box and control cabinets
shall conform to IP-55 as per IS:13947 including application of 2KV rms for 1 (one)
minute, insulation resistance and functional test after IP-55 test.
19.0 DISPOSAL OF PACKING MATERIAL & WASTE FROM CONSTRUCTION SITE
After completion of the work, Contractor shall dispose-off all the packing & waste
materials including empty conductor drums, cable drums, wooden containers, oil
drums, gas cylinders and other waste/scrapped materials from construction site at his
own cost and shall make the substation area properly cleaned.
20.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND WIRING
20.1 Control and instrument leads from the switchboards or from other equipment will be
brought to terminal boxes or control cabinets in conduits. All interphase and external
connections to equipment or to control cubicles will be made through terminal blocks.
20.2 Terminal blocks shall be 650V grade and have continuous rating to carry the maximum
expected current on the terminals and non-breakable type. These shall be of moulded
piece, complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock
nuts. Screw clamp, overall insulated, insertion type, rail mounted terminals can be used
in place of stud type terminals. But the terminal blocks shall be non-disconnecting stud
type except for the secondary junction boxes of Current Transformer and Voltage
Transformer.
20.3 Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads shall
be provided with test links and isolating facilities. The current transformer secondary
leads shall also be provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities.
20.4 The terminal shall be such that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is
terminated. The terminal shall have a locking characteristic to prevent cable from
escaping from the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally.
20.5 The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or silver plated
however Nickel plated copper or zinc plated steel shall also be acceptable.
20.6 The terminal blocks shall be of extensible design, multilayer terminal arrangement is
not allowed in any junction box (Common MB, Individual MB, JB etc.). There should be
____________________________________________________________________________
sufficient space at both sides of terminals so that ferrule number of wires / TB

numbers are clearly visible during wire removal or insertion.
20.7 The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from the
mounting rails.
20.8 The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent, non-
deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers shall be provided between the
terminal blocks. These barriers shall not hinder the operator from carrying out the
wiring without removing the barriers.
20.9 Unless otherwise specified terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductors on each side.
a) All circuits except Minimum of two of 2.5 sq mm
CT/PT circuits copper flexible.
b) All CT/PT circuits Minimum of 4 nos. of 2.5 sq mm
copper flexible.
20.10 The arrangements shall be in such a manner so that it is possible to safely connect or
disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links when the cabinet is live.
20.11 Atleast 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each panel/cubicle/box and these
spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminals rows.
20.12 There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the First/bottom row of
terminal block and the associated cable gland plate for outdoor ground mounted
marshalling box and the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a
minimum of 150 mm.
20.13 The Contractor shall furnish all wire, conduits and terminals for the necessary
interphase electrical connections (where applicable) as well as between phases and
common terminal boxes or control cabinets. For equipments rated for 400 kV and
above the wiring required in these items shall be run in metallic ducts or shielded
cables in order to avoid surge overvoltages either transferred through the equipment
or due to transients induced from the EHV circuits.
20.14 All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested for surge
withstand capability in accordance with the relevant IEC Publications, in both
longitudinal and transverse modes. The Contractor shall also provide all necessary
filtering, surge protection, interface relays and any other measures necessary to
achieve an impulse withstand level at the cable interfaces of the equipment.
21.0 LAMPS & SOCKETS
21.1 Lamps & Sockets
All lamps shall use a socket base as per IS-1258, except in the case of signal lamps.
All sockets (convenience outlets) shall be suitable to accept both 5 Amp & 15 Amp pin
round Standard Indian plugs. They shall be switched sockets with shutters.
21.2 Hand Lamp:
A 240 Volts, single Phase, 50 Hz AC plug point shall be provided in the interior of each
cubicle with ON-OFF Switch for connection of hand lamps.
21.3 Switches and Fuses:
21.3.1 Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving, distributing,
isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control, signaling, lighting and
space heater circuits. The incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately provided with
miniature circuit breaker / switch fuse units. Selection of the main and Sub-circuit fuse
____________________________________________________________________________
ratings shall be such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. Potential

circuits for relaying and metering shall be protected by HRC fuses.
21.3.2 All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge type conforming to IS:9228 mounted on plug-in type
fuse bases. Miniature circuit breakers with thermal protection and alarm contacts will
also be accepted. All accessible live connection to fuse bases shall be adequately
shrouded. Fuses shall have operation indicators for indicating blown fuse condition.
Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse rating and voltage.
22.0 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support Insulators:
22.1 Bushings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS:2099 & IEC-60137
while hollow column insulators shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with
IEC-62155/IS:5621.The support insulators shall be manufactured and tested as per
IS:2544/IEC-60168 and IEC-60273. The insulators shall also conform to IEC-60815 as
applicable.
The bidder may also offer composite hollow insulators, conforming to IEC-61462.
22.2 Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be manufactured from
high quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from laminations,
cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric
quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified tough and impervious to moisture.
22.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free from blisters, burrs and
similar other defects.
22.4 Support insulators/bushings/hollow column insulators shall be designed to have
ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for the conditions under which they
will be used.
22.5 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between
the conductors and bushing which would cause corrosion or injury to conductors,
insulators or supports by the formation of substances produced by chemical action. No
radio interference shall be caused by the insulators/bushings when operating at the
normal rated voltage.
22.6 Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal pressures
likely to occur in service. The design and location of clamps and the shape and the
strength of the porcelain flange securing the bushing to the tank shall be such that
there is no risk of fracture. All portions of the assembled porcelain enclosures and
supports other than gaskets, which may in any way be exposed to the atmosphere shall
be composed of completely non hygroscopic material such as metal or glazed
porcelain.
22.7 All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanised and all joints shall be air tight. Surface of
joints shall be trued up porcelain parts by grinding and metal parts by machining.
Insulator/bushing design shall be such as to ensure a uniform compressive pressure
on the joints.
22.8 Tests
In bushing, hollow column insulators and support insulators shall conform to type
tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IS:2099 & IS:2544 &
IS:5621.
22.9 RTV Coating on porcelain insulators (for coastal area)
RTV coating shall be done at site on all porcelain insulators (i.e. bushings, hollow and
solid insulators, disc insulators etc.) for substation(s) in coastal area as defined
elsewhere. The cost of RTV coating shall be deemed to be included in the respective
____________________________________________________________________________
equipment/items’ erection cost. The technical details of RTV coating is attached in

Annexure-H.
23.0 MOTORS
Motors shall be “Squirrel Cage” three phase induction motors of sufficient size capable
of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the driven
equipment and shall be subjected to routine tests as per applicable standards. The
motors shall be of approved make.
23.1 Enclosures
a) Motors to be installed outdoor without enclosure shall have hose proof enclosure
equivalent to IP-55 as per IS: 4691. For motors to be installed indoor i.e. inside a
box, the motor enclosure, shall be dust proof equivalent to IP-44 as per IS: 4691.
b) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the
motor for bolted connection of earthing conductor.
c) Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water resulting from
condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor casing.
d) Motors weighing more than 25 Kg. shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other
means to facilitate lifting.
23.2 Operational Features
a) Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten (10) percent
above the maximum load demand of the driven equipment at design duty point
and the motor shall not be over loaded at any operating point of driven
equipment that will rise in service.
b) Motor shall be capable at giving rated output without reduction in the expected
life span when operated continuously in the system having the particulars as
given in Clause 15.0 of this Section.
23.3 Starting Requirements:
a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct-on-line starting.
These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed alongwith
the driven equipment without exceeding the acceptable winding temperature
even when the supply voltage drops down to 80% of the rated voltage.
b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electrodynamic stresses and heating
imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value.
c) The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full load current
for all motors, subject to tolerance as given in IS:325.
d) Motors when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting torque
under the supply voltage conditions specified under Clause 15.0 shall be capable
of withstanding atleast two successive starts from cold condition at room
temperature and one start from hot condition without injurious heating of
winding. The motors shall also be suitable for three equally spread starts per
hour under the above referred supply condition.
e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated voltage
shall be more than starting time with the driven equipment of minimum
permissible voltage by at least two seconds or 15% of the accelerating time
whichever is greater. In case it is not possible to meet the above requirement, the
Bidder shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the motor shaft
which shall remain closed for speed lower than 20% and open for speeds above
____________________________________________________________________________
20% of the rated speed. The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding 120%
of the rated speed in either direction of rotation.
23.4 Running Requirements:
a) The maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient temperature of 50

degree C shall be within the limits specified in IS:325 (for 3-phase induction
motors) after adjustment due to increased ambient temperature specified.
b) The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits specified in IS:
4729. Vibration shall also be within the limits specified by the relevant standard
for the driven equipment when measured at the motor bearings.
c) All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of rated voltage for a
period of 5 minutes with rated load commencing from hot condition.
23.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
An indicative list of tests is given below. Contractor shall perform any additional test
based on specialities of the items as per the field Q.P./Instructions of the equipment
Contractor or Employer without any extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall
arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests alongwith calibration
certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Employer for approval.
(a) Insulation resistance.
(b) Phase sequence and proper direction of rotation.
(c) Any motor operating incorrectly shall be checked to determine the cause and the
conditions corrected.
24. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT OF EQUIPMENTS
Following equipment shall be offered from the manufacturer(s) who meets the
technical requirements as stipulated here, provided the same equipment are not
covered under the Bidder’s Qualifying requirement of the Bidding Documents.
Legend:
* : voltage class of respective equipment as applicable.
#: satisfactory operation means certificate issued by the Employer/Utility
certifying the operation without any adverse remark.
@: Circuit Breaker Bay means a bay used for controlling a line or a transformer
or a reactor or a bus section or a bus coupler and comprising of at least one
circuit breaker, one disconnector and three nos. of single phase CTs / Bushing
CTs
NOA: means Notification Of Award
24.1 Technical requirements for 765/400/220/132/110kV* Air Insulated Switchgear
(AIS) Equipment* (i.e Circuit Breaker, Isolator, Current Transformer, Capacitive
Voltage transformer, Inductive Voltage transformer, Surge Arrester and Wave
Trap)
(i) The manufacturer(s) whose 765/400/220/132/110kV* equipment(s) are
offered, must have, manufactured, type tested (as per IEC/IS or equivalent
standard) and supplied 715/345/220/132/110kV* or higher voltage class
equipment(s), which are in satisfactory operation# for atleast two (2) years as
on the date of NOA.
____________________________________________________________________________
(ii) Alternatively, the manufacturer, who have established manufacturing and testing
facilities in India for the offered equipment and not meeting the requirement
stipulated in (i) above, can also be considered provided that
a) 715/345/220/132/110kV* or higher Voltage class equipment(s) must have
been manufactured in the above Indian works & type tested (as per IEC/IS
standard) and supplied as on the date of NOA.
b) Contractor shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of the

ex-works cost of the equipments(s)* and this performance guarantee shall
be in addition to the contract performance guarantee to be submitted by the
contractor.
24.2 Technical Requirement for 765kV class Transformer
(i) The Manufacturer whose 765kV Transformer(s) are offered must have designed,
manufactured, tested & supplied 715 kV or higher voltage class one (1) number
three phase Transformer of atleast 500 MVA capacity (or equivalent capacity in a
bank of three (3) numbers single phase units). These transformer(s) must have
been in satisfactory operation# for atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.
facilities in India and not meeting the requirement stipulated in (i) above, can
also be considered provided that
a) 715kV or higher voltage class one (1) number three phase Transformer of
atleast 500 MVA capacity (or equivalent capacity in a bank of three (3)
numbers single phase units) must have been manufactured in the above
Indian works based on technological support of collaborator, type tested (as
per IEC/IS standard) and supplied as on the date of NOA.
b) The collaborator meets the requirements stipulated in (i) above. A valid

collaboration agreement for technology transfer / license to design,
manufacture, test and supply 765kV transformer in India, shall be
submitted.
c) the collaborator shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10%

of the ex-works cost of such equipment(s) and this performance guarantee
shall be in addition to contract performance guarantee to be submitted by
the contractor.
24.3 Technical Requirement for 765kV class Reactor

(i) The Manufacturer whose 765kV Reactor(s) are offered must have designed,
manufactured, tested & supplied 715kV or higher voltage class one (1) number
three phase Reactor of atleast 240 MVAR capacity (or equivalent capacity in a
bank of three (3) numbers single phase units). These Reactor(s) must have been
in satisfactory operation# for atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.
OR
The Manufacturer must have designed, manufactured, tested & supplied 715kV
or higher voltage class one (1) number three phase Transformer of atleast
500MVA capacity (or equivalent capacity in a bank of three (3) numbers single
phase units). These Transformer(s) must have been in satisfactory operation# for
atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA. And the manufacturer must have
designed, manufactured, tested & supplied 345kV or higher voltage class one (1)
number three phase Reactor of atleast 50MVAR capacity (or equivalent capacity
____________________________________________________________________________
in a bank of three (3) numbers single phase units). These Reactors must have
been in satisfactory operation# for atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.
a) 715kV or higher voltage class one (1) number three phase Reactor of atleast
240MVAR capacity (or equivalent capacity in a bank of three (3) numbers
single phase units) must have been manufactured in the above Indian works
based on technological support of collaborator, type tested (as per IEC/IS

collaboration agreement for technology transfer/license to design,
manufacture, test and supply 765kV Reactor in India, shall be submitted.

the contractor.
24.4 Technical Requirement for 400kV, 220kV, 132kV and 110kV class Transformer
(i) The manufacturer whose transformer(s) are offered must have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied 400kV/220kV/132kV/110kV* or higher
voltage class transformers. These Transformer(s) must have been in satisfactory
operation# for atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.
a) 220kV (applicable for supply of 400kV and 220kV class Transformer)/

132kV (applicable for supply of 132kV & 110kV class Transformer) or
higher voltage class transformers must have been designed, manufactured
in the above Indian works based on technological support of collaborator,
type tested (as per IEC/IS standard) and supplied as on the date of NOA.

manufacture, test and supply 400kV/220kV/132kV/110kV* transformer in
India, shall be submitted.

the contractor.
24.5 Technical Requirement for 400kV, 220kV and 132kV class Reactor
(i) The Manufacturer whose 400kV/220kV/132kV* Reactor(s) are offered must

have designed, manufactured, tested & supplied 400kV/220kV/132kV* or higher
____________________________________________________________________________
voltage class. These Reactor(s) must have been in satisfactory operation# for
atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.
a) Such manufacturer has designed, manufactured based on technological

support of collaborator, type tested (as per IEC/IS standard) and supplied
400kV class transformer or 220kV or above class shunt reactors as on the
date of NOA.

manufacture, test and supply the Reactor in India, shall be submitted.

the contractor.
24.6 Technical Requirement for 400 kV Grade XLPE Power Cables

(i) The manufacturer(s) whose XLPE Power Cables are offered must have designed,
manufactured, type tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 5 (five) km of
single core, 400kV grade XLPE insulated cable which must be in operation for
atleast 2 (two) years as on the date of NOA.
a) The manufacturer must have designed, manufactured, type tested and

supplied 400kV grade XLPE insulated cable and which must be in
satisfactory operation# for atleast one (1) year as on the date of NOA.
OR
b) The manufacturer must have designed, manufactured, type tested and
completed Pre-qualification (PQ) tests as per IEC for 400kV grade XLPE
insulated Cable as on the date of NOA.
24.7 Technical Requirement for 220KV Grade XLPE Power Cables
(i) The manufacturer(s) whose XLPE Power Cables are offered must have designed,
manufactured, type tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 5 (five) km of
single core, 220kV or higher grade XLPE insulated cable which must be in
operation for atleast 2 (two) years as on the date of NOA.
a) The manufacturer must have designed, manufactured, type tested and

supplied 220kV or higher grade XLPE insulated cable and which must be in
satisfactory operation# for atleast one (1) year as on the date of NOA.
OR
____________________________________________________________________________
b) The manufacturer must have designed, manufactured, type tested and

completed Pre-qualification (PQ) tests as per IEC for 220kV or higher grade
XLPE insulated Cable as on the date of NOA.
24.8 Technical Requirement for 132KV, 110kV, 66kV Grade XLPE Power Cables
(i) The manufacturer(s) whose XLPE Power Cables are offered must have
designed, manufactured, type tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 5
(five) km of single core, 132KV/110kV/66kV* or higher grade XLPE insulated
cable which must be in satisfactory operation# for atleast two (2) years as on
the date of NOA.
(ii) Alternatively, the manufacturer, who have established manufacturing and

testing facilities in India and not meeting the requirement stipulated in (i)
above, can also be considered provided that
a) The manufacturer must have designed, manufactured, type tested and supplied
132KV/110kV/66kV* or higher grade XLPE insulated cable and which must be
in satisfactory operation# for atleast one (1) year as on the date of NOA.
24.9 Technical Requirement for 1.1 KV Grade PVC Control Cable
The manufacturer(s), whose PVC control cables are offered, must have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 100 Kms of 1.1kV grade
PVC insulated control cables as on the originally scheduled date of bid opening.
Further the manufacturer must also have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied
atleast 1 km of 27C x 2.5 Sq.mm or higher size as on the date of NOA.
24.10 Technical Requirement for 1.1 KV Grade PVC Power Cable
The manufacturer(s), whose PVC Power Cables are offered, must have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 100 Kms of 1.1kV or
higher grade PVC insulated power cables as on the date of NOA/award. Further the
manufacturer must also have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied atleast 1 km
of 1C x 150 Sq. mm or higher size as on the date of NOA.
24.11 Technical Requirement for 1.1 KV Grade XLPE Power Cables
The manufacturer(s), whose XLPE Power cables are offered, must have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 25 Kms of 1.1 KV or
higher grade XLPE insulated power cables as on the date of NOA/award. Further the
24.12 Technical Requirement for LT Switchgear
i) The manufacturer whose LT Switchgear(s) are offered, must be a manufacturer of
LT Switchboards of the type and rating being offered. He must have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied atleast 50 nos. draw out circuit breaker panels,
out of which atleast 5 nos. should have been with relay and protection schemes
with current transformer. He must have also manufactured atleast 50 nos. MCC
panels comprising of MCCBs (ie Moulded Case Circuit Breakers) modules of the type
offered which must be in satisfactory operation# as on the date of NOA.
ii) The Switchgear items (such as circuit breakers, fuse switch units, contactors etc.),
may be of his own make or shall be procured from reputed manufacturers and of
proven design, atleast one hundred circuit breakers of the make and type being
offered must have been in satisfactory operation# as on the date of NOA.
____________________________________________________________________________
24.13 Technical Requirements for Battery

The manufacturer whose Batteries are offered, must have designed, manufactured and
supplied DC Batteries of the type specified and being offered, having a capacity of
atleast 600 AH and these must be satisfactory operation# for atleast two (2) years in
power sector or industrial installations as on the date of NOA.
24.14 Technical Requirements for Battery Charger
The manufacturer, whose Battery Chargers are offered, must have designed,
manufactured and supplied Battery Chargers generally of the type offered, with static
automatic voltage regulators and having a continuous output of atleast ten (10) KW
and these must have been in satisfactory operation# as on the date of NOA.
24.15 Technical Requirements for LT Transformer
i) The manufacturer, whose LT transformer(s) are offered, must have designed,
manufactured, type tested including short circuit test as per IEC/IS or equivalent
standards and supplied transformer(s) of atleast 33kV class of 630kVA or higher.
The transformer must have been in satisfactory operation# for atleast two (2)
years as on the date of NOA.
ii) Alternatively, the manufacturer, who have established manufacturing and testing
facilities in India and not meeting the requirement stipulated in (i) above, can also
be considered provided that
a) At least 33kV class of 630 kVA or higher rating LT transformer(s) must have
been designed, manufactured in the above Indian works, type tested (as per
IEC/IS standard) including short circuit test and supplied as on the date of
NOA.
b) the contractor shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of

the ex-works cost of the equipment(s) and this performance guarantee shall
be in addition to contract performance guarantee to be submitted by the
contractor.
24.16 Technical Requirements for Composite Long Rod Polymer Insulator (765kV &
400kV)
(i) The manufacturer whose Composite Long rod Insulator are offered, must have
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied Composite Long rod Insulator of
120KN or higher electro-mechanical strength for 765kV/400kV* or higher
voltage class and the same must have been in satisfactory operation# for atleast
two (2) years as on the date of NOA.
a) The manufacturer must have designed, manufactured, type tested and supplied
Composite Long rod Insulator of 120KN or above electro-mechanical strength
for 765kV/400kV* or higher voltage class and the same must have been in
satisfactory operation# as on the date of NOA.
b) Contractor shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of the ex-
works cost of the equipments(s)* and this performance guarantee shall be in
addition to the contract performance guarantee to be submitted by the
contractor.
____________________________________________________________________________
24.17 Technical Requirements for Control, Relay & Protection System and Sub-station
Automation System
The manufacturer whose Control, Relay & Protection System (Control & protection
Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs)), and Sub-station Automation System (as
applicable) are offered, must have designed, manufactured, tested, installed and
commissioned Control, Relay & Protection system along with Sub-station Automation
System which must have been in satisfactory operation# on (i) 400 kV system
[applicable for 765kV substation] & (ii) specified voltage level or above [applicable for
400kV & below substation] for atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.
AND
The Manufacturer or their joint venture or subsidiary company or parent company
must be a manufacturer of control and protection IEDs and must have established
repair, testing and integration (atleast for 4 bays) facilities for Control, Relay &
Protection System and Sub-station Automation System in India.
24.18 Technical Requirements for analog and digital PLCC panels (765kV, 400kV,
220kV & 132kV)
(i) The manufacturer whose PLCC panels are offered, must have designed,
manufactured, tested, supplied and commissioned PLCC panels for (i) 400kV
system or above [applicable for 765 kV & 400 kV substation], (ii) 220 kV
System or above [applicable for 220 kV Substation] & (iii) 132 kV system or
above [applicable for 132 kV substation] and the same must have been in
satisfactory operation# for atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.
a) PLCC panels must have been manufactured in the above Indian works based
on technological support of collaborator, type tested (as per IEC/IS
b) collaborator shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of
the ex-works cost of such equipment(s) and this performance guarantee
the contractor.
c) The collaborator meets the requirements stipulated in (i) above. A valid
manufacture, test and supply PLCC panels in India, shall be submitted.
24.19 Technical Requirement of Communication Equipment
The SDH equipment shall be offered from a manufacturer(s) who has been
manufacturing SDH equipments for the last three (3) years and SDH equipment
manufactured by such manufacturer(s) shall have been satisfactory operation in
110kV or higher voltage Power Substations for at least two (2) years as on the date of
NOA.
24.20 Technical Requirement of “Indian Associate” for execution of on shore supply
and services for 765 kV Transformer & Reactor package
Indian associate must have erected at least two (2) or more circuit breaker equipped
bays of 345 kV or above voltage level or at least two (2) nos. of 345 kV or above
voltage class transformer/reactor; during last seven (7) years and above
bays/transformer/reactors must be in satisfactory operation# as on the date of NOA.
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-A
CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) TEST
1. General
Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated connectors,
where applicable, shall be tested for external corona (for 400kV & above) both by
observing the voltage level for the extinction of visible corona under falling power
frequency voltage and by measurement of radio interference voltage (RIV) for 132kV
and above.
2. Test Levels:
The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV and for corona extinction
voltage are listed under the relevant clauses of the specification.
3. Test Methods for RIV:
3.1 RIV tests shall be made according to measuring circuit as per International Special-
Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) Publication 16-1(1993) Part -1. The
measuring circuit shall preferably be tuned to frequency with 10% of 0.5 Mhz but
other frequencies in the range of 0.5 MHz to 2 MHz may be used, the measuring
frequency being recorded. The results shall be in microvolts.
3.2 Alternatively, RIV tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant IEC of
respective equipment or NEMA standard Publication No. 107-1964.
3.3 In measurement of, RIV, temporary additional external corona shielding may be
provided. In measurements of RIV only standard fittings of identical type supplied
with the equipment and a simulation of the connections as used in the actual
installation will be permitted in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals.
3.4 Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure that
there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest ambient
noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be measured at
increasing and decreasing voltages of 85%, 100%, and 110% of the specified RIV test
voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The specified RIV test voltage for
765kV, 400 kV, 220 KV is listed in the detailed specification together with maximum
permissible RIV level in microvolts.
3.5 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent device
so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.
3.6 The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration procedure of the
frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall establish the ratio of voltage at the
high voltage terminal to voltage read by noise meter.
4. Test Methods for Visible Corona
The purpose of this test is to determine the corona extinction voltage of apparatus,
connectors etc. The test shall be carried out in the same manner as RIV test described
above with the exception that RIV measurements are not required during test and a
search technique shall be used near the onset and extinction voltage, when the test
voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise values. The test voltage shall
be raised to 110% of specified corona extinction voltage and maintained there for five
minutes. In case corona inception does not take place at 110%, test shall be stopped,
otherwise test shall be continued and the voltage will then be decreased slowly until
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 2 (Annexure-A)
C/ENGG/SPEC/GTR (Rev. No.:-14, Jan’17)
ANNEXURE-A
all visible corona disappears. The procedure shall be repeated at least 4 times with
corona inception and extinction voltage recorded each time. The corona extinction
voltage for purposes of determining compliance with the specification shall be the
lowest of the four values at which visible corona (negative or positive polarity)
disappears. Photographs with laboratory in complete darkness shall be taken under
test conditions, at all voltage steps i.e. 85%, 100%, and 110%. Additional photographs
shall be taken at corona inception and extinction voltages. At least two views shall be
photographed in each case using Panchromatic film with an ASA daylight rating of 400
with an exposure of two minutes at a lens aperture of f/5.6 or equivalent. The
photographic process shall be such that prints are available for inspection and
comparison with conditions as determined from direct observation. Photographs shall
be taken from above and below the level of connector so as to show corona on
bushing, insulators and all parts of energised connectors. The photographs shall be
framed such that test object essentially, fills the frame with no cut-off.
For recording purpose, modern devices utilizing UV recording methods such as image
intensifier may also be used.
4.1 The test shall be recorded on each photograph. Additional photograph shall be taken
from each camera position with lights on to show the relative position of test object to
facilitate precise corona location from the photographic evidence.
4.2 In addition to photographs of the test object preferably four photographs shall be
taken of the complete test assembly showing relative positions of all the test
equipment and test objects. These four photographs shall be taken from four points
equally spaced around the test arrangement to show its features from all sides.
Drawings of the laboratory and test set up locations shall be provided to indicate
camera positions and angles. The precise location of camera shall be approved by
Employer’s inspector, after determining the best camera locations by trial energisation
of test object at a voltage which results in corona.
4.3 The test to determine the visible corona extinction voltage need not be carried out
simultaneously with test to determine RIV levels.
4.4 However, both test shall be carried out with the same test set up and as little time
duration between tests as possible. No modification on treatment of the sample
between tests will be allowed. Simultaneous RIV and visible corona extinction voltage
testing may be permitted at the discretion of Employer’s inspector if, in his opinion, it
will not prejudice other test.
5. Test Records:
In addition to the information previously mentioned and the requirements specified as
per CISPR or NEMA 107-1964 the following data shall be included in test report:
a) Background noise before and after test.
b) Detailed procedure of application of test voltage.
c) Measurements of RIV levels expressed in micro volts at each level.
d) Results and observations with regard to location and type of interference
sources detected at each step.
e) Test voltage shall be recorded when measured RIV passes through 100
microvolts in each direction.
f)Onset and extinction of visual corona for each of the four tests required shall be
recorded.
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 2 of 2 (Annexure-A)
ANNEXURE-B
SEISMIC WITHSTAND TEST PROCEDURE
The seismic withstanding test on the complete equipment (for 132kV and above) shall be
carried out alongwith supporting structure.
The Bidder shall arrange to transport the structure from his Contractor’s premises/
POWERGRID sites for the purpose of seismic withstand test only.
The seismic level specified shall be applied at the base of the structure. The accelerometers
shall be provided at the Terminal Pad of the equipment and any other point as agreed by
the Employer. The seismic test shall be carried out in all possible combinations of the
equipment. The seismic test procedure shall be furnished for approval of the Employer.
The frequency range for the earthquake spectra shall be as per IEC–6227-300.
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 1 (Annexure-B)
ANNEXURE-C
LIST OF GENERAL STANDARDS AND CODES
CODES TITLE
-- India Electricity Rules
-- Indian Electricity Act
-- Indian Electricity (Supply) Act
-- Indian Factories Act
IS-5 Colors for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels
IS-335 New Insulating Oils
IS-617 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Ingots and Castings for General
Engineering Purposes
IS-1448 (P1 to P 145) Methods of Test for Petroleum and its Products
IS-2071 (P1 to P3) Methods of High Voltage Testing
IS-12063 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures of
electrical equipment
IS-2165 ; P1:1997, Insulation Coordination
P2:1983
IS-3043 Code of Practice for Earthing
IS-6103 Method of Test for Specific Resistance (Resistivity) of Electrical
Insulating Liquids
IS-6104 Method of Test for Interfacial Tension of Oil against Water by the
Ring Method
IS-6262 Method of test for Power factor & Dielectric Constant of Electrical
Insulating Liquids
IS-6792 Method for determination of electric strength of insulating oils
IS-5578 Guide for marking of insulated conductors
IS-11353 Guide for uniform system of marking & identification of
conductors & apparatus terminals.
IS-8263 Methods for Radio Interference Test on High voltage Insulators
IS-9224 (Part 1,2&4) Low Voltage Fuses
IEC-60060 (Part 1 to P4) High Voltage Test Techniques
IEC 60068 Environmental Test
IEC-60117 Graphical Symbols
IEC-60156 Method for the Determination of the Electrical Strength of
Insulation Oils
IEC-60270 Partial Discharge Measurements
IEC-60376 Specification and Acceptance of New Sulphur Hexafloride
IEC-60437 Radio Interference Test on High Voltage Insulators
IEC-60507 Artificial Pollution Tests on High Voltage Insulators to be used on
AC Systems
IEC-62271-1 Common Specification for High Voltage Switchgear & Control
gear Standards
IEC-60815 Guide for the Selection of Insulators in respect of Polluted
Conditions
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 23 (Annexure-C)
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IEC-60865 (P1 & P2) Short Circuit Current - Calculation of effects
ANSI-C.1/NFPA.70 National Electrical Code
ANSI-C37.90A Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests
ANSI-C63.21, C63.3 Specification for Electromagnetic Noise and Field Strength
Instrumentation 10 KHz to 1 GHZ
C36.4ANSI-C68.1 Techniquest for Dielectric Tests
ANSI-C76.1/EEE21 Standard General Requirements and Test Procedure for Outdoor
Apparatus Bushings
ANSI-SI-4 Specification for Sound Level Meters
ANSI-Y32-2/C337.2 Drawing Symbols
ANSI-Z55.11 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment No. 61
Light Gray
NEMA-107T Methods of Measurements of RIV of High Voltage Apparatus
NEMA-ICS-II General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems Part ICSI-
109
CISPR-1 Specification for CISPR Radio Interference Measuring Apparatus
for the frequency range 0.15 MHz to 30 MHz
CSA-Z299.1-1978h Quality Assurance Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.2-1979h Quality Control Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.3-1979h Quality Verification Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.4-1979h Inspection Program Requirements
TRANSFORMERS AND REACTORS
IS:10028 (Part 2 & 3) Code of practice for selection, installation & maintenance of
Transformers (P1:1993), (P2:1991), (P3:1991)
IS-2026 (P1 to P4) Power Transformers
IS-3347 (part 1 to Part 8) Dimensions for Porcelain transformer Bushings for use in lightly
polluted atmospheres
IS-3639 Fittings and Accessories for Power Transformers
IS-6600 Guide for Loading of oil immersed Transformers
IEC-60076 (Part 1 to 5) Power Transformers
IEC-60214 On-Load Tap-Changers
IEC-60289 Reactors
IEC- 60354 Loading Guide for Oil - Immersed power transformers
IEC-60076-10 Determination of Transformer and Reactor Sound Levels
ANSI-C571280 General requirements for Distribution, Power and Regulating
Transformers
ANSI-C571290 Test Code for Distribution, Power and Regulation Transformers
ANSI-C5716 Terminology & Test Code for Current Limiting Reactors
ANSI-C5721 Requirements, Terminology and Test Code for Shunt Reactors
Rated Over 500 KVA
ANSI-C5792 Guide for Loading Oil-Immersed Power Transformers upto and
including 100 MVA with 55 deg C or 65 deg C Winding Rise
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
ANSI-CG,1EEE-4 Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing
IEC 60076 Power transformers
IEC 60076-1 Part 1: General
IEC 60076-2 Part 2: Temperature rise
IEC 60076-3 Part 3: Insulation levels, dielectric tests and external clearances
in air
IEC 60076-4 Part 4: Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse
testing - Power transformers and reactors
IEC 60076-3-1 Part 3-1: Insulation Levels and Dielectric Tests –External
Clearances in Air
IEC 60076-5 Part 5: Ability to withstand short circuit
IEC 60076-6 Part 6: Reactors
IEC 60076-7 Part 7: Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers
IEC 60076-8 Part 8: Application guide
IEC 60076-10 Part 10: Determination of sound levels
IEC 60076-10-1 Part 10-1: Determination of sound levels - Application guide
IEC 60076-11 Part 11: Dry-type transformers
IEC 60076-12 Part 12: Loading guide for dry-type power transformers
IEC 60076-13 Part 13: Self-protected liquid-filled transformers
IEC 60076-14 Part 14: Design and application of liquid-immersed power
transformers using high-temperature insulation materials
IEC 60076-15 Part 15: Gas-filled power transformers
IEC 60076-16 Part 16: Transformers for wind turbine applications
IEC 60076-18 Part 18: Measurement of frequency response
IEC 60076-19 Part 19: Rules for the determination of uncertainties in the
measurement of losses in power transformers and reactors
IEC 60076-21 Part 21: Standard requirements, terminology, and test code for
step-voltage regulators
IEC 60044, BS 3938 Current transformers
IEC 60050 International Electrotechnical Vocabulary
IEC 60050(421) International Electrotechnical vocabulary- Chapter 421 : Power
Transformers and Reactors
IEC 60060 High Voltage test techniques
IEC 60060-1 General definitions and test requirements
IEC 60060-2 Measuring systems
IEC 60071 Insulation co-ordination
IEC 60071-1 Part 1: Definitions, principles and rules
IEC 60071-2 Part 2 : Application guide
IEC 60137 Bushing for alternating voltage above 1000V
IEC 60214 On-Load Tap changers
IEC 255-21-3 Relays vibration
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IEC 60270 Partial discharge measurements
IEC 60296 Specification for Unused Mineral Oil for Transformers and
Switchgear
IEC 60422 Supervision and Maintenance guide for Mineral Insulating Oil in
Electrical Equipment
IEC 60475 Method of Sampling Liquid dielectrics
IEC 60529 Classification of Degrees of Protection provided by Enclosures
IEC 60542 Application Guide for On-Load Tap-Changers
IEC 60567 Guide for the Sampling of Gases and of Oil from Oil-filled
Electrical Equipment for the Analysis of Free and Dissolved Gases
IEC 60651 Sound Level Meters
IEC 61083 Digital Recorders and Software for High Voltage Impulse testing
IEC 61083-1 Part 1: Requirements for digital recorders in high voltage impulse
tests
IEC 61083-2 Part 2: Evaluation of software used for the determination of the
parameters of impulse waveforms
CISPR 16 Specification for radio disturbance and immunity measuring
apparatus
CISPR 16-1 Radio disturbance and immunity measuring apparatus
CISPR-18 Radio Interference Characteristics of Power Lines and High
Voltage Equipment
ISO 9001 Quality system-Model for Quality Assurance in Design
/development
Cigre Publication 202 Guidelines for conducting design reviews for transformers 100
MVA and 123 kV and above. August 2002-Cigre Working Group
12.22
WG 12-15 Guide for Customers Specifications for Transformers 100 MVA
and 123 kV and above
WG 12 19 Short Circuit Performance of Transformers.
BS-4360 Specification for weldable structural steel
BS-5135 Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese
steels
BS-5500 Specification for unfired fusion welded pressure vessels
IS-3618 Specification for phosphate treatment of iron & steel for
protection against corrosion
IS-6005 Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and Steel
ISO-8501 Preparation of steel surface before application of Paints and
related product
IEC-60599 Mineral oil impregnated electrical equipment in service – guide
to the interpretation of dissolved and free gases analysis
IS-10593 Method of evaluating the analysis of gases in oil filled electrical
equipment in service
IS-2099 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 volts
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IS-3347 Part I to 8 Dimension for porcelain transformer bushing
DIN-42530 Bushing up to 1000kV from 250A-5000A for liquid filled
Transformer
IS-2026 Part 1 to 5 Power transformer
IS-4691 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure for rotating
electrical machinery
IEC-60034-5 Degrees of protection provided by integral design of rotating
electrical machines(IP Code) classification
IS:325 / IEC -60034 Performance of cooling fan / oil pump motor
IS-13947 part 1 to 5 Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear
IS:3400 Methods of test for vulcanised rubber
IS:7016 part 1 to 14 Methods of test for coated and treated fabrics
IS:803 Code of practice for design, fabrication and erection of vertical
mild steel cylindrical welded oil storage tanks.
IS:3637 Gas operated Relays
IS:335 New Insulating oils – Specification
IEC-62271-203 Gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear for rated voltage above
52kV
IEC-61639 Direct connection between power transformers and gas-
insulated metal enclosed switchgear for rated voltages of 52.5 kV
and above.
IS:3400 / BS 903 / Air cell ( Flexible Air Separator)
IS:7016
IEC 60529 / IP : 55 Degree of protection for cooler control cabinet , MOLG, Cooling
fan , oil pump, Buchholz Relay
IEC 60529 / IP : 56 Degree of protection for Pressure Relief Device
IEC 60529 / IP : 43 Degree of protection for Remote tap Changer cubicle (RTCC)
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
IEC-62271-100 High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 100: Alternating
current circuit-breakers
IEC-62271-101 High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 101: Synthetic
testing
IEC-62155 Hollow pressurized and unpressurized ceramic and glass
insulators for use in electrical equipment with rated voltages
greater than 1000 V
IEC-62271-110 High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 110: Inductive
load switching
IEC-62271-109 High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 110: Inductive
load switching
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND COUPLING CAPACITOR
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
IS-2705- (P1 to P4) Current Transformers
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IS:3156- (P1 to P4) Voltage Transformers
IS-4379 Identification of the Contents of Industrial Gas Cylinders
IEC-61869 (Part-1) Instrument transformers - Part 1: General requirements
IEC-61869 (Part-2) Instrument transformers - Part 2: Additional requirements for
current transformers
inductive voltage transformers
combined transformers
capacitor voltage transformers
IEC-61869 (Part-6) Instrument transformers - Part 6: Additional general
requirements for low-power instrument transformers
IEC-61869 (Part-9) Instrument transformers - Part 9: Digital interface for instrument
transformers
IEC-61869 (Part-102) Instrument transformers - Part 102: Ferroresonance oscillations
in substations with inductive voltage transformers
IEC-61869 (Part-103) Instrument transformers - The use of instrument transformers
for power quality measurement
BUSHING
IS-2099 Bushings for Alternating Voltages above 1000V
IEC-60137 Insulated Bushings for Alternating Voltages
above 1000V
SURGE ARRESTERS
IS-3070 (PART2) Lightning arresters for alternating current systems : Metal oxide
lightning arrestors without gaps
IEC-60099-4 Metal oxide surge arrestors without gaps
IEC-60099-5 Selection and application recommendation
ANSI-C62.1 IEE Standards for S A for AC Power Circuits
NEMA-LA 1 Surge Arresters
CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS
IS-722, IS-1248 Electrical relays for power system
IS-3231, 3231 (P-3) Protection
IS:5039 Distributed pillars for Voltages not Exceeding 1000 Volts
IEC-60068.2.2 Basic environmental testing procedures Part 2: Test B: Dry heat
IEC-60529 Degree of Protection provided by enclosures
IEC-60947-4-1 Low voltage switchgear and control gear
IEC-61095 Electromechanical Contactors for household and similar
purposes
IEC-60439 (P1 & 2) Low Voltage Switchgear and control gear assemblies
ANSI-C37.20 Switchgear Assemblies, including metal enclosed bus
ANSI-C37.50 Test Procedures for Low Voltage Alternating Current Power
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
Circuit Breakers
ANSI-C39 Electric Measuring instrument
ANSI-C83 Components for Electric Equipment
IS: 8623: (Part I to 3) Specification for Switchgear & Control Assemblies
NEMA-AB Moulded Case Circuit and Systems
NEMA-CS Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA-PB-1 Panel Boards
NEMA-SG-5 Low voltage Power Circuit breakers
NEMA-SG-3 Power Switchgear Assemblies
NEMA-SG-6 Power switching Equipment
NEMA-5E-3 Motor Control Centers
1248 (P1 to P9) Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments & their accessories
Disconnecting switches
IEC-62271-102 High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 102: Alternating
current disconnectors and earthing switches
IEC-60265 (Part 1 & 2) High Voltage switches
ANSI-C37.32 Schedule of preferred Ratings, Manufacturing Specifications and
Application Guide for high voltage Air Switches, Bus supports and
switch accessories
ANSI-C37.34 Test Code for high voltage air switches
NEMA-SG6 Power switching equipment
PLCC and line traps
IS-8792 Line traps for AC power system
IS-8793 Methods of tests for line traps
IS-8997 Coupling devices for PLC systems
IS-8998 Methods of test for coupling devices for PLC systems
IEC-60353 Line traps for A.C. power systems
IEC-60481 Coupling Devices for power line carrier systems
IEC-60495 Single sideboard power line carrier terminals
IEC-60683 Planning of (single Side-Band) power line carrier systems
CIGRE Teleprotection report by Committee 34 & 35
CIGRE Guide on power line carrier 1979
CCIR International Radio Consultative Committee
CCITT International Telegraph & Telephone Consultative Committee
EIA Electric Industries Association
Protection and control equipment
IEC-60051: (P1 to P9) Recommendations for Direct Acting indicating analogue electrical
measuring instruments and their accessories
IEC-60255 (Part 1 to 23) Electrical relays
IEC-60297 (P1 to P4) Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6mm (19 inches)
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
series
IEC-60359 Expression of the performance of electrical & electronic
measuring equipment
IEC-60387 Symbols for Alternating-Current Electricity meters
IEC-60447 Man machine interface (MMI) - Actuating principles
IEC-60521 Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour metres
IEC-60547 Modular plug-in Unit and standard 19-inch rack mounting unit
based on NIM Standard (for electronic nuclear instruments)
ANSI-81 Screw threads
ANSI-B18 Bolts and Nuts
ANSI-C37.1 Relays, Station Controls etc
ANSI-C37.2 Manual and automatic station control, supervisory and
associated telemetering equipment
ANSI-C37.2 Relays and relay systems associated with electric power
apparatus
ANSI-C39.1 Requirements for electrical analog indicating instruments
MOTORS
IS-325 Three phase induction motors
IS-4691 Degree of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical
machinery
IEC-60034 (P1 to P19:) Rotating electrical machines
IEC-Document 2 Three phase induction motors
(Central Office) Motors and Generators
NEMA-MGI
Electronic equipment and components
MIL-21B, MIL-833 Environmental testing
& MIL-2750
EC-60068 (P1 to P5) Printed boards
IEC-60326 (P1 to P2) Material and workmanship standards
IS-1363 (P1 to P3) Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C
IS-1364 (P1 to P5) Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of products grades A and B
IS-3138 Hexagonal Bolts and Nuts (M42 to M150)
ISO-898 Fasteners: Bolts, screws and studs
ASTM Specification and tests for materials
Clamps & connectors
IS-5561 Electric power connectors
NEMA-CC1 Electric Power connectors for sub station
NEMA-CC 3 Connectors for Use between aluminium or aluminum-Copper
Overhead Conductors
Bus hardware and insulators
IS: 2121 Fittings for Aluminum and steel cored Al conductors for overhead
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
power lines
IS-731 Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines with a nominal
voltage greater than 1000 V
IS-2486 (P1 to P4) Insulator fittings for overhead power lines with a nominal
voltage greater than 1000 V
IEC-60120 Dimensions of Ball and Socket Couplings of string insulator units
IEC-60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V
IEC-60168 Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material
or glass for Systems with Nominal Voltages Greater than 1000 V
IEC-62155 Hollow pressurized and unpressurized ceramic and glass
insulators for use in electrical equipment with rated voltages
greater than 1 000 V
IEC-60273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems
with nominal voltages greater than 1000V
IEC-61462 Pressurized and un-pressurized insulator for use in electrical
equipment with rated voltage greater than 1000V – Definitions,
Test methods, acceptance criteria and design recommendations
IEC-60305 Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage above 1000V-
ceramic or glass insulator units for ac systems Characteristics of
String Insulator Units of the cap and pin type
IEC-60372 (1984) Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator
units : dimensions and tests
IEC-60383 (P1 and P2) Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000
V
IEC-60433 Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type
IEC-60471 Dimensions of Clevis and tongue couplings of string insulator
units
ANSI-C29 Wet process porcelain insulators
ANSI-C29.1 Test methods for electrical power insulators
ANSI-C92.2 For insulators, wet-process porcelain and toughened glass
suspension type
ANSI-C29.8 For wet-process porcelain insulators apparatus, post-type
ANSI-G.8 Iron and steel hardware
CISPR-7B Recommendations of the CISPR, tolerances of form and of
Position, Part 1
ASTM A-153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on iron and steel hardware
Strain and rigid bus-conductor

IS-2678 Dimensions & tolerances for Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloys drawn round tube
IS-5082 Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bars. Rods, Tubes and
Sections for Electrical purposes
ASTM-B 230-82 Aluminum 1350 H19 Wire for electrical purposes
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
ASTM-B 231-81 Concentric - lay - stranded, aluminum 1350 conductors
ASTM-B 221 Aluminum - Alloy extruded bar, road, wire, shape
ASTM-B 236-83 Aluminum bars for electrical purpose (Bus-bars)
ASTM-B 317-83 Aluminum-Alloy extruded bar, rod, pipe and structural shapes for
electrical purposes (Bus Conductors)
Batteries
IS:1651 Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Tubular
Positive Plates)
IS:1652 Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Plante
Positive Plates)
IS:1146 Rubber and Plastic Containers for Lead-Acid Storage Batteries
IS:6071 Synthetic Separators for Lead-Acid Batteries
IS:266 Specification for Sulphuric Acid
IS:1069 Specification for Water for Storage Batteries
IS:3116 Specification for Sealing Compound for Lead-Acid Batteries
IS:1248 Indicating Instruments
IS:10918 Vented type nickel Cadmium Batteries
IEC:60896-21&22 Lead Acid Batteries Valve Regulated types – Methods of Tests &
Requirements
IEC: 60623 Vented type nickel Cadmium Batteries
IEC:60622 Secondary Cells & Batteries – Sealed Ni-Cd rechargeable single
cell
IEC:60623 Secondary Cells & Batteries – Vented Ni-Cd rechargeable single
cell
IEC:60896-11 Stationary Lead Acid Batteries – Vented Type – General
requirements & method of tests
IEEE-485 Recommended practices for sizing of Lead Acid Batteries
IEEE-1115 Sizing of Ni-Cd Batteries
IEEE-1187 Recommended practices for design & installation of VRLA
Batteries
IEEE-1188 Recommended practices for design & installation of VRLA
Batteries
IEEE-1189 Guide for selection of VRLA Batteries
Battery Charger
IS:3895 Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier Cells and Stacks
IS:4540 Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier Assemblies and
Equipment
IS:6619 Safety Code for Semiconductor Rectifier Equipment
IS:2026 Power Transformers
IS:2959 AC Contactors for Voltages not Exceeding 1000 Volts
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IS:1248 Indicating Instruments
IS:2208 HRC Fuses
IS:13947 (Part-3) Air break switches, air break disconnectors & fuse combination
units for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or 1200V DC
IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control gear
IS:6005 Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and Steel
IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
IS:3842 Electrical relay for AC Systems
IS:5 Colours for ready mix paint
IEEE-484 Recommended Design for installation design and installation of
large lead storage batteries for generating stations and
substations
IEEE-485 Sizing large lead storage batteries for generating stations and
substations
Wires and cables
ASTMD-2863 Measuring the minimum oxygen concentration to support candle
like combustion of plastics (oxygen index)
IS-694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including
1100 Volts
IS-1255 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power
cables, upto and including 33 kV rating
IS-1554 (P1 and P2) PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables (part 1) for working
voltage upto and including 1100 V
Part (2) for working voltage from 3.3 kV upto and including 11kV
IS:1753 Aluminium conductor for insulated cables
IS:2982 Copper Conductor in insulated cables
IS-3961 (P1 to P5) Recommended current ratings for cables
IS-3975 Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for armouring of cables
IS-5831 PVC insulating and sheath of electric cables
IS-6380 Elastometric insulating and sheath of electric cables
IS-7098 Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for
working voltage upto and including 1100 volts
IS-7098 Cross-linked polyethyle insulated PVC sheathed cables for
working voltage from 3.3kV upto and including 33 kV
IS-8130 Conductors for insulated electrical cables and flexible cords
IS-1753 Aluminum Conductors for insulated cables
IS-10418 Specification for drums for electric cables
IEC-60096 (part 0 to p4) Radio Frequency cables
IEC-60183 Guide to the Selection of High Voltage Cables
IEC-60189 (P1 to P7) Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC
sheath
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IEC-60227 (P1 to P7) Polyvinyl Chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and
including 450/750V
IEC-60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC-60230 Impulse tests on cables and their accessories
IEC-60287 (P1 to P3) Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables (100% load
factor)
IEC-60304 Standard colours for insulation for low-frequency cables and
wires
IEC-60331 Fire resisting characteristics of Electric cables
IEC-60332 (P1 to P3) Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
IEC-60502 Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated
voltages from 1 kV upto to 30 kV
IEC-754 (P1 and P2) Tests on gases evolved during combustion of electric cables
AIR conditioning and ventilation
IS-659 Safety code for air conditioning
IS-660 Safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration
ARI:520 Standard for Positive Displacement Refrigeration Compressor
and Condensing Units
IS:4503 Shell and tube type heat exchanger
ASHRAE-24 Method of testing for rating of liquid coolers
ANSI-B-31.5 Refrigeration Piping
IS:2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS:655 Specification for Metal Air Dust
IS:277 Specification for Galvanised Steel Sheets
IS-737 Specification for Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Sheet &
Strip
IS-1079 Hot rolled cast steel sheet & strip
IS-3588 Specification for Electrical Axial Flow Fans
IS-2312 Propeller Type AC Ventilation Fans
BS-848 Methods of Performance Test for Fans
BS-6540 Part-I Air Filters used in Air Conditioning and General Ventilation
BS-3928 Sodium Flame Test for Air Filters (Other than for Air Supply to
I.C. Engines and Compressors)
US-PED-2098 Method of cold DOP & hot DOP test
MIL-STD-282 DOP smoke penetration method
ASHRAE-52 Air cleaning device used in general ventilation for removing
particle matter
IS:3069 Glossary of Terms, Symbols and Units Relating to Thermal
Insulation Materials
IS:4671 Expanded Polystyrene for Thermal Insulation Purposes
IS:8183 Bonded Mineral Wool
IS:3346 Evaluation of Thermal Conductivity properties by means of
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
guarded hot plate method
ASTM-C-591-69 Standard specification for rigid preformed cellular urethane
thermal insulation
IS:4894 Centrifugal Fans
BS:848 Method of Performance Test for Centrifugal Fans
IS:325 Induction motors, three-phase
IS:4722 Rotating electrical machines
IS:1231 Three phase foot mounted Induction motors, dimensions of
IS:2233 Designations of types of construction and mounting
arrangements of rotating electrical machines
IS:2254 Vertical shaft motors for pumps, dimensions of
IS:7816 Guide for testing insulation resistance of rotating machines
IS:4029 Guide for testing three phase induction motors
IS: 4729 Rotating electrical machines, vibration of, Measurement and
evaluation of
IS:4691 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for rotating
electrical machinery
IS:7572 Guide for testing single-phase ac motors
IS:2148 Flame proof enclosure for electrical apparatus
BS:4999(Part-51) Noise levels
Galvanizing
IS-209 Zinc Ingot
IS-2629 Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip galvanizing on iron and steel
IS-2633 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles
ASTM-A-123 Specification for zinc (Hot Galavanizing) Coatings, on products
Fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates,
bars and strips
ASTM-A-121-77 Zinc-coated (Galvanized) steel barbed wire
Painting
IS-6005 Code of practice for phosphating of iron and steel
ANSI-Z551 Gray finishes for industrial apparatus and equipment
SSPEC Steel structure painting council
Fire protection system
-- Fire protection manual issued by tariff advisory committee (TAC)
of India
HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
IS:1520 Horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear, cold and fresh water
IS:9137 Code for acceptance test for centrifugal & axial pumps
IS:5120 Technical requirement – Rotodynamic special purpose pumps
API-610 Centrifugal pumps for general services
Hydraulic Institutes Standards
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
BS:599 Methods of testing pumps
PTC-8.2 Power Test Codes - Centrifugal pumps
DIESEL ENGINES
IS:10000 Methods of tests for internal combustion engines
IS:10002 Specification for performance requirements for constant speed
compression ignition engines for general purposes (above 20
kW)
BS:5514 The performance of reciprocating compression ignition (Diesel)
engines, utilizing liquid fuel only, for general purposes
ISO:3046 Reciprocating internal combustion engines performance
IS:554 Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are
required on threads
ASME Power Test Code Internal combustion engine PTC-17
-- Codes of Diesel Engine Manufacturer’s Association, USA
PIPING VALVES & SPECIALITIES
IS:636 Non percolating flexible fire-fighting delivery hose
IS:638 Sheet rubber jointing and rubber inserting jointing
IS:778 Gun metal gate, globe and check valves for general purpose
IS:780 Sluice valves for water works purposes (50 to 300 mm)
IS:901 Couplings, double male and double female instantaneous pattern
for fire fighting
IS:902 Suction hose couplings for fire-fighting purposes
IS:903 Fire hose delivery couplings branch pipe nozzles and nozzle
spanner
IS:1538 Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
IS:1903 Ball valve (horizontal plunger type) including floats for water
supply purposes
IS:2062 SP for weldable structural steel
IS:2379 Colour Code for the identification of pipelines
IS:2643 Dimensions of pipe threads for fastening purposes
IS:2685 Code of Practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
sluice valves
IS:2906 Sluice valves for water-works purposes (350 to 1200 mm size)
IS:3582 Basket strainers for fire-fighting purposes (cylindrical type)
IS:3589 Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (150 to
2000 mm nominal diameter)
IS:4038 Foot valves for water works purposes
IS:4927 Unlined flax canvas hose for fire fighting
IS:5290 Landing valves (internal hydrant)
IS:5312 (Part-I) Swing check type reflex (non-return) valves
IS:5306 Code of practice for fire extinguishing installations and
equipment on premises
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
Part-I Hydrant systems, hose reels and foam inlets
Part-II Sprinkler systems
BS:5150 Specification for cast iron gate valves
MOTORS & ANNUNCIATION PANELS
IS:325 Three phase induction motors
IS:900 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of induction
motors
IS:996 Single phase small AC and universal electric motors
IS:1231 Dimensions of three phase foot mounted induction motors
IS:2148 Flame proof enclosure of electrical apparatus
IS:2223 Dimensions of flange mounted AC induction motors
IS:2253 Designations for types of construction and mounting
arrangements of rotating electrical machines
IS:2254 Dimensions of vertical shaft motors for pumps
IS:3202 Code of practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment
IS:4029 Guide for testing three phase induction motors
IS:4691 Degree of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical
machinery
IS:4722 Rotating electrical machines
IS:4729 Measurement and evaluation of vibration of rotating electrical
machines
IS:5572 Classification of hazardous areas for electrical
(Part-I) installations (Areas having gases and vapours)
IS:6362 Designation of methods of cooling for rotating electrical
machines
IS:6381 Construction and testing of electrical apparatus with type of
protection ‘e’
IS:7816 Guide for testing insulation for rotating machine
IS:4064 Air break switches
IEC DOCUMENT 2 Three Phase Induction Motor
(Control Office) 432
VDE 0530 Part I/66 Three Phase Induction Motor
IS:9224 (Part-II) HRC Fuses
IS:6875 Push Button and Control Switches
IS:694 PVC Insulated cables
IS:1248 Indicating instruments
IS:375 Auxiliary wiring & busbar markings
IS:2147 Degree of protection
IS:5 Colour Relay and timers
IS:2959 Contactors
PG Test Procedures
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
NFPA-13 Standard for the installation of sprinkler system
NFPA-15 Standard for water spray fixed system for the fire protection
NFPA-12A Standard for Halong 1301 Fire Extinguishing System
NFPA-72E Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors
-- Fire Protection Manual by TAC (Latest Edition)
NFPA-12 Standard on Carbon dioxide extinguisher systems
IS:3034 Fire of industrial building
-- Electrical generating and distributing stations code of practice
IS:2878 CO2 (Carbon dioxide) Type Extinguisher
IS:2171 DC (Dry Chemical Powder) type
IS:940 Pressurised Water Type
D.G. SET
IS:10002 Specification for performance requirements for constant speed
compression ignition (diesel engine) for general purposes
IS:10000 Method of tests for internal combustion engines
IS:4722 Rotating electrical machines-specification
IS:12063 Degree of protection provided by enclosures
IS:12065 Permissible limit of noise levels for rotating electrical machines
-- Indian Explosive Act 1932
Steel structures
IS-228 (1992) Method of Chemical Analysis of pig iron, cast iron and plain
carbon and low alloy steels.
IS-802 (P1 to 3) Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead
transmission line towers
IS-806 Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building
construction
IS-808 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column channel and angle
sections
IS-814 Covered electrodes for manual arc welding of carbon of carbon
manganese steel
IS-816 Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in Mild steel
IS-817 Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders.
Part 1 : Manual Metal arc welding
IS-875 (P1 to P4) Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for
buildings and structures
IS-1161 Steel tubes for structural purposes
IS-1182 Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion
welded butt joints in steel plates
IS-1363 (P1 to P3) Hexagonal head bolts, screws & nuts of products grade C
IS-1364 Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B
IS-1367 (P1 to P18) Technical supply condition for threaded steel fasteners
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IS-1599 Methods for bend test
IS-1608 Method for tensile testing of steel products
IS-1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures
IS-1978 Line Pipe
IS-2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS-2595 Code of practice for Radiographic testing
IS-3063 Single coil rectangular section spring washers for bolts, nuts and
screws
IS-3664 Code of practice for ultrasonic pulse echo testing by contact and
immersion methods
IS-7205 Safety code for erection of structural steel work
IS-9595 Recommendations for metal arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steels
ANSI-B18.2.1 Inch series square and Hexagonal bolts and screws
ANSI-B18.2.2 Square and hexagonal nuts
ANSI-G8.14 Round head bolts
ASTM-A6 Specification for General Requirements for rolled steel plates,
shapes, sheet piling and bars of structural use
ASTM-A36 Specifications of structural steel
ASTM-A47 Specification for malleable iron castings
ASTM-A143 Practice for safeguarding against embilement of Hot Galvanized
structural steel products and procedure for detaching
embrilement
ASTM-A242 Specification for high strength low alloy structural steel
ASTM-A283 Specification for low and intermediate tensile strength carbon
steel plates of structural quality
ASTM-A394 Specification for Galvanized steel transmission tower bolts and
nuts
ASTM-441 Specification for High strength low alloy structural manganese
vanadium steel
ASTM-A572 Specification for High strength low alloy colombium-Vanadium
steel of structural quality
AWS D1-0 Code for welding in building construction welding inspection
AWS D1-1 Structural welding code
AISC American institute of steel construction
NEMA-CG1 Manufactured graphite electrodes
Piping and pressure vessels
IS-1239 (Part 1 and 2) Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings
IS -3589 Seamless Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and
sewage
IS-6392 Steel pipe flanges
ASME Boiler and pressure vessel code
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
ASTM-A120 Specification for pipe steel, black and hot dipped, zinc-coated
(Galvanized) welded and seamless steel pipe for ordinary use
ASTM-A53 Specification for pipe, steel, black, and hot-dipped, zinc coated
welded and seamless
ASTM-A106 Seamless carbon steel pipe for high temperature service
ASTM-A284 Low and intermediate tensile strength carbon-silicon steel plates
for machine parts and general construction
ASTM-A234 Pipe fittings of wrought carbon steel and alloy steel for moderate
and elevated temperatures
ASTM-S181 Specification for forgings, carbon steel for general purpose piping
ASTM-A105 Forgings, carbon steel for piping components
ASTM-A307 Carbon steel externally threated standard fasteners
ASTM-A193 Alloy steel and stainless steel bolting materials for high
temperature service
ASTM-A345 Flat rolled electrical steel for magnetic applications
ASTM-A197 Cupola malleable iron
ANSI-B2.1 Pipe threads (Except dry seal)
ANSI-B16.1 Cast iron pipe flangesand glanged fitting. Class 25, 125, 250 and
800
ANSI-B16.1 Malleable iron threaded fittings, class 150 and 300
ANSI-B16.5 Pipe flanges and flanged fittings, steel nickel alloy and other
special alloys
ANSI-B16.9 Factory-made wrought steel butt welding fittings
ANSI-B16.11 Forged steel fittings, socket-welding and threaded
ANSI-B16.14 Ferrous pipe plug, bushings and locknuts with piple threads
ANSI-B16.25 Butt welding ends
ANSI-B18.1.1 Fire hose couplings screw thread
ANSI-B18.2.1 Inch series square and hexagonal bolts and screws
ANSI-B18.2.2 Square and hexagonal nuts
NSI-B18.21.1 Lock washers
ANSI-B18.21.2 Plain washers
ANSI-B31.1 Power piping
ANSI-B36.10 Welded and seamless wrought steel pipe
ANSI-B36.9 Stainless steel pipe
Other civil works standards
IS-269 33 grade ordinary portland cement
IS2721 Galvanized steel chain link fence fabric
IS-278 Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing
IS-383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete
IS-432 (P1 and P2) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-dawn steel
wire for concrete reinforcement
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IS-456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
IS-516 Method of test for strength of concrete
IS-800 Code of practice for general construction in steel
IS-806 Steel tubes for structural purposes
IS-1172 Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation
IS-1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete
IS-1566 Hard-dawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement
IS-1742 Code of Practice for Building drainage
IS-1785 Plain hard-drawn steel wire for pre-stressed concrete
IS-1786 High strength deformed Steel Bars and wires for concrete
reinforcement
IS-1811 Methods of sampling Foundry sands
IS-1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures
IS-2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS-2064 Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances-
code of practices
IS-2065 Code of practice for water supply in buildings
IS-2090 High tension steel bars used in pre-stressed concrete
IS-2140 Standard Galvanized steel wire for fencing
IS-2470 (P1 & P2) Code of practice for installation of septic tanks
IS-2514 Concrete vibrating tables
IS-2645 Integral cement waterproofing compounds
IS-3025 (Part 1 to Methods of sampling and test (Physical and chemical) for water
Part 48) and waste water
IS-4091 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for
transmission line towers and poles
IS-4111 (Part 1 to P5) Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system
IS-4990 Plywood for concrete shuttering work
IS-5600 Sewage and drainage pumps
National building code of India 1970
USBR E12 Earth Manual by United States Department of the interior Bureau
of Reclamation
ASTM-A392-81 Zinc/Coated steel chain link fence fabric
ASTM-D1557-80 test for moisture-density relation of soils using 10-lb (4.5 kg)
rame land 18-in. (457 mm) Drop
ASTM-D1586(1967) Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils
ASTM-D2049-69 Test Method for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils
ASTM-D2435 Test method for Unconsolidated, (1982)
Undrained Strengths of Cohesive Soils in Triaxial Compression
BS-5075 Specification for accelerating Part I Admixtures, Retarding
Admixtures and Water Reducing Admixtures
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
CPWD Latest CPWD specifications
ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR
IS:6745 Methods for Determination of
BS:443-1969 Mass of zinc coating on zinc
coated Iron and Steel Articles
IS:8263 Methods for Radio Interference
IEC:437-1973 Test on High Voltage Insulators
NEMA:107-1964
CISPR
IS:209, BS:3436-1961 Zinc Ingot
IS:398 Part - V Aluminum Conductors for Overhead Transmission Purposes
IEC:209-1966
BS:215(Part-II), Aluminium Conductors galvanized steel reinforced extra high
IEC:209-1966 voltage (400 kV and above)
IS:1778, BS:1559-1949 Reels and Drums for Bare Conductors
IS:1521, ISO/R89-1959 Method for Tensile Testing of steel wire
IS:2629 Recommended practice for Hot dip Galvanising on Iron and Steel
IS:2633 Method for Testing Uniformity of coating of zinc Coated Articles
IS:4826/ Hot dip galvanised coatings on round steel wires
ASTMA-472-729
GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE
IS:1521, ISO/R:89-1959 Method for Tensile Testing of Steel Wire
IS:1778 Reels and Drums for Bare Conductors
IS:2629 Recommended practice for Hot Dip Galvanising on Iron and Steel
IS:2633 Methods for testing Uniformity of Coating of Zinc Coated Articles
IS:4826/ ASTM: Hot dip Galvanised Coatings on Round Steel Wires
A 475-72a
BS:443-1969
IS:6745/ BS:443-1969 Method for Determination of mass of Zinc Coating on Zinc coated
Iron and Steel Articles.
IS:209/ BS:3463-1961 Zinc ingot
IS:398 (Pt. I to P5:1992)/ Aluminum Conductors for overhead transmission purposes
BS:215 (Part-II
Lighting Fixtures and Accessories
IS:1913 General and safety requirements for electric lighting fittings
IS:3528 Water proof electric lighting fittings
IS:4012 Dust proof electric lighting fittings
IS:4013 Dust tight proof electric lighting fittings
IS:10322 Industrial lighting fittings with metal reflectors
IS:10322 Industrial lighting fittings with plastic reflectors
IS:2206 Well glass lighting fittings for use under ground in mines (non-
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
flameproof type)
IS:10322 Specification for flood light
IS:10322 Specification for decorative lighting outfits
IS:10322 Luminaries for street lighting
IS:2418 Tubular fluorescent lamps
IS:9900 High pressure mercury vapour lamps
IS:1258 Specification for Bayonet lamp fluorescent lamp
IS:3323 Bi-pin lamp holder tubular fluorescent lamps
IS:1534 Ballasts for use in fluorescent lighting fittings.
(Part-I)
IS:1569 Capacitors for use in fluorescent lighting fittings
IS:2215 Starters for fluorescent lamps
IS:3324 Holders for starters for tubular fluorescent lamps
IS:418 GLS lamps
IS:3553 Water tight electric fittings
IS:2713 Tubular steel poles
IS:280 MS wire for general engg. Purposes
Conduits, Accessories and Junction Boxes
IS:9537 Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring
IS:3480 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring
IS:2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring
IS:3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring
IS:4649 Adaptors for flexible steel conduits
IS:5133 Steel and Cast Iron Boxes
IS:2629 Hot dip galvanising of Iron & Steel
Lighting Panels
IS:13947 LV Switchgear and Control gear(Part 1 to 5)
IS:8828 Circuit breakers for over current protection for house hold and
similar installations
IS:5 Ready mix paints
IS:2551 Danger notice plates
IS:2705 Current transformers
IS:9224 HRC Cartridge fuse links for voltage above 650V(Part-2)
IS:5082 Wrought aluminium and Al. alloys, bars, rods, tubes and sections
for electrical purposes
IS:8623 Factory built Assemblies of Switchgear and Control Gear for
voltages upto and including 1000V AC and 1200V DC
IS:1248 Direct Acting electrical indicating instruments
Electrical Installation
IS:1293 3 pin plug
IS:371 Two to three ceiling roses
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IS:3854 Switches for domestic and similar purposes
IS:5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work
IS:732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation (system voltage
not exceeding 650 Volts.)
IS:3043 Code of practice for earthing
IS:3646 Code of practice of interior illumination part II & III
IS:1944 Code of practice for lighting of public through fares
IS:5571 Guide for selection of electrical equipment for hazardous areas
IS:800 Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building
construction
IS:2633 Methods of Testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated articles
IS:6005 Code of practice for phosphating iron and steel
INDIAN ELECTRICITY ACT
INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES
LT SWITCHGEAR
IS:8623 (Part-I) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear
assemblies
IS:13947 (Part-I) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 1
General Rules
IS:13947 (part-2) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 2
circuit breakers
IS:13947 (part-3) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 3
Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-disconnectors and fuse
combination units
IS:13947 (part-4) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear.
Part 4 Contactors and motors starters
Part 5 Control-circuit devices and switching elements
Part 6 Multiple function switching devices
Part 7 Ancillary equipments
IS:12063 Degree of protection provided by enclosures
IS:2705 Current Transformers
IS:3156 Voltage Transformers
IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
IS:1248 Electrical indicating instruments
IS:722 AC Electricity meters
IS:5578 Guide for Marking of insulated conductors of apparatus terminals
IS:13703 (part 1) Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or 1500V
DC Part 1 General Requirements
IS:13703 (part 2) Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or 1500V
DC Part 2 Fuses for use of authorized persons
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-C
CODES TITLE
IS:6005 Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel
IS:5082 Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum alloys for electrical purposes
IS:2633 Hot dip galvanising
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-D
LIST OF DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS FOR SECOND ADVANCE
A. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS FOR SWITCHYARD
(1) Single Line Diagram

(2) Electrical Layout – Plan and Sections
(3) DSLP Calculation and drawing
(4) Structure Layout (Plan & Section) drawing
(5) Foundation & Cable Trench Layout
(6) Earthmat Layout
(7) Short circuit Force and Critical Span Calculations (for non-standard span)
(8) Cantilever Strength calculations (for non-standard span)
B. CIVIL DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS
(1) Soil Investigation Report (if applicable)

(2) Structure Design, Foundation Design & Drawing, Plinth Beam Design & Drawing
and column Design & Drawing up to G.F. Level of control room building
(3) Structure Design, Foundation Design & Drawing, Plinth Beam Design & Drawing
and column Design & Drawing of GIS building(s)
C. DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS OF EQUIPMENT
(1) Circuit Breaker, Isolator, CT, CVT, IVT, Surge Arrestor, Bus Post Insulator
- Drawing, GTP and Type test Reports
(2) Control and Relay Panels
- GTP and Type test Reports
(3) Substation Automation System (SAS)
- GTP and Type test Reports
D. DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS OF POWER TRANSFORMER
(1) Design Review documents

(2) GA drawings for transformer, bushings
(3) Foundation Plan
(4) GTP
(5) RTCC -GA and schematic drawings
(6) Rating and Diagram Plate
(7) Power Transformer foundation design & drawings (if Applicable)
(8) For Single Phase Autotransformer (if Applicable)
- Single Line Diagram
- Electrical Layout & Section
- Foundation Layout including Neutral & Delta Formation
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 2 (Annexure-D)
ANNEXURE-D
LIST OF DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS FOR SECOND ADVANCE
E. DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS OF REACTOR
(1) Design Review documents

(2) GA drawings for reactor, NGR, LA, bushings
(3) Foundation Plan
(4) GTP
(5) Rating and Diagram Plate
(6) Shunt Reactor, NGR & SA foundation design & drawings (if Applicable)
(7) For Single Phase Reactor (if Applicable)
- Single Line Diagram
- Electrical Layout & Section
- Foundation Layout including Neutral Formation
NOTES:-
1. The list of drawings/ documents mentioned above is a standard list. Some of the items may
not be applicable and need not to be referred for a particular substation package.
2. In case type tests are to be repeated/conducted, then approval of type test reports is not
required at this stage.
3. Category-II approved drawings shall also be considered for release of second/engineering
advance.
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 2 of 2 (Annexure-D)
ANNEXURE-E
COMPREHENSIVE LIST OF DRAWINGS
SL. NO. DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS TITLE CATEGORY

1.00 SUBSTATION LAYOUT DRAWINGS
1.01 Single Line Diagram of substation A
1.02 Electrical layout (plan & section) drawing A
1.03 Overall General Arrangement drawing A
1.04 Structure loading diagram cum layout drawing A
1.05 DSLP Layout drawing A
1.06 Switchyard Foundation layout drawing A
1.07 Erection Key Diagram (plan & section) & Erection Bill of quantity A
1.08 Indoor Cable trench layout drawing A
1.09 Outdoor Cable trench layout drawing A
1.10 Buried cable trench layout drawing A
1.11 Lighting Fixture & conduit layout – Control room building A/R
1.12 Lighting Fixture & conduit layout – FFPH building A/R
1.13 Lighting Fixture & conduit layout – Transit camp (if applicable) A/R
1.14 Lighting Fixture & conduit layout – Switchyard/Street A/R
1.15 Lighting Fixture & conduit layout – Switchyard panel room A/R
1.15 Earthing layout - Control Room building A
1.16 Earthmat layout – Outdoor Switchyard area A
1.17 Layout drawing for gravel and fence A
1.18 Switchyard Road & drain layout drawing A
1.19 Layout drawing of Visual Monitoring System A
1.20 SLD of LT AC/DC systems A
1.21 LT switchgear room -Panel layout A
1.22 Fire Fighting Piping layout in the switchyard A
Fire protection system (Hydrant system & Extinguishers) for Control room
1.23 A
building, GIS Building & FFPH building etc
HVW spray system drawings (plan, elevation, side view, isometric view and
1.24 A
pylon support location details)
1.25 NIFPS drawings A
Fire detection & Alarm system for Control room building, GIS Building &
1.26 A
Switchyard panel room
1.27 Panel layout in Control room building A
1.28 Layout drawing for LT station A
1.29 Switchyard Panel room - Panel layout A
1.30 Power cable termination schedule R
1.31 Control cable termination schedule R
Applicable for GIS
Gas System Line Diagram (GAS SLD) indicating compartment details &
1.32 A
Weight
1.33 GIS Layout drawing including outdoor GIB (Plan & Section) A
1.34 Layout drawing of UHF sensors for PD Measurement A
1.35 GIS building - Layout drawing A
1.36 GIS Building – Lighting Fixture & conduit layout A
1.37 GIS Building - Layout drawing of Ventilation System A
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 9 (Annexure-E)
ANNEXURE-E

1.38 GIS Building (Panel Room) – Air Conditioning system layout drawing A
1.39 GIS Building – Indoor cable trench Layout drawing A
2.00 DESIGN CALCULATION

2.01 DSLP Calculation A
2.02 Sag Tension & Short Circuit Force Calculation (if applicable) R
2.03 Lighting system design calculation (if applicable) R
2.04 Earthing system design calculation (if applicable) R
2.05 Battery/Charger sizing calculation (if applicable) R
2.06 Hydraulic calculations for Fire protection system R
2.07 AC & Ventilation calculation for GIS Building (if applicable) R
2.08 EOT crane sizing for GIS building R
3.00 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR

3.01 Design Review document along with all supporting documents A
3.02 Guaranteed Technical Particular (GTP) A
3.03 Components GA drawing for CB, DS, ES, GIB, CT, VT, Spacers, Bushings etc. A
3.04 Schematics for CB, DS,ES, CT, VT etc. (Except for LCC) A
3.05 Type Test Reports for GIS Equipments A
3.06 Detailed drawing of Bus Extension Module
3.07 Foundation plan for GIS (Including Loading Data) A
3.08 Platform Arrangement R
3.09 Name Plates R
3.10 GA & Schematic drawings of Local Control Cabinets (LCC) A
3.11 GA & Schematic drawings of overhead crane A
3.12 Earthing layout inside GIS building R
3.13 Catalogues for R
a) SF6 gas leakage detector
b) SF6 gas filling & evacuation plant
c) SF6 gas Analyser
d) On line partial discharge monitoring system
3.14 List of Mandatory spares A
3.15 List of Special Tools & Tackles A
3.16 Instruction Manual including catalogue of sensors R
4.00 AUTOTRANSFORMER
4.01 Design Review A
4.02 Guaranteed Technical Particulars A
4.03 Outline General Arrangement Drawing with Bill of material (OGA parts list) A
4.04 Foundation Plan A
4.05 Over Fluxing withstand duration curve R
4.06 Hysteresis Characteristics & specific loss vs flux density curve of iron core R
4.07 General Arrangement & Control Schematic of OLTC along with write-up A
4.08 General Arrangement & Control Schematic of Marshalling Box, Common A
Marshalling Box and Cooler control cubicle along with write-up
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-E

4.09 General Arrangement & Control Schematic of Digital RTCC relay and cubicle A
4.10 Interconnection diagram of Drive Mechanism Box, Marshalling Box, A
Common Marshalling Box & Digital RTCC.
4.11 SCADA communication interface of online monitoring equipment A
4.12 Transport Drawing R
4.13 Technical Particulars of Online DGA, Drying system, FO system A
4.14 Outline and control schematic of NIFPS A
4.15 GA & GTP of bushings A
4.16 Earthing Arrangement Drawing (Internal & External) A
4.17 Drawing of Aircell, Conservator & Radiator A
4.18 Conservator & Tank Oil filling procedure plate R
4.19 Magnetizing Characteristics of bushings CT R
4.20 Rating and Diagram plate A
4.21 Oil flow Diagram R
4.22 Valve Schedule plate drawing A
4.23 GA of Twin-Bi directional roller A
4.24 Instruction Manual R
4.25 Type Test Report A
5.00 REACTOR
5.01 Design Review A
5.02 Guaranteed Technical Particulars A
5.03 Outline General Arrangement Drawing with Bill of material (OGA parts list) A
5.04 Foundation Plan A
5.05 General Arrangement & Control Schematic of Marshalling Box, Common A
Marshalling Box along with write-up
5.06 SCADA communication interface of online monitoring equipment A
5.08 Technical Particulars of Online DGA, Drying system, FO system A
5.09 Outline and control schematic of NIFPS A
5.10 GA & GTP of bushings A
5.11 Earthing Arrangement Drawing (Internal & External) A
5.12 Drawing of Aircell, Conservator & Radiator R
5.13 Conservator & Tank Oil filling procedure plate R
5.14 Magnetization characteristics of Reactor Core and bushing CTs R
5.15 Hysteresis Characteristics & specific loss vs flux density curve of iron core R
5.16 Rating and diagram plate A
5.17 Voltage Ampere curve for Reactor R
5.18 Valve Schedule plate drawing A
5.19 GA of Twin bi-directional roller A
5.21 Type test Report A
6.00 NEUTRAL GROUNDING REACTOR (NGR)

a) AIR CORE TYPE NGR
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-E

6.01 Design Review Document A
6.02 General Technical Particulars A
6.03 General Arrangement Drawing with BOM A
6.04 Main Coil Lifting Details R
6.05 Foundation Detail Drawing R
6.06 Main Coil & Insulator Assembly Drawing A
6.07 Terminal Detail Drawing A
6.08 Rating & Diagram Plate A
6.10 NGR Pedestal Drawing A
b) OIL FILLED TYPE NGR

6.11 Design Review Document A
6.12 General Technical Particulars A
6.13 General Arrangement Drawing with BOM A
6.14 Foundation Detail Drawing R
6.15 Combined Foundation of Reactor, NGR and LA A
6.16 Rating & Diagram Plate A
6.18 Control Schematic A
7.00 CIRCUIT BREAKER

7.01 GA drawing of SF6 CB A
7.02 GTP A
7.03 OGA drawing of control unit A
OGA drawing of support insulator, interrupter insulator, PIR chamber
7.04 R
insulator, grading capacitor insulator (as applicable)
7.05 Support structure & foundation plan drawing A
7.06 Schematic drawings/Wiring diagrams A
7.07 Rating and name plate drawing A
7.08 SF6 gas connection diagram R
7.09 Schematic diagram of operating mechanism R
7.10 GA drawing, GTP & Type Test Reports of Controlled Switching Device A
7.11 Terminal pad and corona rings R
7.12 Sectional view of interrupter R
7.13 Type Test Reports A
8.00 ISOLATOR
8.01 GA drawing of Isolator with/without earth switch A
8.02 GTP A
8.03 Contact blade assembly (main & earth switch) R
8.04 Terminal pad & hinge contacts R
8.05 GA of MOM – main switch R
8.06 Schematic & wiring drawing for main switch R
8.07 Name plate - details A
8.08 GA of terminal pad A
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-E

8.09 GA of post insulator for isolator R
9.00 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER (CT/CVT/IVT)

9.01 General Arrangement A
9.02 GTP A
9.03 Sectional view R
9.04 Sec. terminal box GA R
9.05 Wiring drawing of JB incl. interpole R
9.06 Terminal pads A
9.07 Schematic & rating plate R
9.08 Porcelain insulator R
9.09 Corona ring R
10.00 SURGE ARRESTER

10.01 GA of Surge Arrester A
10.02 GTP A
10.03 Porcelain/ Polymer insulator R
10.04 Cross sectional view R
10.05 Arrestor and unit name plate A
10.06 Corona & Grading rings R
10.07 Insulating base / surge counter detail R
10.08 Outline drawing of surge counter R
10.09 Circuit diagram of surge counter R
10.10 GA drawing of ZnO element R
10.11 Line terminal bracket with corona rings R
10.12 Drawing showing pressure relief arrangement. R
11.00 BUS POST INSULATOR

11.01 GA drawing & GTP A
12.00 Marshalling Box, Junction Boxes

12.01 GA drawings A
12.02 Schematic drawings A
13.00 CONDUCTOR, AL. TUBE & GS EARTH WIRE

13.01 Type Test Reports (if applicable) A
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-E
14.00 DISC INSULATOR

15.00 LONG ROD POLYMER INSULATOR

16.00 INSULATOR STRING(S) WITH HARDWARE ASSEMBLY

16.02 Component drawings R
17.00 CLAMPS & CONNECTORS

17.01 GA Drawings A
18.00 HORN GAP FUSE

19.00 BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER

19.01 GA drawing & GTP of Battery Bank A
19.02 GA drawing, GTP & Schematic Drawings of Battery Charger A
19.03 Type Test Reports of Battery & Charger A
20.00 ILLUMINATION
20.01 GTP/Catalogue of fittings/fixtures A
20.02 GA drawing of lighting poles/posts A
20.03 GA drawing of Junction box A
20.04 GA drawing of street lighting panel/outdoor/indoor lighting panel A
20.05 GA drawing of Receptacles A
20.06 Schematic drawing of panel/LDBs to fixtures R
21.00 LT SWITCHGEAR
21.01 SLD, GA & Schematic drawings of MSB A
21.02 SLD, GA & Schematic drawings of ACDB A
21.03 SLD, GA & Schematic drawings of 220V DCDB A
21.04 SLD, GA & Schematic drawings of 48V DCDB A
21.05 SLD, GA & Schematic drawings of MLDB A
21.06 SLD, GA & Schematic drawings of ELDB A
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-E
22.00 HT POWER CABLES

22.01 GTP & Catalogue A
23.00 POWER & CONTROL CABLES

23.01 Type Test Reports for control cables A
23.02 Type Test Reports for power cables A
CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS & SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM

24.00
(SAS), VISUAL MONITORING SYSTEM (VMS)
24.01 GTP for all protection relays, Travelling Wave Fault Locator, SAS Equipment A
Type Test Reports of all protection relays , Travelling Wave Fault Locator &
24.02 A/R
SAS IEDs
24.03 GA and schematic drgs. for :-
a) Relay and protection panels for all type of line(s) A
Relay and protection panels for all type transformer(s) including tertiary
b) A
loading
Relay and protection panels for bus/line reactor(s) (switchable & non-
c) A
switchable as applicable)
d) Relay and protection panels for tie bay(s) A
e) Relay and protection panels for TBC bay(s) A
f) Relay and protection panels for BC bay(s) A
g) Relay and protection panels for Bus Sectionaliser bay(s) A
h) Busbar protection panel (s) A
i) Breaker relay panel(s) A
j) Interface panel A
24.04 SAS Architecture A
24.05 Relay Settings A
24.06 GTP/Catalogue of VMS equipment A/R
24.07 GTP/Catalogue of Camera A/R
24.08 VMS architecture drawing A
24.09 Technical Literature and O&M manuals R
25.00 PLCC EQUIPMENTS

25.01 GTP/Drawings for PLCC Carrier Equipment A/R
25.02 GTP/Drawings for Wave traps A
25.03 GTP/Drawings Coupling device A
25.04 Digital/ Analog Protection coupler A
25.05 SNR calculation (if applicable) R
25.06 GTP/Drawing of HF cable A
25.07 Type Test Reports of PLCC equipment A
25.08 Testing & maintenance equipments R
25.09 Frequency Planning A
25.10 Technical literature and O&M Manuals R
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-E
26.00 DG SET
26.01 GTP A
26.02 Drawings/manuals A
27.00 AIR CONDITIONING & VENTILATION SYSTEM

27.01 Drawings/GTP/Catalogues A
27.02 A/C sizing calculation A
28.00 LT TRANSFORMER
28.01 GTP A
28.02 Drawings A
29.00 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

29.01 Fire Fighting Annunciation & control panels A
29.02 GA and Schematic for LCP for deluge valve operation A
29.03 Hydraulic calculations for HVW spray network R
29.04 Drawing for deluge valve housing A
29.05 GTP & drawings for strainers (Y type & basket strainer) A
29.06 Drawing of valve pit details A
29.07 System write-up with various settings A
GTP & drawing for gate valve, check valve, solenoid valve, outdoor hydrant
29.08 A
valve
29.09 GTP & catalogue for deluge valve, spray nozzles & projectors A
29.10 GTP & catalogue for quatrzoid bulb detector A
29.11 GTP & drawing for pressure switch, pressure gauge A
29.12 GTP for G.I. & M.S. pipes & pipe accessories A
29.13 Any other drawing/document required for completion of work A/R
CONTROL ROOM BUILDING / TRANSIT CAMP /FFPH BUILDING/

30.00 SWITCHAYRD PANEL ROOM/INDOOR HT SWITCHGEAR A
ROOM/TOWNSHIP BUILDINGS (AS applicable)
30.01 Architectural drawing
a) Plan, section & elevation
b) Doors & windows schedule
30.02 Building design calculation (if applicable)
30.03 Civil Construction design/drawings
31.00 DRAWING FOR GIS BUILDING (If applicable) A

31.01 Architectural drawing
a) Plan, section & elevation
b) Doors & windows schedule
31.02 GIS building superstructure drawings & design calculation
31.03 Civil Construction design/drawings
____________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-E

31.04 GIS Equipment foundation inside GIS building
32.00 Switchyard Civil Construction Drawings (as applicable) A

a) Tower Foundation
b) Equipment Foundation
c) Transformer foundation
d) Reactor foundation
e) Road construction including culverts, rail cum road
f) Switchyard fencing & Gate
g) Cable trench section
h) Drain section
i) Rain harvesting
j) Boundary wall
k) DG set foundation
l) LT transformer foundation
m) Car Parking Shed/Security Room
n) Outdoor GIB foundation
o) Outdoor Sf6/Air bushing foundation
p) BMK/ Lighting pole foundation
q) Fire Wall
r) Drawing of contour levels
s) Drawing of Formation levels
t) Soil Investigation Report
u) Any other foundation inside switchyard
DESIGN, FABRICATION & PROTO CORRECTED DRAWINGS OF ALL

33.00 A/R
TYPES OF TOWERS & BEAMS
DESIGN, FABRICATION DRAWINGS FOR EQUIPMENT SUPPORT

34.00 A/R
STRUCTURES
35.00 MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL DRGS A/R
LEGEND:- A – for Approval; R- for Record
NOTES:-
1. In case any additional drawings/documents are required, the same shall also be
submitted during execution of the contract.
2. In case, some drawings as mentioned in the above list are not applicable for the
scope of work, the same shall not be referred to.
____________________________________________________________________________
Annexure- F
Assessment report from Contractor for proposed sub-vendor along with following
enclosures (to the extent available):
1. Registration / License of the works

2. Organization chart with name and qualification of key persons
3. List of Plant and Machinery.
4. List of testing equipment with their calibration status.
5. List of Raw material, bought out items with sourcing details
6. List of out-sourced services with sourcing details.
7. List of supply in last three years.
8. Third party approval, if any (viz. ISO, BIS),
9. Pollution clearance wherever applicable
10. Energy Conservation & Efficiency report
(Applicable to industries having contract load more than 100 KVA)
11. Formats for RM, in process and acceptance testing
12. Type test approvals conducted in last 5 years, if applicable
13. Performance Certificates from customers
14. Photographs of factory, plant and machinery & testing facilities
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 1 (Annexure-F)
Annexure-G
MQP & INSPECTION LEVEL REQUIREMENT
Sl. Item / Equipment Requirement of Inspection

No. MQP/ITP/FAT Level
1A Transformer /Reactor Yes IV
1B Circuit Breakers Yes IV
2 Current transformer Yes IV
3 Capacitive voltage transformers/Potential Yes IV
transformer
4 Isolators Yes IV
5 Lightening Arrestors Yes III
6 Line Trap Yes III
7 Control & Relay Panels Yes III
8 Power Cables Yes III
9 Control Cables Yes III
10 LT Switchgear & ACDB/DCDB/MLDB/ELDB/ Yes III
Lighting Panels
11 Fire protection system
11-A Panels, Deluge valve, Hydro pneumatic tank. No III
11-B Strainers, extinguishers, MS/GI pipes, Pumps, No II
motors, air compressor, and other valves,
Diesel Engines
11-C Others No I
12 Insulator (Disc, Long Rod, Solid Core) Yes IV
13 Conductor Yes IV
14 Clamps & Connecters (including equipment Yes III
connectors)
15 Junction Box / Lighting Switch Boards / Bay No II
MB/Telecom Equipment Cabinet
16 Cable lugs No I
17 Lighting Fixtures ,Lamps & fans No I
18 Switches No I
19 Conduits No I
20 Lighting Poles No II
21 MS/GI /PVC Pipes for cable trenches and No I
lighting
22 Hume Pipes No I
23 Galvanized Cable trays No II
24 MS/ GI Flat and earthing material No II
25 MS Round for Earthmat (40mm dia) No I
26 Lighting Earthwire No I
27 Aluminium Tube & Busbar materials No II
28 Outdoor Receptacle No I
29 Nut / Bolts / Spring Washers (Gr 5.6/5) No II
30 LT Transformer Yes III
31 Battery No II
32 Battery Charger Yes III
__________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 3 (Annexure-G)
Annexure-G

33 D. G. Set No II
34 Split A.C/window A.C. No I
35 Substation Automation system No III
36 Telephone wires No I
37 Telephone sockets No I
38 Aluminium ladder No I
39 Occupancy sensors for control of lighting No I
40 Sub Station Structure (lattice/pipe type) Yes III
41 HG fuse No II
42 PLCC equipment Viz PLCC Terminal ,Carrier Yes III
equipment, Protection Coupler , Coupling
Device but excluding EPAX / HF Cable/ SDH
Equipment
43 HF Cable / GPS Clock No I
44 EPAX No I
45 Cable Glands / Joints /Clamps/ Termination No I
46 Video Monitoring System No II
47 Controller for switching No IV
48 Solar based street lighting pole including solar No III
panel as per technical specification
49 Event Logger No III
50 Lighting transformers Yes II
51 String Hardware Yes IV
52 Test Equipment No I*
53 GS Earthwire Yes IV
54 Oil Storage Tank Yes III
55 Insulating Oil No III
56 Flow sensitive conservator isolation valve No II **
57 On-Line insulating oil drying system No II **
58 On line DGA & Moisture Analyzer No II **
59 WAMS-(PMU & Accessories) Yes III
60 FO Cable Yes III
61 Re-rollers of MS/HT Angle Section and Yes IV
galvanized tower parts.
62 Hardware fittings & Earthwire Accessories Yes IV
63 OPGW & H/W Yes III
64 Bolts & Nuts Gr up to 5.6/5 Yes II
65 Bolts & Nuts of Gr 8.8 / 8 Yes IV
66 D-shackle/ Hanger / Links Yes IV
67 Danger Plate /Phase Plate / Number Plate / No I
Circuit plate
68 Pipe Type & Counter Poise Earthing No II
69 Spring Washer No II
70 ACD & Barbed wire for ACD/Bird guard No II
__________________________________________________________________________
Annexure-G

71 Span Marker & Obstruction Light No III
72 GIS including spares Yes IV
73 GIS Bus Duct Yes IV
74 GIS Bushing Yes IV
75 SF6 Gas processing Unit No II
76 Partial Discharge Monitoring System No II
77 STATCOM including Valve, valve base Yes IV
electronics, DC capacitor, series reactor and all
accessories
78 Mechanically switched Reactor bank (3-ph) Yes IV
including all accessories (MSR Branches)
80 Mechanically switched Capacitor bank (3-ph) Yes IV
including all accessories (MSC Branches)
81 Pass Harmonic filters Yes IV
82 Valve cooling system Yes III
FODP including pigtail No II
Radio link Telecom Yes III
Hardware Fittings for Fibre Optic approach Yes III
cable
SDH Equipments (ADM), PDH, Primary Yes IV
Multiplexer
Drop & Insert Multiplexer Yes IV
DACS Yes IV
Main Distribution Frame No I
HDPE Pipe No II
NMS, TMN Yes IV
Synchronization Equipment No Level-I
93 HT Capacitor Yes IV
94 PLC Capacitor Yes III
95 48V DCPS Yes III
96 Nitrogen Injection system Yes III
97 Foundation/Anchor bolts Yes III
98 EOT crane/Lift No II
99 Optical Signal Column No II
100 Maintenance Platform No II
101 Spark Gap Yes III
102 Thyristor Valve Yes III
103 DC current & voltage measuring device ITP III
104 Furniture No I
Note:
* MICC for test and measuring equipment shall be issued only after actual
verification/demonstration of satisfactory performance at site.
** Though level-2 items, CIP can be issued also on review of TCs and visual
inspection of these items.
__________________________________________________________________________
ANNEXURE-H
RTV Silicone high voltage insulation coating (HVIC)
1.0 General
The scope of work shall include supply, delivery and application of RTV silicone high
voltage insulation coating for Substations at coastal area.
a) The supplied virgin RTV coating material shall have sufficient margin before expiry
of its shelf life (Date of manufacturing shall not be older than two months from
date of delivery). Application of RTV coating material on the equipment after
expiry of its shelf life will not be permitted.
b) All the required materials, tools and tackles, testing equipment, consumables etc.
for application of HVIC coating shall be in the contractor’s scope.
c) Surface preparation: All insulation surfaces of the equipment to be coated shall be
made free from dust, grease, oil and any other foreign material without damaging
the surface. The surface of the equipment shall be made dry before application of
the RTV coating.
d) Preparation/mixing of the virgin RTV coating materials shall be done strictly as per
recommendations of the original manufacturer only.
e) The application of the properly prepared /mixed virgin RTV coating materials shall
be done by certified applicants of original manufacturer only.
f) The coating shall cover complete insulation surface of the equipment.
g) Coated insulation surface of the equipment after full cure shall be smooth and free
from any defect viz. scratches, uneven surface etc.
h) Following tests are to be carried out by the contractor after full care of coatings.
(i) Hydrophobic test on 1-2 coated equipment as per STRI guidelines and the
results shall be HC2 class or better.
(ii) BDV testing of fully cured coating in the lab.
(iii) Bonding/adherence test at site: The sample coated insulator shall be put in
water and boiled for 02 hours and removed. The coating shall not exhibit
water blisters at the interface between the insulator surface and the coating.
(iv) High pressure water withstand test at site: A high pressure water wash test
shall be performed on sample coated insulator. The RTV coating shall
withstand the pressure without any damage to it.
(v) Thickness measurement of RTV coating at site: Test shall be performed on

each of the equipment coated to confirm the thickness of the coating on the
respective equipment.
i) Any other item which is not specifically mentioned above but are required for
successful completion of the work shall be in this scope of work.
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 2 (Annexure-H)
ANNEXURE-H
RTV Silicone high voltage insulation coating (HVIC)
2.0 Technical Requirements
a) RTV Silicon compound in its liquid form
Material Properties Requirement

Material Type One part RTV
Appearance Paint
Filler type ATH, Quartz or both
Color Gray
Substrate Application Temperature Range °C -4°C to 121°C
Tack free at 25°C and 50% RH 30 minutes
b) Properties of RTV Silicon compound after cured
Parameters Requirement
Application Area Glass, Porcelain, station insulators,

as well as bushing, instrument
transformers and related devices
Full cure time Max. 24 hours
Recommended coating thickness 500 microns+ 10%, dry film
Dielectric Strength, (ASTM D 149) > 25 kV/mm
Volume Resistivity, ohm.cm (ASTM D257) 9.0*10^14
Tracking wheel withstand, hours 5000 Hours
Min. Salinity Level withstood during “Artificial >160 kg/m^3
Pollution Test using Salt Fog Method”
Hydrophobic Recovery Test (REC specification To H1 or H2
76/2006)
Method of Application Airless Spray
Arc resistance 420 sec or better (As per ASTM D
495 – 99 (Reapproved 2004))
Tracking resistance 1A 4.5 or better (As per IEC 60587,
i.e. 5 specimen shall survive tracking
Primer Required NO primer material shall be allowed
Resistant to Marine salt fog, Water, Industrial

(cement dust, fly ash, acid emission
etc.), Rough Weather Conditions
Other Properties Non Hazardous to environment,
surface after full cure shall be
smooth
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 2 of 2 (Annexure-H)
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT’S (Section- Project)
C/ENGG/SPEC/SEC-PROJECT/SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT REV NO 02
Employer has standardized its Specific Requirement for various equipments and works for different voltage levels.
Items or clauses, which are not applicable for the scope of this package as per schedule of quantities described in BPS
or as per scope defined elsewhere in Section Project, the technical specification/clauses for the items specified below
should not be referred to.
S.No. Model Section & Amended As

Clause No.
1. Section GTR Technical Requirements of Equipment’s
Rev 14
Following equipment shall be offered from the Indian manufacturing facilities meeting
Para 1 at the technical requirements as stipulated below, provided that the same equipment are not
Clause No.24 covered under the Bidder’s Qualifying requirement of the Bidding Documents.
2. Section GTR Technical Requirement of Communication Equipment
Rev 14
The SDH equipment shall be offered from a manufacturer(s) who is a “Local Supplier” as
per DPIIT PP notification & has been Manufacturing SDH equipments for the last three
Clause No. (3) years and SDH equipment Manufactured by such manufacturer(s) shall have been
satisfactory operation in 110kV or higher voltage Power Substations for at least two (2)
24.19
years as on the date of NOA.
3. Section GTR Technical Requirement of Sub-contractor for 765kV & 400kV GIS packages:
Rev 14
In case of Indian GIS manufacturer, the erection, testing & commissioning including civil
New works shall be executed either by the bidder himself or by the Subcontractor meeting the
Clause No. following technical requirement:
24.21
The bidder/Subcontractor must have erected, tested and commissioned at least two (2)
nos. GIS/AIS Circuit breaker equipped bays of 345kV or above voltage level in one (1)
substation or switchyard during the last seven (7) years and these bays must be in
satisfactory operation# as on the date of NOA.
Further, the sub-contractor shall also meet the requirement specified at Clause No.
4. Section GTR Technical Requirement of Sub-contractor for 220/132/66 kV* level GIS/Hybrid
Rev 14 GIS/MTS packages:
New In case of Indian GIS manufacturer, the erection, testing & commissioning including civil
works shall be executed either by the bidder himself or by the Subcontractor meeting the
Clause No.
following technical requirement:
24.22
The bidder/Subcontractor must have erected, tested and commissioned at least two (2)
nos. GIS/Hybrid GIS/MTS/AIS Circuit breaker equipped bays@ of 220/110/66kV* or
above voltage level in one (1) substation or switchyard during the last seven (7) years and
these bays must be in satisfactory operation# as on the date of NOA.
Further, the sub-contractor shall also meet the requirement specified at Clause No.
Note:
1. (*) voltage class of respective equipment as applicable
Page 1 of 22
2. (@) For the purpose of technical requirement, one no. of circuit breaker bay shall
be considered as a bay used for controlling a line or a transformer or a reactor or a
bus section or a bus coupler and comprising of at least one circuit breaker, one
disconnector and three nos. of single phase CTs / Bushing CTs. GIS means SF6
Gas insulated Switchgear, Hybrid GIS means outdoor SF6 Gas insulated
switchgear connected to outdoor Air insulated bus-bar System (AIS bus-bars
System), MTS means outdoor SF6 Gas insulated Mixed Technology Switchgear
connected to outdoor AIS bus bar system.
3. Combination of GIS CB bay, Hybrid GIS CB Bay & MTS CB Bay is also acceptable
5. Section GTR Technical Requirement of Sub-contractor:
Rev 14
1. The sub-contractor must have either of the following experience of having
New successfully completed similar works during last 7 years as on the last day of
Clause No. month previous to the one in which the sub-contractor is proposed to be engaged:
24.23
a) Three similar works costing not less than the amount equal to 40% of the
cost of the work to be sub-contracted.
OR
b) Two similar works costing not less than the amount equal to 50% of the cost
of the work to be sub-contracted.
OR
c) One similar work costing not less than the amount equal to 80% of the cost
of the work to be sub-contracted.
2. Minimum Average Annual Turnover **(MAAT) for best three years i.e. 36
months out of last five financial years of the sub-contractor should be……….:
**Annual Gross Revenue from operations/ Gross operating income as

incorporated in the profit & loss account excluding Other Income.
Note:
a) Similar work shall mean the work which are of similar in nature to the
work to be sub-contracted e.g. for the scope of civil work to be sub-
contracted, the experience should be of civil work.
b) The aforesaid qualifying requirement shall however, not be applicable for

engaging labour as per extant policy.
c) The cost of the work to be sub-contracted shall be considered as available

in the Contract Agreement. However, if the value is not available in the
Contract Agreement, the same shall be the estimated value for such work.
d) The above criteria is in addition to extant policy on selection of sub-

contractor as per WPPP, Vol-II.
Page 2 of 22
e) The MAAT requirement shall be worked out basis the following

formula:
Minimum = Cost of the work to be sub-

Average Annual contractedx1.5/Completion period in
Turnover years**
(MAAT)
**The completion period shall be considered as 1 year even if the same is

less than 1 year.
6. Section GTR Technical Requirement for 400kV GIS Equipment

Rev 14
(i) The manufacturer whose 400kV GIS bays are offered must have designed,
New manufactured, type tested** (as per IEC or equivalent standard), supplied
Clause No. and supervised erection & commissioning of at least two (2) nos. Gas
Insulated Switchgear (GIS) circuit breaker bays@ of 345kV or above voltage
24.24
class in one (1) Substation or Switchyard during the last seven (7) years and
these bays must be in satisfactory operation# for at least two (2) years as on
the date of NOA.

a) Atleast one no. 345kV or above voltage class GIS Circuit Breaker bay@ must have
been manufactured in the above Indian works based on the technological support
of the Collaborator(s) and either supplied or type tested the above CB bay (as per
IEC or equivalent standard) as on the date of NOA.
b) The collaborator(s) meets the requirements stipulated in (i) above. A valid

collaboration agreement for technology transfer / license to design, manufacture,
test and supply 400kV or above voltage level GIS equipment in India, shall be
submitted.
c) The Collaborator(s) shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10 % of

the ex-works cost of such equipment(s) and this performance guarantee shall be
in addition to Contract Performance Guarantee to be submitted by the bidder.
Note :-
(**) Type test reports of the collaborator/ parent company/ subsidiary company/ group
company shall also be acceptable.
Page 3 of 22
7. Section GTR Rev Technical Requirement for 220/132/66 kV* level GIS/Hybrid GIS/MTS Equipment:
14
New (i) The manufacturer whose 220/132/66 kV* level GIS/Hybrid GIS/MTS bays
are offered must have designed, manufactured, type tested** (as per IEC or
Clause No. 24.25
equivalent standard), supplied and supervised erection & commissioning of
at least two (2) nos. Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS)/Hybrid GIS/MTS
circuit breaker bays@ of 220/110/66kV* or above voltage class in one (1)
Substation or Switchyard during the last seven (7) years and these bays
must be in satisfactory operation# for at least two (2) years as on the date of
NOA.

a) Atleast one no. 220/110/66kV* or above voltage class GIS/Hybrid GIS/MTS

Circuit Breaker bay@ must have been manufactured in the above Indian works
based on the technological support of the Collaborator(s) and either supplied or
type tested the above CB bay (as per IEC or equivalent standard) as on the date
of NOA.
b) The collaborator(s) meets the requirements stipulated in (i) above. A valid

manufacture, test and supply 220/110/66*kV or above voltage level
GIS/Hybrid GIS/MTS equipment in India, shall be submitted.
c) The Collaborator(s) shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10 %

of the ex-works cost of such equipment(s) and this performance guarantee shall
be in addition to Contract Performance Guarantee to be submitted by the
bidder.
Note:
1. (*) voltage class of respective equipment as applicable
2. (@) For the purpose of technical requirement, one no. of circuit breaker bay
shall be considered as a bay used for controlling a line or a transformer or a
reactor or a bus section or a bus coupler and comprising of at least one circuit
breaker, one disconnector and three nos. of single phase CTs / Bushing CTs.
GIS means SF6 Gas insulated Switchgear, Hybrid GIS means outdoor SF6 Gas
insulated switchgear connected to outdoor Air insulated bus-bar System (AIS
bus-bars System), MTS means outdoor SF6 Gas insulated Mixed Technology
Switchgear connected to outdoor AIS bus bar system.
3. Combination of GIS CB bay, Hybrid GIS CB Bay & MTS CB Bay is also
acceptable
4. (**) Type test reports of the collaborator/ parent company/ subsidiary

company/ group company shall also be acceptable.
Page 4 of 22
8. Section GTR Rev Technical Requirement for 765kV class Transformer

14
(i) The Manufacturer whose 765kV Transformer(s) are offered must have
designed, manufactured, tested & supplied 715 kV or higher voltage class
Clause No. 24.2 one (1) number 1-phase Transformer of at least 500 MVA capacity or at least
three (3) numbers 1-phase Transformers each having a capacity of at least
166 MVA, and the same transformer (s) should have been in satisfactory
operation# for atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.

d) 715 kV or higher voltage class either One (1) no. 1-phase Transformer of at least
166 MVA capacity or One (1) no. 1-phase Reactor of at least 80 MVAR capacity
must have been manufactured in the above Indian works based on technological
support of collaborator, type tested (as per IEC/IS standard) and same should
have been supplied as on the date of NOA.
e) The collaborator meets the requirements stipulated in (i) above. A valid

manufacture, test and supply 765kV transformer in India, shall be submitted.
f) the collaborator shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of

in addition to contract performance guarantee to be submitted by the contractor.
9. Section GTR Rev Technical Requirement for 765kV class Reactor

14
(i) The Manufacturer whose 765kV Reactor(s) are offered must have designed,
manufactured, tested & supplied 715 kV or higher voltage class one (1)
Clause No. 24.3 number 1-phase Reactor of at least 110 MVAR capacity or at least three (3)
numbers 1-phase Reactors each having a capacity of at least 36.7 MVAR
and the same Reactor(s) should have been in satisfactory operation# for
atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.
OR
The Manufacturer must have designed, manufactured, tested & supplied

715 kV or higher voltage class one (1) number 1-phase Transformer of at
least 500 MVA capacity or at least three (3) numbers 1-phase Transformers
each having a capacity of at least 166 MVA and the bidder should have
designed, manufactured, tested & supplied 345 kV or higher voltage class
one (1) number 3-phase Reactor of at least 50 MVAR capacity or at least
three (3) numbers 1-phase Reactors each having a capacity of at least 16.7
MVAR and the same Transformer(s) & Reactor(s) should have been in
satisfactory operation# for atleast two (2) years as on the date of NOA.

Page 5 of 22
a) 715 kV or higher voltage class either One (1) no. 1-phase Reactor of at least 80
MVAR capacity or One (1) no. 1-phase Transformer of at least 166 MVA
capacity must have been manufactured in the above Indian works based on
technological support of collaborator, type tested (as per IEC/IS standard) and
same should have been supplied as on the date of NOA.

manufacture, test and supply 765kV Reactor in India, shall be submitted.
c) the collaborator shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of

in addition to contract performance guarantee to be submitted by the contractor.
10. Section GTR Rev
Technical Requirement for 1.1 KV Grade PVC Control Cable
14
The manufacturer(s), whose PVC control cables are offered, must have designed,
Clause No. 24.9 manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 100 Kms of 1.1kV grade
PVC insulated control cables as on date of NOA. Further the manufacturer must also
have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied atleast 1 km of 27C x 2.5 Sq.mm or
higher size as on the date of NOA.
11. Section GTR Rev

Technical Requirement for 1.1 KV Grade PVC Power Cable
14
The manufacturer(s), whose PVC Power Cables are offered, must have designed,
Clause No. 24.10 manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 100 Kms of 1.1kV or
higher grade PVC insulated power cables as on the date of NOA. Further the
12. Section GTR Rev

Technical Requirement for 1.1 KV Grade XLPE Power Cables
14
The manufacturer(s), whose XLPE Power cables are offered, must have designed,
Clause No. 24.11 manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 25 Kms of 1.1 KV or
higher grade XLPE insulated power cables as on the date of NOA. Further the
13. Section GTR Rev Tests witnessed by agencies certified by National Accreditation Board for Certification
14 Bodies (NABCB) shall also be acceptable.
New para added

under
Clause No. 9.2
14. Section GTR Rev Annexure-A stand replaced by Annexure-A (Rev 1)

14
Annexure-A
15. Section GTR Rev “The seismic withstanding test on the complete equipment (for 400kV and above) shall
14 be carried out along with supporting structure. Seismic Withstand Test carried out
using either lattice or pipe structure is acceptable.”
Page 6 of 22
Para-1 at Annexure-
B
16. Section GTR Rev Band colour is required for Emulsifier system detection line only if both water and air
14 detection lines are present at the same substation. Further, band colour shall be applied
at an interval of 2 meters approx. along the length and minimum width of band shall be
New para added 25mm.
under Clause no.
12.3.6
17. Section GTR Rev Pickup value of binary input modules of Intelligent Electronic Devices, Digital
14 protection couplers, Analog protection couplers shall not be less than 50% of the
specified rated station auxiliary DC supply voltage level.
New Clause no.
15.2
18. Section GTR In case, different designs of lattice and pipe structures other than Employer supplied
Rev 14 structures are required to be adopted in view of higher creepage (31mm/kV) of the
switchgear/equipments, insulator strings, bushings & bus post insulators etc., Design,
New Clause No. supply & erection of such structures shall be in the scope of contractor against
16.3 respective standard structure. However dimensional details (except height) shall not be
less than that specified in standard structure drawing of respective equipments.
19. Section GTR RTV coating shall be done at site on all porcelain insulators including mandatory spares
Rev 14 (i.e. bushings, hollow and solid insulators, disc insulators etc.) for substation(s) in
coastal area as defined elsewhere. The cost of RTV coating shall be deemed to be
Clause No. 22.9 included in the respective equipment/items’ erection cost. The technical details of RTV
coating is attached in Annexure-H (Rev 1).
20. Section GTR Erection, testing and commissioning of Transformers, Reactors, Circuit breakers,
Rev 14 Isolators, Substation automation system, Control & protection panels, PLCC, PMU,
Telecommunication Equipments, etc. shall be done by the contractor under the
New Clause No. supervision of respective equipment manufacturers. Charges for the above supervision
13.14 shall be included by the bidder in the erection charges for the respective equipment in
the BPS.
21. Section Switchgear- Outer insulator of surge arrester shall be porcelain/polymer conforming to
SA Rev 11 requirements stipulated in Section-GTR. Terminal connectors shall conform to
requirements stipulated under Section-GTR.
Clause No. 3.0 (e)
The outer insulator housing shall be so coordinated that external flashover will not
occur due to application of any impulse or switching surge voltage upto the maximum
design value for arrester.
22. Section Switchgear- Technical Parameters for 765kV, 400kV, 220kV and 132kV Surge Arresters (with
SA Rev 11 Polymer/Porcelain Housing)
Annexure-l
Table 1.0
23. Section Switchgear- CTs must have adequate provision for taking oil samples from the bottom of the CT
INST Rev 11 without exposure to atmosphere. Manufacturer shall recommend the frequency at
which oil samples should be taken and norms for various gases in oil after being in
Clause No. 9.2 operation for different durations. Manufacturer should also indicate the total quantity of
Page 7 of 22
Para 3 & 4 oil which can be withdrawn from CT for gas analysis before refilling or further
treatment of CT becomes necessary.
Manufacturer/Contractor shall supply 2 nos. of oil sampling device for every 20 nos. of
oil filled CT supplied with a minimum of 2 nos. of oil sampling device for each
substation.
24. Section Switchgear- Voltage Transformers
INST Rev 11
a) Insulation Resistance test for primary (if applicable) and secondary winding
Clause No. 9.3 b) Polarity test
c) Ratio test
d) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable)
e) Tan delta and capacitance measurement of individual capacitor stacks
f) Secondary winding resistance measurement
g) DGA of oil (for IVT/PT)
Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA) shall be carried out twice within the first year of service,
first within the first month of commissioning/charging and second between six months
to one year from the date of commissioning/charging.
IVTs/PTs must have adequate provision for taking oil samples from the bottom of the
IVT/PT without exposure to atmosphere. Manufacturer shall recommend the frequency
at which oil samples should be taken and norms for various gases in oil after being in
operation for different durations. Manufacturer should also indicate the total quantity of
oil which can be withdrawn from IVT/PT for gas analysis before refilling or further
treatment of IVT becomes necessary.
Manufacturer/Contractor shall supply 2 nos. of oil sampling device for every 20 nos. of
oil filled IVT/PT supplied with a minimum of 2 nos. of oil sampling device for each
substation.
25. Section Switchgear- Defect Liability

INST Rev 11
The actions required to be taken by contractor in case of defects observed in
Clause No. 10.0
CT/CVT/IVT/PT of ratings 145kV & above during the warranty period (defect liability
period) shall be as per enclosed Annexure-V (Revised) of this specification. Further, the
replaced/repaired/refurbished equipment (or part of equipment) shall have Two (2)
years warranty without prejudice to contractual warranty period (defect liability
period).
26. Section Switchgear The CSD shall be provided in Circuit breaker of switchable line reactor bay and in Main
– CB Rev 11 & Tie bay circuit breakers of Transformers (required for 765/400kV transformers only),
line with non-switchable line reactors and Bus reactors. The CSD shall be supplied as
Clause no. 2.6
per bid price schedules.
Para 2
27. Section Switchgear For Circuit breaker with CSD controlling a Transformer following is applicable
– CB Rev 11
“The limit for inrush current for switching of Transformer by CSD shall be 1.0 p.u. of
New Clause no. rated current of transformer after fine tuning of CSD settings during pre-commissioning
2.6.1(n) checks. For site acceptance of CSD, during online CSD test after fine tuning inrush
current should be less than 1.0 P.U. of rated current in five consecutive operations”.
Page 8 of 22
28. Section Separate cables shall be used for AC, DC-I, DC-II and selected DC. Each control cable
Switchgear – CB shall include minimum 10% spare cores (subject to minimum 1 no. of spare core).
Rev 11
Clause No. 11.4

29. Section Requirement of Plug-In type connector for Inter-pole cabling is deleted
Switchgear – CB
Rev 11
Clause No. 11.5

30. Section Vertical run of cables to the operating mechanism box shall be properly supported by
Switchgear – CB providing the perforated closed type galvanized cable tray (Cable tray also to be
Rev 11 supplied along with the Circuit Breaker) to be fixed as an integral part of the structures.
The load of the cable shall not be transferred to the mechanism box/terminal
arrangement in any circumstances. Hanging or loose run of cable is not permitted. The
Clause No. 11.6 drawing of cable tray including fixing arrangement shall be incorporated in the GA
drawing of CB also.
31. Section GIS Rev 5A The CSD shall be provided in 765kV/400kV Circuit breakers for controlling
transformers (required for 765/400kV transformers only) and reactors (ie for breakers of
Clause no. switchable line reactor and in Main& Tie circuit breakers of Transformers, Transmission
6.8.2 lines with non-switchable line reactors and Bus reactors). The requirement of CSD shall
be explicitly specified in price schedule
32. Section GIS Rev 5A For 400kV & above voltage class GIS bay module, CT cores shall be duly distributed on
both side of circuit breaker. For 220 kV and below voltage level GIS bay module, CT on
New Clause no. one side of the circuit breaker is also acceptable.
10.1.3(n)
33. Section GIS Rev 5A During detailed engineering, the type test reports of GIS equipment of the parent
company/subsidiary company/group company shall also be acceptable provided that
New Para added the design of offered GIS is same as that of type tested GIS equipment.
under Clause no.20
34. Section GIS Rev 5A All 765kV & 400kV Circuit Breaker control schematics shall be finalized in such a way,
that it may operate with or without CSD by using a suitable selector switch irrespective
New Clause no. of whether circuit breakers to be supplied are envisaged along with CSD or not as per
15.2.14 bid price schedules.
35. Section GIS Rev 5A The price of Bus-duct inside the GIS hall shall be integral part of the respective bay
module and it will not be paid separately. However, the payment of bus-duct for
New Clause no. outside the GIS hall along with support structure shall be paid as per running meters in
5.41(10) line with provision of Bid Price schedule.
36. Section Air Annexure S3 – Air Conditioning & Ventilation System for GIS Building
Conditioner
Rev 04
New
Annexure-S3
37. Section CRP Rev 09 Back-up Impedance protection function shall be provided for 765kV & 400kV sides of
765/400/33kV ICT and for 400kV side of 400kV class ICT. This protection function and
New Clause No. Differential Protection function shall not be combined in the same IED.
21.8
Page 9 of 22
38. Section CRP Rev 09 Line Differential relays used as both Main –I & Main-II protection of a line, shall be of
either different make & model or shall be on different hardware platform.
New para added
under Clause
no.18.8
39. Section CRP Rev 09 Requirement of Shrouding shall not be applicable to TB’s where live parts are concealed.
New Para added

under Clause
No.5.1
40. Section PLCC Rev All protection couplers (Analog protection coupler, digital protection coupler) shall be
05 equipped with direct reading type counter facility for all the codes (Tx & Rx).
New Clause no.

10.4.13
41. Section PLCC Rev Digital protection coupler (DPC) shall be used as one of the two tele-protection channel
05 on the lines between the stations having Optical Fiber link alongwith SDH Equipment.
Specification of digital protection coupler is enclosed as Annexure-S2. The DPC can be
New Clause no.10.5 housed either in offered Control & Protection Panel / PLCC Panel or in separate panel.
Generally SDH Equipment are placed in communication room of Control room where as
DPC is placed in panel room. The connection between SDH equipment and each DPC
shall be through Optical fiber. Necessary converter(s) for converting E1 signal to optical
fiber at both ends (at Panel Room as well as at Control room) along with FODP shall be
in the scope of the contractor. Further sharing of additional spare ports of converter for
DPC placed in other Panel Room or in same Panel Room is also permitted. Necessary
optical fiber for interconnection of DPC is to be provided by the contractor. Further any
copper wiring for ensuring the protection signaling/data/speech shall be in the scope of
the contractor.
42. Section PLCC Rev For 765 kV Wave Trap, cantilever strength of BPIs used for Wave Trap shall be 10 kN.
05
New Clause No.

6.12.4
43. Section: Power & The cable sizes specified at clause no. 1.1.4 of Section-Power & Control Cables Rev-6 are
Control Cable Rev minimum required. In case, more nos. of runs or larger sizes of cables are required
06 between two points based on design calculations, same shall deemed to be included in
the scope of bidder.
New Para added
under Clause 1.1.4
44. Section: Power & Standard lengths for each size of power and control cables shall be 500/1000 meters.
Control Cable Rev However, to avoid cable wastage and cable jointing at site, non-standard lengths of each
06 size of Power & Control cable may also be acceptable subject to maximum length of
1000meters (+ 5% tolerance)
Clause No. 4.2
45. Section Fire Appendix-I (Rev 4) stand replaced by following Appendix-I (Rev 5)
Protection Rev 06
Appendix-I
Page 10 of 22
46. Section: Fire Deleted

Protection Rev 06
Clause No.9.01.00(c)
&
Appendix-V
47. Section Fire Fire detection and alarm system shall also be provided in the GIS Hall using beam type
Protection Rev 06 smoke detectors to be installed at suitable mounting height, and in the Relay Panel room
with ionization/optical type smoke detectors to be installed on the ceiling.
New para added at
Clause no.2.03.00
48. Section Fire Adequate no. of Hydrant posts and Fire extinguishers (CO2 and DCP type) shall also be
Protection Rev 06 provided for GIS Building.
New Clause
no.2.01.02
49. Section Fire Mechanical foam type fire extinguishers wherever specified as 50 litre capacity,
Protection Rev 06 conforming to IS:13386, shall be read as 60 litre capacity conforming to IS 16018
Clause No. 2.04.02 Further in case of non-availability of any type of fire extinguisher (i.e. water, CO2, DPC,
& 10.00.00 foam type) of a particular size as specified in BPS or technical specification, next
available higher size conforming to IS shall be supplied.
50. Section Fire Alternatively, bidder may offer Nitrogen Injection based fire prevention & extinguishing
Protection Rev 06 system for transformer/reactor instead of HVW Spray System. Nitrogen Injection Fire
Prevention & Extinguishing system shall be as per Appendix – VII.
New Clause No.
2.02.06
51. Section DG Set Rev Alternatively, AMF Panel for DG Set may be installed outside the acoustic enclosure
05 near the DG Set. In such cases, AMF panel with or without additional enclosure shall
New para added meet IP-55 degree of protection.
under Clause no.
7.1(a)
52. Section: Lighting All Outdoor Lighting Panels shall be Stainless sheet steel of Grade 304 and shall be dust,
System Rev 07 weather and vermin proof. Panels shall be of thickness not less than 1.5 mm smoothly
finished, leveled and free from flaws. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever necessary.
Clause no. 6.2.1(ii)
Alternatively, outdoor lighting panels of Aluminum shall also be acceptable as per
provisions stipulated in Section GTR.
53. Section: Lighting The outdoor junction boxes shall be complete with conduit knockouts/threaded nuts
System Rev 07 and provided with terminal strips. The junction boxes shall be suitable for termination
of Cable glands of required size. The junction boxes shall be provided with 4 way
Clause no. knockouts suitable for street lighting/switchyard lighting terminals suitable for 2
6.6(i) (b) numbers 4C x 16 Sq.mm Al. cable or as per requirement. All Outdoor Junction boxes
shall be of Stainless Steel of thickness 1.5mm of grade 304. Outdoor Junction Boxes shall
be suitable for mounting on columns, structures etc for Outdoor Lighting. The outdoor
Junction shall have IP 55 protection. Alternatively, outdoor junction boxes of
Aluminum shall also be acceptable as per provisions stipulated in Section GTR.
54. Section: LT Contractor shall submit type test reports for the Lighting transformers as per IS:2026 for
Switchgear Rev 05 which test conducted once are acceptable (i.e. The requirement of test conducted within
Clause no. 1.21.2 last ten years shall not be applicable)
Page 11 of 22
55. Section LT MCCB shall in general conform to IS: 13947 Part-2. All MCCB offered shall have Ics =
Switchgear Rev 05 100% Icu rating.
Clause no. 1.6.1
56. Section: Structure POWERGRID will issue the fabrication drawings of the standard structures to the
Rev 06 successful bidder. The contractor shall do the proto assembly of the structures as per the
issued fabricated drawings. Employer may opt to witness such proto assembly. The
New Clause No. bidder shall follow the fabrication drawing for preparing the proto assembly and do the
3.2.4 Added minor adjustments if necessary, without affecting the strength of the structure. In case of
equipment support structure the attachment of stool and fixing of MOM box etc. shall be
taken care by the contractor as per the requirement of the equipment. The contractor
however shall not submit the proto corrected drawings and BOM for approval of the
employer. The arrangement shall however not absolve the contractor from the
responsibility of supply and erection of safe sound and durable structure.
57. Section: Structure Nuts, Bolts and washers for all non standard structures shall be payable as per BPS.
Rev 06
New
Clause no. 3.4
58. Section Civil The dewatering pump shall be Portable, Self Priming, Non clog, horizontal type
Works Rev 11A monobloc pump. The Pump shall be driven by electric motor suitable for outdoor
application with IP-55 degree of protection. Following are the major technical
New parameters for the pumps to be supplied as per BPS:
Clause No. 21.0
(A) Pump Rating : 2 HP
Flow Rate : 200-400 LPM
Minimum Total Head : 12 Mtrs
Voltage Range : 415 ± 10% Volts (Three Phase)
(B) Pump Rating : 5 HP

Flow Rate : 1000-1400 LPM
Minimum Total Head : 10 Mtrs
Voltage Range : 415 ± 10% Volts (Three Phase)
59. Section Switchyard

Erection Rev 10 S.No Item Size Material
j) Isolator MOM 50X6 mm GS flat Galvanise
Clause No. 9.4(j)
Box & Flexible copper steel and
braid copper
braid
60. Section: Switchyard Neutral formation for Transformer(s), DELTA formation and making connection
Erection arrangement to connect spare unit in place of any unit of the bank without physical
Rev 10 shifting and Earthing Arrangement :
New For Spare Unit connection to form 3-ph bank of 765kV Class Transformers with isolator
Clause no. 20.1 based switching arrangement without physical shifting of spare unit along with
necessary Neutral Formation, Earthing Arrangement & Tertiary (DELTA) formation for
3-ph bank formation with 1-ph units shall be under present scope as per the details
Page 12 of 22
mentioned below:
i. Neutral Formation including Neutral auxiliary bus and Earthing Arrangement
The contractor shall connect the neutrals of three (3) 1-phase transformers by overhead
connection using 3" IPS Al tube. The neutral formation shall be such that neutral
winding of single-phase spare transformer can be disconnected or connected to the
three phase banks. The connection from the neutral bushing to neutral bus shall be
through 3" IPS Al tube and wherever flexible jumper needs to be provided, same shall
be through twin conductor. All material like Bus post insulator, Aluminium tube,
conductor, clamps & connectors, earthing materials, support structure, hardware etc.
required for neutral formation and connection with neutral CT and earthing of neutral
shall be provided by contractor.
ii. Tertiary Delta Formation including Tertiary auxiliary bus(Insulation level 52

kV) .
The contractor shall connect 33kV tertiary of single-phase auto-transformers in DELTA
configuration by overhead connection to operate in 3-Ph Bank. The Delta shall be
formed by 3" IPS Al tube, which shall be insulated with heat shrinkage insulating
sleeve of at least 52kV class and shall be supported by structure mounted bus post
insulators at suitable intervals. Jumpers (twin conductors) wherever provided shall
also be insulated using suitable insulation tape or sleeve at least 52kV class at site. The
minimum phase to phase horizontal spacing for delta formation shall be 1.5meter. All
associated materials like bus post insulators, Aluminium tube, conductor, clamps &
connectors, support structures, hardware, earthing materials etc. required for tertiary
delta formation shall be provided by the contractor.
iii. HV & IV Auxiliary Buses (Applicable for AIS Substation)

Formation of HV & IV auxiliary buses for connection of transformer 3-Phase bank
with 1-Phase Spare transformer unit is under the present scope of the bidder. All
associated materials like Bus post insulators, Aluminium tube, conductors, clamps &
connectors, insulator strings, hardware, earthing materials, support structures,
required for the above-mentioned arrangement shall be provided by the contractor.
61. Section: Switchyard Neutral formation for Reactor banks, connection to neutral grounding reactor through
Erection 132kV Surge arrester, connection to ground through neutral CTs and connection
Rev 10 arrangement to connect spare reactor unit in place of any other units of the bank
without physical shifting and Earthing Arrangement :
New
Clause no. 20.2 For Spare Unit connection to 3-ph bank of 765kV Class Reactors with isolator based
switching arrangement without physical shifting of spare unit along with necessary
Neutral Formation, Earthing Arrangement for 3-ph bank formation with 1-ph units shall
be under present scope as per the details mentioned below:
i. Neutral Formation including Neutral auxiliary bus and Earthing Arrangement
The contractor shall connect the neutrals of three (3) 1-phase reactors by overhead
connection using 3" IPS Al tube. The neutral formation shall be such that neutral
winding of single-phase spare reactor can be disconnected or connected to the three
phase banks. Neutral Connections of spare unit shall be extended upto the other unit(s)
Page 13 of 22
by forming Neutral auxiliary bus. The connection from the neutral bushing to neutral
bus shall be through 3" IPS Al tube and wherever flexible jumper needs to be provided,
same shall be through twin conductor. All material like Bus post insulator, Aluminum
tube, conductor, clamps & connectors, earthing materials, support structure, hardware
etc. required for neutral formation and connection with neutral CT and earthing of
neutral shall be provided by contractor. Required Insulation level is 145 kV from
individual reactor neutral to point of neutral formation. However after neutral
formation, the insulation level is 36kV.
Connection of each Line reactor bank formed under present scope to Neutral grounding
reactor through 132kV Surge Arrester including NGR by passing arrangement is also
under present scope.
ii.HV Auxiliary Bus (Applicable for AIS Substation)
Formation of HV auxiliary bus for connection of reactor 3-Phase bank with 1-Phase
Spare reactor unit is under the present scope of the bidder. All associated materials like
Bus post insulators, Aluminium tube, conductors, clamps & connectors, insulator
strings, hardware, earthing materials, support structures, required for the above-
mentioned arrangement shall be provided by the contractor.
62. Section: Switchyard Supply & Laying of Power, Control Cables & Special Cables (if any) (including all
Erection cabling works for spare unit of transformer/reactor ) along with accessories for power
Rev 10 supply, alarm, trip, control & indication, status and monitoring signals & contacts made
available at MB/CMB of Transformers/Reactors upto Control & Relay Panels and BCUs
New located in the Switchyard Panel Room/Control Room and successful integration of same
Clause no. 20.3 with Station Control, Protection & SAS System is in the scope of the contractor.
63. Section: Switchyard 3½Cx300 Sq. mm XLPE power cable for oil filtration units of reactors & transformers
Erection Rev 10 shall be provided. The cable shall be terminated at 250A receptacle near Reactor &
Transformer in the switchyard. XLPE Power cables shall be looped in & out for 250A
New Power receptacles.
Clause no. 20.4
64. Section: Switchyard Neutral of spare transformer/reactor is to be connected to station grounding system
Erection Rev 10 through a jumper/copper flat. This shall be applicable for single phase
transformer/reactor wherever spare unit have been provided.
New
Clause no. 20.5
65. Section: Switchyard Tertiary connections made for tertiary loading of LT Transformer shall be insulated
Erection Rev 10 using suitable insulation tape or sleeve of at least 52kV class at site
New
Clause no. 20.6
66. Section Switchyard Transmission line side insulator string along with hardware for line termination shall be
Erection Rev 10 in the scope of substation contractor.
New Clause No. 2.5
Page 14 of 22
67. Section Switchyard Connection arrangement of 765kV equipment’s shall be done

Erection Rev 10 as per the conceptual drawing (Drawing No. C/ENGG/SS/CONCEPTUAL 765KV BAY
CONNECTION, Rev-0) enclosed as Annexure-S1of this Section-Project.
New Clause No. 21
68. Section Switchyard For connection to HV bushing of LT Transformer, insulated copper rod/strip of at least
Erection Rev 10 75 sq.mm cross sectional area shall be used.
New Clause No. 22
69. Section: Auto- Deleted

transformer
Rev-07
Clause no. 10.14

70. Section: Auto- If Tan delta of OIP bushing goes beyond 0.005 or increase is more than 0.001 within the
transformer warrantee period w.r.t. pre-commissioning values, the contractor shall arrange to
Rev-07 replace the defective bushing by new one. No temperature correction factor shall be
applicable for tan delta.
Clause no. 10.15 Tan δ value of RIP (Resin Impregnated Polymer) condenser bushing shall be 0.005
(max.) in the temperature range of 20°C to 90°C. The measured Tan δ value at site
should not exceed by 0.001 w.r.t. factory results (measured at approx. similar
temperature conditions) during warrantee period.
71. Section: Auto- Canopy arrangement shall be provided for Pressure Relief Device, Sudden Pressure
transformer Rev-07 Relay and Buchholz Relay to prevent ingress of rain water.
New Clause no.

18.00 (cc)
72. Section: Auto- 04 nos. of Gate valves (minimum size 50NB) for UHF sensors for PD Measurements at
transformer Rev-07 various locations. Location of valves shall be finalized during design review.
New Clause no.

6.1.5(f)
73. Section: Auto- Fixing of cooler bank support shall be provided through Anchor Fastener with chemical
transformer Rev-07 grouting and no pockets for bolting shall be provided.
New Para added Further, metallic support structure (for cooler pipe supports, Buchholz pipe (if required)
under Clause No. shall be fixed directly in the pit through Anchor Fastener with chemical grouting.
6.4 Further, these support structures shall be encased with concrete to prevent rusting. No
foundation block for these support structures are envisaged.
Specific area shall not be provided for jacking pad in the foundation as jacking shall be
done by laying temporary metal plates size 400 mm x 400 mm x 32 mm (min) thick. One
set of metal plates for jacking of Transformer shall be provided by manufacturer.
Page 15 of 22
74. Section: Auto- Manufacturer may also offer Gas to Liquid (GTL) based insulating oil. The technical
transformer Rev-07 parameters of this oil shall be finalized during detailed engineering.
New Para added

under Clause no.
8.0
75. Section: Auto- On-line insulating oil drying system (Cartridge type) (if specified in BPS) as per
transformer Rev-07 Annexure-L
Clause No. 18.v
76. Section: Auto- 16 numbers optical temperature sensors shall be fitted on each unit. The optical sensors
transformer Rev-07 measuring system shall be of direct measurement non-calibrating type. All the sensors
shall be brought out to separate optical sensor box or in Individual Marshalling Box
Clause No. 6.14 mounted on transformer tank to facilitate measurement of temperature during service
life on each unit.
Location of optical temperature sensors inside the transformer shall be decided during
design review. The installation and commissioning at site shall be done under the
supervision of OEM representative or OEM certified representative.
Supply of temperature measuring unit is not required. However, manufacturer shall
keep one unit in their works as a part of testing equipment for measurement of
temperature through sensor during factory testing.
77. Section: Auto- Suitable provision (valves, etc.) shall be provided for installation of Nitrogen Injection
transformer Rev-07 Fire Protection System in transformer.
New Clause no.

6.1.5(g)
78. Section: Auto- When the flow from conservator to main tank is more than the normal operating
transformer Rev-07 conditions, the valve shall shut off by itself and will have to be reset manually. It shall be
provided with valve open/close position indicator along with alarm contact indication
Clause no. 13.4.8(c) in control room during closing operation of valve. This valve shall be provided with
locking arrangement for normal position and oil filling / filtration position. Glass
window for visual inspection similar to Buchholz glass inspection window shall be
provided for physical checking of status of valve. It shall have IP 67 class degree of
protection. A suitable platform or ladder (if required) shall be provided to approach the
valve for manual reset.
79. Section: Auto- Deleted
transformer Rev-07
Annexure –B, Test

Plan Sr. No. 17
Annexure – C Test
Procedures Sr. No.5
80. Section: 765kV Deleted
Shunt Reactor Rev-
07
Clause No.11.14
Page 16 of 22
81. Section: 765kV If Tan delta of OIP bushing goes beyond 0.005 or increase is more than 0.001 within the
Shunt Reactor Rev- warrantee period w.r.t. pre-commissioning values, the contractor shall arrange to
07 replace the defective bushing by new one. No temperature correction factor shall be
applicable for tan delta.
Clause No.11.15
Tan δ value of RIP (Resin Impregnated Polymer) condenser bushing shall be 0.005
(max.) in the temperature range of 20°C to 90°C. The measured Tan δ value at site
should not exceed by 0.001 w.r.t. factory results (measured at approx. similar
82. Section: 765kV 04 nos. of Gate valves (minimum size 50NB) for UHF sensors for PD Measurements at
Shunt Reactor Rev- various locations. Location of valves shall be finalized during design review.
07
Clause No.7.1.5 (d)

83. Section: 765kV Cooler bank shall be tank mounted. Further, specific area shall not be provided for
Shunt Reactor Rev- jacking pad in the foundation as jacking shall be done by laying temporary metal plates
07 size 400 mm x 400 mm x 32 mm (min) thick. One set of metal plates for jacking of reactor
New Para added shall be provided by the manufacturer.
under Clause No.
7.4
84. Section: 765kV Annexure-I stands replaced as Annexure-I (Rev 1)
Shunt Reactor Rev-
07
Annexure-I
85. Section: 765kV Manufacturer may also offer Gas to Liquid (GTL) based insulating oil. The technical
Shunt Reactor Rev- parameters of this oil shall be finalized during detailed engineering.
07
New para added

under Clause No.9
86. Section: 765kV 8 numbers optical temperature sensors shall be fitted on each unit. The optical sensors
Shunt Reactor Rev- measuring system shall be of direct measurement non-calibrating type. All the sensors
07 shall be brought out to separate optical sensor box or in Individual Marshalling Box
mounted on reactor tank or ground mounted to facilitate measurement of temperature
Clause No.7.14 during service life on each unit.
Location of optical temperature sensors inside the reactor shall be decided during design
review. The installation and commissioning at site shall be done under the supervision
of OEM representative or OEM certified representative.

87. Section: 765kV Suitable provision (valves, etc.) shall be provided for installation of Nitrogen Injection
Shunt Reactor Rev- Fire Protection System in reactor.
07
New Clause
No.7.1.5 (f)
88. Section: 765kV When the flow from conservator to main tank is more than the normal operating
Shunt Reactor Rev- conditions, the valve shall shut off by itself and will have to be reset manually. It shall be
Page 17 of 22
07 provided with valve open/close position indicator along with alarm contact indication
in control room during closing operation of valve. This valve shall be provided with
Clause No.14.8 (c) provided for physical checking of status of valve. It shall have IP 67 class degree of
89. Section: 765kV Frequency Response analysis
Shunt Reactor Rev-
07 The test shall be performed on each phase of the Reactor by taking open circuit response
of complete winding as HV to neutral terminal and vice versa. The response shall be
Annexure – C compared with other units of same design for reference.
Test Procedures
Sr. No.14
90. Section : Deleted

Transformer
(Upto 400kV Class)
Rev 11
Clause no.10.13
91. Section : Tan δ value of RIP (Resin Impregnated Polymer) condenser bushing shall be 0.005
Transformer (max.) in the temperature range of 20°C to 90°C. The measured Tan δ value at site
(Upto 400kV Class) should not exceed by 0.001 w.r.t. factory results (measured at approx. similar
Rev 11 temperature conditions) during warrantee period.
Clause no.10.14
92. Section : 04 nos. of Gate valves (minimum size 50NB) for UHF sensors for PD Measurements
Transformer (applicable for 400kV Transformer only) at various locations. Location of valves shall be
(Upto 400kV Class) finalized during design review.
Rev 11
Clause No.6.1.5 (d)

93. Section : Fixing of cooler support for 400kV class transformer shall be provided through Anchor
Transformer Fastener with chemical grouting and no pockets for bolting shall be provided.
(Upto 400kV Class)
Rev 11 Further, metallic support structure (for cooler pipe supports, Buchholz pipe (if required)
shall be fixed directly in the pit through Anchor Fastener with chemical grouting.
New para added Further, these support structures shall be encased with concrete to prevent rusting. No
under Clause foundation block for these support structures are envisaged.
No.6.4
94. Section : Manufacturer may also offer Gas to Liquid (GTL) based insulating oil. The technical
Transformer parameters of this oil shall be finalized during detailed engineering.
(Upto 400kV Class)
Rev 11
New para added

under Clause No.8
Page 18 of 22
95. Section : For 400 kV Class Auto transformer:

Transformer
(Upto 400kV Class) i. Bidder / Manufacturer should have successfully carried out Dynamic Short
Rev 11 Circuit test on 315MVA or above rating 400/220/33kV, 3-Phase Auto transformer
as on the originally scheduled date of bid opening and shall enclose the relevant
Clause No.3.13.1 Test Report/certificate along with bid. In case bidder/manufacturer has not
successfully tested 315MVA or above rating 400/220/33kV, 3-Phase Auto
transformer for Dynamic Short Circuit test, their bid shall be considered
technically non responsive. Further, design review of offered 400kV Class Auto
transformer shall be carried out based on the design of short circuit tested
315MVA or above rating 400/220/33kV, 3-Phase Auto transformer.
ii. Following Loss parameters of 315 MVA, 400/220/33kV 3-Phase Auto

Transformer are added to 2.20 of Annexure A of Technical Specification: Section -
Transformer (Upto 400kV Class) Rev-11
Sr. No. Maximum Permissible Losses

Losses of 315 MVA, 400kV
Transformer
i) Max. No Load Loss at rated 75 kW

voltage and frequency
ii) Max. Load Loss at rated 440 kW

current and at 75O C
iii) Max. Auxiliary Loss at rated 10 kW

voltage and frequency
Note:
Transformer manufacturer who have already short circuit tested 315MVA or above
rating 400kV class transformer shall offer the 315MVA Transformer meeting the above
specified losses for which design review shall be carried out based on earlier short
circuit tested transformer design.
96. Section : z. On line insulating oil drying system(if specified in BPS) as per Annexure-M
Transformer
(Upto 400kV Class) aa. Online Dissolved Gas (Multi-gas) and Moisture Measuring Equipment (if
Rev 11 specified in BPS) as per Annexure-K
Clause No.21
Z, aa, bb, dd
bb. On line dissolved Hydrogen and Moisture Measuring Equipment (if specified in
BPS) as per Annexure-L
dd. Deleted
Page 19 of 22
97. Section : Optical temperature sensors shall be fitted on each Transformer unit. 16 number probes
Transformer for 3-ph unit and 8 number probes for 1-ph unit shall be provided. The optical sensors
(Upto 400kV Class) measuring system shall be of direct measurement non-calibrating type. All the sensors
Rev 11 shall be brought out to separate optical sensor box or in Individual Marshalling Box
mounted on transformer tank to facilitate measurement of temperature during service
Clause No.6.14 life on each unit.
Location of optical temperature sensors inside the transformer shall be decided during
design review. The installation and commissioning at site shall be done under the
supervision of OEM representative or OEM certified representative.

98. Section : Suitable provision (valves, etc.) shall be provided for installation of Nitrogen Injection
Transformer Fire Protection System in transformer.
(Upto 400kV Class)
Rev 11
New Clause
No.6.1.5(f)
99. Section : When the flow from conservator to main tank is more than the normal operating
Transformer conditions, the valve shall shut off by itself and will have to be reset manually. It shall be
(Upto 400kV Class) provided with valve open/close position indicator along with alarm contact indication
Rev 11 in control room during closing operation of valve. This valve shall be provided with
Clause No.13.7.8(c) window for visual inspection similar to Buchholz glass inspection window shall be
100. Section : Deleted

Transformer
(Upto 400kV Class)
Rev 11
Annexure –B, Test

Plan Sr. No. 18
Annexure – C Test
Procedures, Sr.No.5
101. Section : Upto Deleted
400kV Shunt
Reactor Rev 10
Clause no. 11.13
Page 20 of 22
102. Section : Upto Tan δ value of RIP (Resin Impregnated Polymer) condenser bushing shall be 0.005
400kV Shunt (max.) in the temperature range of 20°C to 90°C. The measured Tan δ value at site
Reactor Rev 10 should not exceed by 0.001 w.r.t. factory results (measured at approx. similar
Clause no. 11.14
103. Section : Upto 04 nos. of Gate valves (minimum size 50NB) for UHF sensors for PD Measurements
400kV Shunt (applicable for 420kV Reactor only) at various locations. Location of valves shall be
Reactor Rev 10 finalized during design review.
Clause No.7.1.5 (d)

104. Section : Upto For 400kV Reactors, cooler bank shall be tank mounted.
400kV Shunt
Reactor Rev 10 Further, reactor Manufacturers to ensure that roller mounting pad at the bottom of the
tank shall be removed for better contact of reactor bottom plate to plinth. Roller to be
New Para added mounted directly with tank bottom.
under Clause
No.7.4 Specific area shall not be provided for jacking pad in the foundation as jacking shall be
done by laying temporary metal plates size 400 mm x 400 mm x 32 mm (min) thick. One
set of metal plates for jacking of reactor shall be provided.
105. Section : Upto Manufacturer may also offer Gas to Liquid (GTL) based insulating oil. The technical
400kV Shunt parameters of this oil shall be finalized during detailed engineering.
Reactor Rev 10
New para added

under Clause No.9
106. Section : Upto 8 numbers optical temperature sensors shall be fitted on each unit. The optical sensors
400kV Shunt measuring system shall be of direct measurement non-calibrating type. All the sensors
Reactor Rev 10 shall be brought out to separate optical sensor box or in Individual Marshalling Box
mounted on reactor tank or ground mounted to facilitate measurement of temperature
Clause No.7.14 during service life on each unit.
Location of optical temperature sensors inside the reactor shall be decided during design
review. The installation and commissioning at site shall be done under the supervision
of OEM representative or OEM certified representative.

107. Section : Upto Suitable provision (valves, etc.) shall be provided for installation of Nitrogen Injection
400kV Shunt Fire Protection System in reactor.
Reactor Rev 10
New Clause
No.7.1.5 (f)
108. Section : Upto Deleted
400kV Shunt
Reactor Rev 10
Clause No.22.1.
(xxix)
Page 21 of 22
109. Section : Upto When the flow from conservator to main tank is more than the normal operating
400kV Shunt conditions, the valve shall shut off by itself and will have to be reset manually. It shall be
Reactor Rev 10 provided with valve open/close position indicator along with alarm contact indication
in control room during closing operation of valve. This valve shall be provided with
Clause No.14.8 (c) locking arrangement for normal position and oil filling / filtration position. Glass
110. Section : Upto Frequency Response analysis
400kV Shunt
Reactor Rev 10 The test shall be performed on each phase of the Reactor by taking open circuit response
of complete winding as HV to neutral terminal and vice versa. The response shall be
Annexure – C Test compared with other units of same design for reference.
Procedures,
Sr.No.14
Page 22 of 22
Annexure-S2
SPECIFICATION FOR DIGITIAL PROTECTION COUPLER
1.0 Digital protection coupler for protection signalling through optical fibre cable
system.
1.1 The Digital protection signalling equipment is required to transfer the trip commands from
one end of the line to the other end in the shortest possible time with adequate security
and dependability. It shall also monitor the healthiness of the link from one end to the
other and give alarms in case of any abnormality. The protection signalling equipment
shall have a proven operating record in similar application over EHV systems and shall
operate on 48V DC (+10%, -10%). It shall provide minimum four commands. These
commands shall be suitable for Direct tripping, Intertripping and Blocking protection
schemes of EHV lines.
The protection signalling equipment shall communicate to the remote end interfacing
with SDH terminal equipment at its 2Mbps port. It shall provide suitable interfaces for
protective relays, which operate at 220/110V DC. Power supply points shall be immune
to electromagnetic interface.
1.2 Principle of operation
During normal operation, protection signalling equipment shall transmit a guard

signal/code. In case Protection signalling equipment is actuated by protective relays for
transmission of commands, it shall interrupt the guard signal/code and shall transmit the
command code to the remote end. The receiver shall recognize the command code and
absence of the guard code and will generate the command to the protective relays.
All signal processing i.e. generation of tripping signal and the evaluation of the signals
being received shall be performed completely digital using Digital Signal Processing
techniques.
1.3 Loop testing
An automatic loop testing routine shall check the teleprotection channel.
It shall also be possible to initiate a loop test manually at any station by pressing a button
on the front of the equipment.
Internal test routine shall continuously monitor the availability of the protection signaling
equipment.
-1-
Proper tripping signal shall always take the priority over the test procedure.
The high speed digital protection signalling equipment shall be designed and provided
with following features.
● Shall work in conjunction with SDH terminal equipment.

● It shall communicate on G 703 (E1,2 Mbps)
● Full Duplex operation
● Auto loop facility shall be provided
● Shall meet IEC 60834-1 standard
● Shall be able to transmit upto 4 commands with trip counter simultaneously
or sequentially in one 2Mbps channel
Bidder shall quote for protection signalling equipment suitable for 4 commands with
separate trip counters for transmit and receive. With regard to trip counters alternate
arrangement .i.e. Laptop along with software & all accessories to download events
including carrier receipt and transmit shall be acceptable. Laptop for the above shall be
supplied at each substation under substation package.
High security and dependability shall be ensured by the manufacturer. Probability of

false tripping and failure to trip shall be minimum. Statistical curves/figures indicating
above mentioned measures shall be submitted along with the bid.
The DPC can be either housed in offered Control & Protection Panel / PLCC Panel or in
separate panel.
Reports of the following tests as per clause 9.2 of Chapter 2-GTR shall be submitted for
approval for protection signalling equipment and relays associated with the protection
signalling equipment and interface unit with protective relay units, if any.
i) General equipment interface tests :
a) Insulated voltage withstand tests

b) Damped oscillatory waves disturbance test
c) Fast transient bursts disturbance test
d) Electrostatic discharge disturbance test
e) Radiated electromagnetic field test
f) RF disturbance emission test
ii) Specific power supply tests
a) Power supply variations

b) Interruptions
-2-
c) LF disturbance emission
d) Reverse polarity
iii) Tele-protection system performance tests

a) Security
b) Dependability
c) Jitter
d) Recovery time
e) Transmission time
f) Alarm functions
g) Temperature and Humidity tests (As per IEC 68-2)
- Dry heat test (50°C for 8 hours)
- Low temperature test (-5°C for 8 hours)
- Damp heat test (40°C/95%RH for 8 hours)
All the above tests at i, ii & iii (except temperature & humidity tests) shall be as per IEC
60834-1 and the standards mentioned therein.
iv) Relays
a) Impulse voltage withstand test as per IEC 60255.
b) High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255.
The protection signalling equipment shall be of modular construction and preferably

mounted in the Relay panels. Cabling between the protection signalling equipment &
Protection relays and between protection signalling equipment & Communication
equipment shall be in the scope of bidder.
The input/output interface to the protection equipment shall be achieved by means of

relays and the input/output rack wiring shall be carefully segregated from other
shelf/cubicle wiring.
The isolation requirements of the protection interface shall be for 2kV rms.
1.4 Major technical Particulars
The major technical particulars of protection signalling equipment shall be as follows.

i) Power supply 48V DC +10%, -10%
ii) Number of commands 4 (four)
iii) Operating time <7 ms
iv) Back to back operate time without propagation delay ≤ 8 ms
-3-
v) Interface to Protection relays
Input: Contact Rating:
Rated voltage : 250 volts DC
Maximum current rating: 5 amps
Output: Contact Rating:
Rated current : 0.1 A DC
Other parameters : As per IEC-255-0-20
vi) Alarm contact
Rated current : 0.1 A DC
Other parameters : As per IEC-255-0-20
vii) Digital communication interface: G 703(E1)
-4-
Annexure-S3
AIR CONDITIONING & VENTILATION SYSTEM FOR GIS BUILDING
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FOR GIS

1 GENERAL
1.1 This specification covers supply, installation, testing and commissioning

and handing over to POWERGRID of Air conditioning system for the
Local Control rooms & Maintenance Room in the GIS halls.
1.2 Air conditioning system shall be designed to maintain the inside DBT
below 24oC. Bidder shall submit necessary design calculations for
employer’s approval.
1.3 At least 50% spare Air-Conditioning capacity shall be provided for Local
Control rooms in the GIS halls.
1.4 Controllers shall be provided in Local Control room inside GIS hall for
controlling and monitoring the AC units in these rooms as detailed in
clause no.2.6
1.5 Each Local Control room inside GIS hall shall be provided with
temperature transducer to monitor the temperature of the Local Control
rooms in the GIS halls. The Temperature transducer shall have the
following specification:
Sensor : Air temperature sensor (indoor use)

Output : 4 to 20mA
Temperature range : -5oC to 60oC
Resolution : 0.1oC
Accuracy : 0.5oC or better.
2 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.
2.1 Air conditioning requirement of the buildings shall be met using a

combination of following types Air Conditioning units as required.
a) Cassette type split AC units of 3TR.

b) High wall type split AC units of 2TR.
2.2 Type & Capacity of air conditioners shall be so chosen such that quantity
of air conditioners in the room is optimized keeping the necessary air
flow.
2.3 Scope
The scope of the equipment to be furnished and services to be provided

under the contract are outlined hereinafter and the same is to be read in
Page 1 of 4
Annexure-S3
conjunction with the provision contained in other sections/ clauses. The

scope of the work under the contract shall be deemed to include all such
items, which although are not specifically mentioned in the bid documents
and/or in Bidder's proposal, but are required to make the
equipment/system complete for its safe, efficient, reliable and trouble free
operation.
2.3.1 Required number of Cassette type split AC units of 3TR capacity each
complete with air cooled outdoor condensing unit having hermetically
sealed compressor unit with cordless remote controller.
2.3.2 Required number of High wall type split AC units of 2TR capacity each
complete with air cooled outdoor condensing unit having hermetically
sealed compressor and high wall type indoor evaporator unit with cordless
remote controller.
2.3.3 Copper refrigerant piping complete with insulation between the indoor and
outdoor units as required.
2.3.4 First charge of refrigerant and oil shall be supplied with the unit.
2.3.5 GSS/Aluminium sheet air distribution ducting for distributing conditioned

dehumidified air along with supply air diffusers and return air grilles with
volume control dampers and necessary splitters etc., suitable fixtures for
grilles/diffusers and supports for ducting complete with insulation.
2.3.6 Local start/stop facility for local starting/ stopping of all electrical
equipment/ drives.
2.3.7 All instruments and local control panels alongwith controls and interlock
arrangements and accessories as required for safe and trouble free
operation of the units.
2.3.8 PVC drain piping from the indoor units upto the nearest drain point.
2.3.9 Supply and erection of Power and control cable and earthing.
2.3.10 MS Brackets for outdoor condensing units, condensers as required.
2.4 Technical specifications.
2.4.1 Cassette type split AC units.

The Cassette type AC units shall be complete with indoor evaporator unit,
outdoor condensing units and cordless remote control units.
Page 2 of 4
Annexure-S3
2.4.1.1 Outdoor unit shall comprise of hermetically/ semi hermetically sealed

compressors mounted on vibration isolators, fans and copper tube
aluminium finned coils all assembled in a sheet metal casing. The casing
and the total unit shall be properly treated and shall be weatherproof type.
They shall be compact in size and shall have horizontal discharge of air.
2.4.1.2 Indoor units shall be of 4-way, ceiling mounted cassette type. The indoor
unit shall be compact and shall have elegant appearance. They shall have
low noise centrifugal blowers driven by suitable motors and copper tube
aluminium finned cooling coils. Removable and washable polypropylene
filters shall be provided. They shall be complete with multi function
cordless remote control unit with special features like programmable
timer, sleep mode etc.
2.4.1.3 Cooling capacity of 3TR AC units shall not be less than 36000btu/hr. and
shall have energy efficiency rating of 5 star as on the date of NOA.
2.4.2 High wall type split AC units
2.4.2.1 The split AC units shall be complete with indoor evaporator unit, outdoor
condensing units and cordless remote control units.
2.4.2.2 Outdoor unit shall comprise of hermetically/semi hermetically sealed

compressors mounted on vibration isolators, propeller type axial flow fans
and copper tube aluminium finned coils all assembled in a sheet metal
casing. The casing and the total unit shall be properly treated and shall be
weatherproof type. They shall be compact in size and shall have horizontal
discharge of air.
2.4.2.3 The indoor units shall be high wall type. The indoor unit shall be compact
and shall have elegant appearance. They shall have low noise centrifugal
blowers driven by suitable motors and copper tube aluminium finned
cooling coils. Removable and washable polypropylene filters shall be
provided. They shall be complete with multi function cordless remote
control unit with special features like programmable timer, sleep mode
and soft dry mode etc.
2.4.2.4 Cooling capacity of 2TR AC & 3 TR AC units shall not be less than
22000btu/hr. and shall have energy efficiency rating of 5 star as on the
date of NOA.
2.5 The Split AC units shall be of Carrier, Voltas, Blue Star, Hitachi, Daikin,
LG, National, O’General, or Samsung make.
Page 3 of 4
Annexure-S3
2.6 Controllers shall be provided in Local Control room inside GIS hall, one
controller for each room, to control and monitoring of AC units and shall
have the following facilities;
 Standby units shall come in to operation automatically when the

running main unit fails
 Main and standby units shall be changed over periodically which shall
be finalised during detailed engineering.
 Following alarms shall be provided:
a. Compressor On/OFF condition of each unit

b. Compressor failure of each unit
c. Power OFF to AC unit
d. High temperature in room.
2.7 Warranty
All compressors shall have minimum 5 years Warranty from the date of
commissioning.
Ventilation system for GIS Hall
Each GIS Hall shall have an independent ventilation system. Each Ventilation
system shall consist of two 100% capacity systems, one operating and one stand-by.
To ensure that the air being supplied to the GIS hall is free from dust particles, a
minimum two stage dust filtration process shall be supplied. This shall consist of at
least the following:
1. Pre Filters: To remove dust particles down to 10 micron in size with at least
95% efficiency.
2. Fine Filters: To remove dust particles down to 5 microns in size with at least
99% efficiency.
All the filters shall be panel type. Easy access should be available to the filters for
replacement/cleaning.
The ventilation of the GIS hall shall be of a positive pressure type with minimum 2
air changes per hour. The pressure inside the GIS hall shall be maintained 5 mm of
water above the atmospheric pressure. Fresh outdoor air shall be filtered before
being blown into the GIS hall by the air fans to avoid dust accumulation on
components present in the GIS hall. GIS hall shall be provided with motorized
exhaust dampers with local control.
Page 4 of 4
ANNEXURE-A
1. General
Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment, shall be tested for external corona (for
400kV & above) both by observing the voltage level for the extinction of visible corona
under falling power frequency voltage and by measurement of radio interference
voltage (RIV) for 132kV and above.
2. Test Levels:
3.2 Alternatively, RIV tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant IEC of
respective equipment or NEMA standard Publication No. 107-2016.
3.4 Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure that
there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest ambient
noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be measured at
increasing and decreasing voltages of 85%, 100%, and 110% of the specified RIV test
voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The specified RIV test voltage for
765kV, 400 kV, 220 KV, 132kV is listed in the detailed specification together with
maximum permissible RIV level in microvolts.
3.5 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent device
so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.
3.6 The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration procedure of the
frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall establish the ratio of voltage at the
high voltage terminal to voltage read by noise meter.
4. Test Methods for Visible Corona
connectors etc. The test shall be carried out in the same manner as RIV test described
above with the exception that RIV measurements are not required during test and a
search technique shall be used near the onset and extinction voltage, when the test
voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise values. The test voltage shall
be raised to 110% of specified corona extinction voltage and maintained there for five
minutes. In case corona inception does not take place at 110%, test shall be stopped,
otherwise test shall be continued and the voltage will then be decreased slowly until
all visible corona disappears. The procedure shall be repeated at least 3 times with
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 1 of 2 (Annexure-A, Rev01)
C/ENGG/SPEC/GTR (Rev. No.:-14)
ANNEXURE-A
corona inception and extinction voltage recorded each time. The corona extinction
voltage for purposes of determining compliance with the specification shall be the
lowest of the three values at which visible corona (negative or positive polarity)
disappears.
The test to determine the visible corona extinction voltage need not be carried out
However, both test shall be carried out with the same test set up and as little time
between tests will be allowed. Simultaneous RIV and visible corona extinction voltage
testing may be permitted at the discretion of Employer’s inspector if, in his opinion, it
will not prejudice other test.
5. Test Records:
In addition to the information previously mentioned and the requirements specified as
per CISPR or NEMA 107-2016 the following data shall be included in test report:
f) Onset and extinction of visual corona for each of the three tests required shall be
recorded.
____________________________________________________________________________
Technical Specification: GTR Page 2 of 2 (Annexure-A, Rev01)
C/ENGG/SPEC/GTR (Rev. No.:-14)
ANNEXURE – I (Rev 1)
Gapless Surge Arrester – Technical parameters
a. Rated arrester voltage 132 kV
b. Rated system voltage 145 kV
c. Rated system frequency 50Hz
d. System neutral earthing Earthed through NGR
e. Installation Outdoor
f. Nominal discharge current 10kA of 8/20 microsec wave.
g. Class of arrester 20kA heavy duty type
h. Minimum discharge capacity 12 kJ/kV (referred to rated

voltage)
i. Continuous operating voltage at 50øC 106 kV
j. Maximum switching surge residual voltage (1kA) 280kVp
k. Maximum residual voltage at
(i) 10kA 314kVp
(ii) 20kA nominal discharge current 334kVp
l. Long duration discharge class 4
m. High current short duration test value (4/10micro- 100kAp

sec.wave)
n. Current for pressure relief test 40kArms
o. Low current long duration test value (2000microsec.) 1000Apeak
p. Min. total creepage distance 3625 mm.
q. One minute dry power frequency withstand voltage of 275kVrms

arrester housing
r. Impulse withstand voltage of arrester housing with + 550KVp
1.2/50 micro-sec. wave
s. Pressure relief class A
t. RIV at 92 kVrms. Less than 500microvolts
u. Partial discharge at 1.05 continuous over voltage Not more than 50pC
v. Seismic acceleration As specified in section project
w. Reference ambient temperature 50 deg C
Technical Specification, 765kV Shunt Reactor

C/ENGG/MODEL-SPEC/765kV SR Rev. 07
Section: Switchgear-INST (INSRUMENT TRANSFORMER) REV 11
Annexure-V (Revised): Actions required in case of defects observed during warrantee

period
Equipment Nature of problem Corrective measures to be taken

by contractor
CT/IVT/PT DGA Violation Refurbished or replaced
(Oil filled) H2 > 300 ppm
C2H2> 2 ppm
CT/IVT/PT a) SF6 gas leakage a)Repair/ replacement

(SF6 filled) b) High Dew point of SF6 gas ( > -36 deg C at b)Re-processing of gas and
atm press) replacement of Gas in case of no
improvement
CT/IVT/PT Violation of Tan delta Replacement

(Oil filled) Tan Delta:
>0.5%( during pre-commisioning )
>0.7% ( in operation)
or change w.r.t. to previous year value > 0.1%
CT, IVT/PT - Oil leakage Replacement or repair as per repair

& CVT - Low Oil level procedure approved by QA.
-Sec winding problem leading to open/ short
circuit, saturation etc
CVT Secondary voltage drift: Upto ± 0.5 volts Healthy

a) ± 0.5 or beyond a) CVT to be replaced
*Replaced/Repaired/Refurbished Equipment (or part of equipment) shall have 2 years warranty

without prejudice to contractual warranty period.
Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-INST C/ENGG/SPEC/SWGR/R11

Appendix-VII
Nitrogen Injection Type Fire Prevention & Extinguishing System
1.1 Nitrogen Injection Type Fire Protection System (NIFPS) shall be designed to prevent
explosion of transformer/reactor tank and the fire during internal faults/arc.
The system shall work on the principle of Drain & stir. On activation, it shall drain a
pre-determined quantity of oil from the tank top through drain valve to reduce the
tank pressure, isolate conservator tank oil and inject nitrogen gas at high pressure
from the bottom side of the tank through inlet valves to create stirring action and
reduce the temperature of oil below flash point to extinguish the fire. On operation,
the quantity of oil removed from the tank shall be such that adequate amount of oil
shall remain to cover active part (i.e. core coil assembly).
Electrical isolation of transformer shall be an essential pre-condition for activating the

system.
1.2 Operational Controls
The system operation shall be fully automatic and activate from the required fire and
other trip signals. In addition to automatic operation, remote operation from control
room/ remote centre and local manual control in the fire extinguishing cubicle shall
also be provided. System shall operate on following situations:
1.2.1 Prevention of transformer from explosion and fire
To prevent transformer from explosion and fire in case of an internal fault, signals
given by operation of Electrical protection relays (Differential / Restricted earth fault)
and tripping of circuit breaker of transformer and operation of either Buchholz relay
or pressure relief valve (PRV) shall be used to activate the system. The exact logic for
system activation shall be finalized during detailed engineering.
1.2.2 Prevention of transformer from fire
In case of fire, sensed by fire detectors, the system shall be activated only after
electrical isolation of the transformer, confirmed by breaker trip. If the fire detection
is not associated with any other fault, the system activation shall be only manual.
Manual operation switch shall be provided in the control room with a cover to avoid
accidental operation of it.
1.3 Operation of System
On receiving activation signal, the following shall take place:
i) Open the quick opening drain valve to drain the top layer oil
ii) Shut off the conservator isolation valve to prevent flow of oil from the
Conservator tank to the main tank
iii) Open the valve to inject Nitrogen into the transformer tank to create
stirring of oil.
There shall be interlock to prevent activation of the system if the transformer is not
Section: Fire Protection Rev 6
electrically isolated.
There shall also be provision for isolating the system during maintenance and/or
testing of the transformer.
1.4 Technical Particulars
The contractor shall be responsible for the design of the complete system and shall
submit the drawings and design calculations for the number of fire detectors, pipe
sizing of drain pipe and Nitrogen injection pipe, Nitrogen cylinder capacity, number
of injection points, etc. and get approval from POWERGRID.
Facility shall be provided to test the system when the transformer is in service,
without actually draining the oil and injecting Nitrogen.
The Nitrogen regulator valve shall be designed in such a way that the Nitrogen shall
not enter the transformer tank even in case of passing/ leakage of valve.
Owner shall provide two distinct station auxiliary DC feeders for control purposes.
The system shall work on station DC supply with voltage variation defined in GTR
.The control box of fire protection system shall have facility to receive these feeders
for auto changeover of supply. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to further
distribute power to the required locations. In case auxiliary DC power supply
requirement is different than station auxiliary DC supply, then all necessary DC-DC
converters shall be provided by the Contractor.
Following minimum indications and alarms shall be provided in the local cubicle as
well as in the control box:-
 Nitrogen cylinder pressure indication - manometer with sufficient number of

adjustable NO contacts
 Nitrogen cylinder pressure low
 Fire in Transformer/ Reactor
 Oil drain started
 Conservator oil isolation valve closed
 Nitrogen injection started
 DC supply fail
 Oil drain valve closed
 Gas inlet valve closed
1.5 Details of Supply of System Equipments and Other Related Activities:
The scope of supply shall include the following items and any other items required for
safe and trouble free operation of the system.
i) Fire extinguishing cubicle with base frame and containing at least the
following:
 Nitrogen gas cylinder of sufficient capacity with pressure regulator and

manometer with sufficient number of adjustable NO contacts.
 Oil Drain Assembly including oil drain pipe extension of suitable size
for connecting pipes to oil pit
 Mechanical release device for oil drain and nitrogen release
 Limit switches for monitoring of the systems
 Panel lighting
 Flanges on top of the panel for connecting oil drain and nitrogen
injection pipes for transformer
 Back up pressure switch to operate nitrogen gas valve
 Pressure indicators for Nitrogen pressure of the cylinder and actual
injection through Nitrogen regulator
 Fire Extinguishing Cubicle shall have oil leakage detection
arrangement for detecting oil leakage from drain valve. In case of any
oil leakages, alarm to be provided.
 shall have minimum IP55 degree of protection
ii) Control box to be installed in the control room of the station for
monitoring system operation, automatic control and remote operation, with
alarms, indications, switches, push buttons, audio signal, suitable for
tripping and signalling.
iii) Required number of fire detectors to be located in strategic locations to be

finalized during detailed engineering. Fire detectors shall have minimum
IP-67 class degree of protection.
iv) All controls, alarms, panels, cables, cable trays (if required), junction
boxes etc.
v) Flow sensitive conservator Isolation valve to isolate the conservator oil

from the main tank is being provided by the transformer/reactor supplier.
This valve shall be located in the piping between the conservator and the
buchholz relay.
1.6 Under Ground Oil Storage Tank
Each transformer unit shall be provided with an underground oil storage tank. The oil
storage tank shall have Non Corrosive, water proof, epoxy coated (from Inside) mild
steel (minimum thickness 5 mm) to store drained out oil on operation of NIFPS. The
tank shall be painted from outside as per table below:
PAINTING Surface Primer Intermediate Finish coat Total dry Colour

preparation coat undercoat film shade
thick-
ness
(DFT)
Oil storage Shot Blast Epoxy Epoxy high Aliphatic Minimum RAL 7035
tank cleaning Sa 2 base Zinc build polyurethan 155m
½* primer Micaceous e (PU)
(30- iron oxide (Minimum
40m) (HB MIO) 50m)
(75m)
Note: (*) indicates Sa 2 ½ as per Swedish Standard SIS 055900 of ISO 8501 Part-1.
The total capacity of storage tank shall be at least 10% of transformer tank oil to avoid
overflowing of oil considering that drained oil volume shall be around 10% of
transformer tank oil. Necessary arrangement shall be made on underground storage
tank so as to take out the drained oil from the tank for further processing and use. All
the pipe and physical connection from transformer to oil pit shall be in the scope of
contractor.
This storage tank shall be placed in the pit made of brick walls with PCC (1:2:4)
flooring with suitable cover plates to avoid ingress of rain water. The design of tank
and pit shall be finalised during detailed engineering.
1.7 Installation and pre-commissioning test
After installation the system pre-commissioning tests shall be carried out jointly with
the Owner’s representative before the system is put in service.

SECTION-SWITCHYARD ERECTION
पावर ग्रिड कापोरे शन आफ इन्डडया लऱलिटे ड

(भारत सरकार का उद्यम)
Power Grid Corporation of India Limited
(A Government of India Enterprises)
Document No.: C/ENGG/SPEC/SE (Rev.10) April 2016

SECTION- SWITCHYARD ERECTION

REVISION - 10
SECTION-(SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
CONTENTS
Clause No Particulars Page No.

1.0 General 1
2.0 String Insulators & Hardware 1
3.0 AAC/ACSR Conductor 12
4.0 Galvanised Steel Earth Wire 15
5.0 Aluminium Tube 17
6.0 Earthing Conductors 18
7.0 Spacers 19
8.0 Bus Post Insulators 20
9.0 Earthing 23
10.0 Bus Bars 28
11.0 Bay Equipment 28
12.0 Lightning Protection 30
13.0 Equipment Erection Details 30
14.0 Storage 31
15.0 Cabling Material 31
16.0 Directly Buried Cables 33
17.0 Installation Of Cables 33
18.0 Junction Box 38
19.0 Testing And Commissioning 38
Annexure-A Testing Procedure for ACSR MOOSE conductor 40
Annexure-B Testing Procedure for Galvanised Steel Earthwire 42
Annexure-C Corona and Radio Interference Voltage (RIV) Test 44
Annexure-D Short Circuit Forces And Spacer Span for Gantry Str. 46
Annexure-E Standard Technical Data Sheets for Conductors, 48
Earthwire and Aluminium pipe
SECTION-(SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
1.0 GENERAL
This section covers erection of all equipment such as circuit breakers,

isolators, current transformers, voltage transformers, surge arresters etc.
This section also covers design, engineering, manufacture, testing at
works, supply, insurance, handling, storage, erection, testing and
commissioning of supply & erection of following items.
- String insulators and hardware
- AAC / ACSR conductor
- Galvanised Steel Earthwire
- Aluminium Tube
- Spacers
- Bus post insulators
- Earthing & Earthing materials
- Lightning protection materials
- Cabling material
- Other items
2.0 String Insulators & Hardware
The insulators for suspension and tension strings shall conform to IEC-60383
and long rod insulators shall conform to IEC-60433. Insulator hardware shall
conform to IS:2486. Composite long rod polymer insulator shall conform to
IEC:61109. Further, the contractor shall supply insulators as per details
mentioned below:
A. Tension Insulator String
Sl. No. System Voltage Type

1. 765kV, 400kV, 220kV & 132kV (for Composite Long Rod
all substations in coastal, pollution Polymer with 31mm/kV
affected areas as identified in Creepage
Section-Project and for all
substations in Northern Region)
substations not covered in 1. above) Polymer/Porcelain/Glass
with 31mm/kV Creepage
B. Suspension Insulator String
Sl. No. System Voltage Type

all substations) Polymer with 31mm/kV
Creepage
Technical Specification, Section : SE Page - 1 of 58

C / ENGG / SPEC / ERC REV. NO: 10 (Apr’16)
SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
2.1 Construction Features (Porcelain & Glass Insulators)
2.1.1 Porcelain insulators
a) Suspension and tension insulators shall be wet process porcelain with ball
and socket connection. Insulators shall be interchangeable and shall be
suitable for forming either suspension or tension strings. Each insulator
shall have rated strength, manufacturer‘s logo, month & year of
manufacturing markings on porcelain printed and applied before firing.
b) Porcelain used in insulator manufacturing shall be homogeneous, free from

laminations, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the
mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and
impervious to moisture.
c) Glazing of the porcelain shall be of uniform brown colour, free from blisters,
burrs and other similar defects.
2.1.2 Glass insulators
It shall be made of toughened glass. Glass used for the shells shall be sound,
free from defects, flows bubbles, inclusions, etc and be of uniform toughness
over its entire surface. All exposed glass surfaces shall be smooth.
2.1.2.1 When operating at normal rated voltage, there shall be no electric discharge
between conductor and insulator which would cause corrosion or damage to
conductors or insulators by the formation of substances due to chemical action.
2.1.2.2 The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. All ferrous
parts shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the latest edition of IS: 2629.
The zinc used for galvanizing shall be of grade Zn-99.95 as per IS-209. The zinc
coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and
free from imperfections such as flux, ash, rust stains bulky white deposits and
blisters.
2.1.2.3 Contractor shall make available data on all the essential features of design
including the method of assembly of discs and metal parts, number of discs per
insulator string, the manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted through
discs to adjacent parts, provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of
corona and thermal shock tests, recommended working strength and any special
design or arrangement employed to increase life under service conditions.
2.1.3 Hardware Fittings
2.1.3.1 Clamps for insulator strings and Corona Control rings shall be of aluminium alloy
as stipulated for clamps and connectors.
2.1.3.2 Insulator hardware shall be of forged steel. Malleable cast iron shall not be
accepted except for insulator disc cap. The surface of hardware must be clean,
smooth, without cuts, abrasion or projections. No part shall be subjected to
excessive localized pressure. The metal parts shall not produce any noise
generating corona under operating conditions.
2.1.3.3 The tension Insulator hardware assembly shall be designed for minimum 21000
kg tensile load for 765kV and minimum 12000 kg tensile load for hardware

C / ENGG / SPEC / SE REV. NO: 10 (Apr’16)
SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
assembly below 765kV. Earth wire tension clamp shall be designed for minimum
1000 kg tensile load with a factor of safety of two (2).
2.1.3.4 The tension string assemblies shall be supplied alongwith suitable turn buckle.
Sag compensation springs if required may also be provided.
2.1.3.5 All hardware shall be bolted type.
2.2 Tests
In accordance with the stipulations of the specification, the suspension and
tension strings, insulator and hardware shall be subjected to the following type
tests, acceptance tests and routine tests:
2.2.1 Type Tests on Insulator Strings: The test reports for following type tests shall
be submitted for approval as per clause 9.0 of Section - GTR.
a) Power frequency voltage withstand test with corona control rings (if
applicable) under wet condition as per IEC- 60383.
b) Switching surge voltage withstand test [400 kV and above class only]
under wet condition as per IEC-60383.
c) Lightning Impulse voltage withstand test with corona control rings under
dry condition as per IEC-60383
d) Voltage distribution test (Dry) [applicable for disc insulator string only]
The voltage across each insulator unit shall be measured by sphere gap
method. The result obtained shall be converted into percentage. The
voltage across any disc shall not exceed 6.5% for 765 kV suspension and
tension insulator strings, 9% and 10% for 400KV suspension string and
tension insulator string respectively, 13% for 220KV suspension and
tension insulator strings, 20% and 22% for 132KV suspension and
tension insulator strings respectively.
e) Corona Extinction Voltage test (Dry) [220kV and above class only]
The sample assembly when subjected to power frequency voltage shall

have a corona extinction voltage as specified at clause 2.3.2. There
shall be no evidence of Corona on any part of the sample. The
atmospheric condition during testing shall be recorded and the test results
shall be accordingly corrected with suitable correction factor as stipulated
in IEC 60383.
f) RIV Test (Dry) [220kV and above class only]
Under the conditions as specified under (e) above the insulator string
alongwith complete hardware fittings shall have a radio interference
voltage as specified in clause 2.3.2 of this section. The test procedure
shall be in accordance with IS 8263/IEC 60437.
g) Mechanical strength test: The test shall be carried out as per following
procedure.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
The complete insulator string alongwith its hardware fitting excluding

arcing horn, corona control ring, grading ring, tension/suspension clamps
shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum
ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate
to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five
minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the string
components shall not show any visual deformation and it shall be
possible to dismantle them by hand. Hand tools may be used to remove
cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string shall then be
reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further
increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS and held for
one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied load
shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value
recorded.
2.2.2 Type Tests on String Insulator Units
Type test report for Thermal Mechanical Performance tests (applicable for
porcelain type insulators) as per IEC-60575, Clause 3 shall be submitted for
approval as per clause 9.2 of Section - GTR.
2.2.3 Acceptance Tests for Insulators:
a) Visual examination as per IEC-60383/ IEC-61109 clause no. 7.2 (for

composite long rod insulators).
b) Verification of Dimensions as per IEC- 60383.
c) Temperature cycle test as per IEC- 60383.
d) Puncture Test as per IEC-60383 (Applicable only for porcelain insulators).
e) Galvanizing Test as per IEC- 60383.
f) Mechanical performance test as per IEC-60575 Cl. 4 / IEC-61109 clause

no. 7.2 (for composite long rod insulators).
g) Test on locking device for ball and socket coupling as per IEC-60372(2).
h) Porosity test as per IEC- 60383 (Applicable only for porcelain insulators).
i) Thermal shock test as per IEC-60383 (Applicable only for glass

insulators)
2.2.4 Acceptance Test on Hardware Fitting
a) Visual Examination as per Cl. 5.10 of IS: 2486 (Part-I).
b) Verification of Dimensions as per Cl. 5.8 of IS:2486 (Part-I)
c) Galvanising/Electroplating tests as per Cl. 5.9 of IS:2486 (Part-I).
d) Slip strength test as per Cl 5.4 of IS-2486 (part-I)
e) Shore hardness test by the Elastometer

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
f) Mechanical strength test for each component (including corona control

rings and arcing horns).
The load shall be so applied that the component is stressed in the same
way as it would be in actual service and the procedure as given in
2.2.1.(g) above should be followed.
g) Test on locking devices for ball and socket coupling as per IEC -60372(2).
2.2.5 Routine Test on Insulator
a) Visual Inspection as per IEC-60383
b) Mechanical Routine Test as per IEC-60383
c) Electrical Routine Test as per IEC-60383
2.2.6 Routine Test on hardware Fittings
a) Visual examination as per Cl 5.10 of IS:2486 (Part-I)
b) Mechanical strength Test as per Cl. 5.11 of IS:2486 (Part-I)
2.2.7 Test during manufacture on all Components as applicable on insulator
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising: Samples taken from the
zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS: 209. The purity of zinc
shall not be less than 99.95%.
b) Chemical Analysis, mechanical hardness tests and magnetic particle

inspection for malleable casting:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection

for malleable casting will be as per the internationally recognized
procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number
and heat treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed
and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Employer in Quality
Assurance Program.
2.2.8 Test during manufacture on all components as applicable on hardware

fittings:
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising:
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per
IS:209. The purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%
b) Chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle for Forgings/

fabricated hardware:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection

for forgings/fabricated hardware will be as per the internationally
recognized procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on
heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be
as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Employer in
Quality Assurance Programme.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
2.3 Guaranteed technical Particular For
2.3.1 Disc Insulators
Sl. No. Description For 765kV For

400/220/132kV
a) Type of insulators Anti Fog type Anti Fog type
b) Physical Size of insulator units
(i) Diameter of Disc As per IEC As per IEC
(ii) Ball to ball spacing between 170 mm 145 mm
discs
c) Electro mechanical strength 210 kN 120 kN
d) Minimum Creepage distance of 460 mm 430 mm
individual insulator units
e) Markings
i) For Porcelain insulators Markings on Markings on
porcelain porcelain
ii) For toughened glass insulators Markings shall Markings shall
be done on be done on
initial parts initial parts
f) Power frequency puncture 1.3 times the 1.3 times the
withstand voltage actual wet actual wet
flashover flashover
voltage voltage
2.3.2 INSULATOR STRING
Sl. Description 765 kV 400kV 220kV 132kV

No.
a) Power frequency withstand 870 680 460 275
voltage of the complete string
with corona control ring (wet)
– KV rms
b) Lightning impulse withstand ± 2100 ± 1550 ± 1050 ± 650
Voltage of string with corona
control rings (dry) - kVp
c) Switching surge withstand ± 1550 ± 1050 NA NA
voltage of string with corona
control rings (wet) - kVp
d) Minimum corona extinction 508 320 156 NA
voltage level of string with
Corona Control rings (dry) - kV
rms
e) Maximum RIV level in micro 1000 1000 1000 NA
volts of string with Corona (Max) (Max) (Max)
Control rings across 300 Ohms at 320
at 508 at 156
resistor at 1 MHz kV
kV kV
f) Minimum total creepage 24800 13020 7595 4495
distance of the insulator
string (mm)
g) Minimum no. of discs per 54 31 18 11
string (for tension string if
applicable)

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
h) Electromechanical strength of 210 120 120 120

Insulator Unit. ( KN)
For tension application:-
Double insulator strings for 765kV, 400kV, 220kV and single insulator strings for
132 kV systems shall be used.
For suspension application:-
V-type polymer insulator string shall be used for 765kV system and single
suspension polymer insulator string shall be used for 400kV, 220kV & 132 kV
systems.
2.4 COMPOSITE LONG ROD POLYMER INSULATOR
Bidder shall offer composite long rod polymer insulators with suitable hardware
fittings.
2.4.1 Details of Composite Long Rod Insulators
2.4.1.1 Insulators shall have sheds of the ―open aerodynamic profile without any under
ribs‖ with good self-cleaning properties. Insulator shed profile, spacing projection
etc. shall be strictly in accordance with the recommendation of IEC-60815.
2.4.1.2 Ball and socket shall be 20mm designation for 120kN & 24mm designation for
210kN Insulators in accordance with the standard dimensions stated in
IEC:60120/ IS:2486 (Part-II). Insulators shall be interchangeable and shall be
suitable for forming either suspension or tension strings. Each insulator shall
have laser markings on housings for manufacturer‘s name, month & year of
manufacturing, rated strength markings on each composite insulator rod unit. No
negative tolerance shall be applicable to creepage distance of composite
insulators
2.4.1.3 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized as per Section-GTR with
minimum weight of zinc coating as 610 gm/sq.m for normal area and 900
gm/sq.m for coastal area as specified in Section-Project.
2.4.2 Material
2.4.2.1 Core
It shall be a glass-fiber reinforced (FRP) epoxy resin rod of high strength. The rod
shall be resistant to hydrolysis. The rod shall be of electrical grade corrosion
resistant (ECR), boron free glass and shall exhibit both high electrical integrity
and high resistance to acid corrosion.
2.4.2.2 Housing & Weathersheds
The FRP rod shall be covered by a sheath of a silicone rubber compound of a

thickness of minimum 5mm. The housing & weathersheds should have silicon
content of minimum 30% by weight. It should protect the FRP rod against
environmental influences, external pollution and humidity. It shall be extruded or
directly molded on the core. The interface between the housing and the core
must be uniform and without voids. The strength of the bond shall be greater
than the tearing strength of the polymer. The manufacturer shall follow non-

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
destructive technique (N.D.T.) to check the quality of jointing of the housing

interface with the core.
The weathersheds of the insulators shall be of alternate shed profile. The

weathersheds shall be vulcanized to the sheath (extrusion process) or molded as
part of the sheath (injection moulding process) and free from imperfections. The
vulcanization for extrusion process shall be at high temperature and for injection
moulding shall be at high temperature & high pressure. Any seams/ burrs
protruding axially along the insulator, resulting from the injection moulding
process shall be removed completely without causing any damage to the
housing. The track resistance of housing and shed material shall be class 1A4.5
according to IEC60587. The strength of the weathershed to sheath interface shall
be greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. The composite insulator shall
be capable of high pressure washing.
2.4.2.3 End Fittings
End fittings transmit the mechanical load to the core. They shall be made of
malleable cast iron/ spheroidal graphite or forged steel. They shall be connected
to the rod by means of a controlled compression technique. The manufacturer
shall have in-process Acoustic emission arrangement or some other
arrangement to ensure that there is no damage to the core during crimping. This
verification shall be in-process and done on each insulator. The system of
attachment of end fitting to the rod shall provide superior sealing performance
between housing and metal connection. The gap between fitting and sheath shall
be sealed by a flexible silicone rubber compound. The sealing shall stick to both
housing and metal end fitting. The sealing must be humidity proof and durable
with time.
End fittings shall have suitable provisions for fixing grading rings at the correct
position as per design requirements.
2.4.2.4 Grading Rings
Grading rings shall be used at both ends of each composite insulator unit for
reducing the voltage gradient on and within the insulator and to reduce TV noise
to acceptable levels. The size and placement of the metallic grading rings shall
be designed to eliminate dry band arcing/corona cutting/ exceeding of
permissible electrical stress of material. The insulator supplier shall furnish
design calculations using appropriate electric field software showing electric field
at surface of housing, inside housing & core and at the interface of housing and
metal fittings with the proposed placement and design of corona rings. Grading
rings shall be capable of installation and removal with hot line tools without
disassembling any other part of the insulator assembly.
The design & supply of grading rings shall be in the scope of the composite
insulator supplier.
2.4.3 Tests
2.4.3.1 Type Tests
The test reports for following type tests on long rod units, components, materials
or complete strings shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.2 of Section -
GTR.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
2.4.3.1.1 On the complete composite Long Rod Polymer Insulator String with
Hardware Fittings:-
a) Power frequency voltage withstand test with corona control rings/grading ring
and arcing horns (if provided) under wet condition as per IEC:60383-1993.
b) Switching surge voltage withstand test under wet condition as per IEC:60383-
1993.
c) Impulse voltage withstand test under dry condition as per IEC:60383-1993
d) Corona and RIV test under dry condition. [132kV and above class only]
The sample assembly when subjected to power frequency voltage shall have
a corona extinction voltage as specified in clause 2.3.2 of this section There
shall be no evidence of Corona on any part of the sample. The atmospheric
condition during testing shall be recorded and the test results shall be
accordingly corrected with suitable correction factor as stipulated in IEC
60383.
Under the conditions as specified above the insulator string alongwith

complete hardware fittings shall have a radio interference voltage level as
specified at specified in clause 2.3.2 of this section. The test procedure shall
be in accordance with IS 8263/IEC-60437.
e) Mechanical Strength test: The test shall be carried out as per following
procedure.
The complete insulator string alongwith its hardware fitting excluding arcing
horn, corona control ring, grading ring, tension/suspension clamps shall be
subjected to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile
strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the
minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five minutes and then
removed. After removal of the load, the string components shall not show any
visual deformation and it shall be possible to dismantle them by hand. Hand
tools may be used to remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The
string shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load
shall be further increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS and
held for one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied
load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value
recorded.
f) Salt-fog pollution withstand test as per IEC: 60507. The salinity level for
composite long rod insulators shall be 160 Kg/m3 NaCl.
2.4.3.1.2 On Composite Polymer Insulator Units
a) Tests on interfaces and connections of metal fittings as per IEC: 61109-2008.
b) Assembled core load time test as per IEC: 61109-2008.
c) Damage limit proof test and test of tightness of interface between end firings
and insulator housing as per IEC: 61109-2008
d) High Pressure washing test

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
The washing of a complete insulator of each E&M rating is to be carried out

at 3800 kPa with nozzles of 6 mm diameter at a distance of 3m from nozzles
to the insulator, the washing shall be carried out for 10minutes. There shall
be no damage to the sheath or metal fitting to housing interface. The
verification shall be done by 1 minute wet power frequency withstand test at
680kV r.m.s for 400KV.
e) Brittle fracture resistance test
The test arrangement shall be according to Damage limit proof test with
simultaneous application of 1N-HNO3 acid directly in contact with naked FRP
rod. The contact length of acid shall not be less than 40mm and thickness
around the core not less than 10mm.The rod shall withstand 80% of SML for
96 hours.
f) Dye penetration test as per IEC: 61109-2008
g) Water diffusion test as per IEC: 61109-2008
h) Tracking and erosion test as per IEC: 61109-2008.
i) Hardness test as per IEC: 61109-2008.
j) Accelerated weathering test as per IEC: 61109-2008.
k) Flammability test as per IEC: 61109-2008.
l) Silicone content test
Minimum content of silicone shall be 30% and the same shall be verified
through FT-IR spectroscopy & TGA analysis or any other approved/
acceptable method.
m) Recovery of Hydrophobicity test
1. The surface of selected samples shall be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol.

Allow the surface to dry and spray with water. Record the HC classification.
Dry the sample surface.
2. Treat the surface with corona discharges to destroy the hydrophobicity.

This can be done utilizing a high frequency corona tester, Holding the
electrode approximately 3mm from the sample surface, slowly move the
electrode over an area approximately 1‖ x 1‖. Continue treating this area
for 2 – 3 minutes, operating the tester at maximum output.
3. Immediately after the corona treatment, spray the surface with water and
record the HC classification. The surface should be hydrophilic, with an HC
value of 6 or 7. If not, dry the surface and repeat the corona treatment for a
longer time until an HC of 6 or 7 is obtained. Dry the sample surface.
4. Allow the sample to recover and repeat the hydrophobicity measurement at

several time intervals. Silicone rubber should recover to HC 1 – HC 2 within
24 to 48 hours, depending on the material and the intensity of the corona
treatment.
n) Torsion test

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
Three complete insulators of each electrical and mechanical rating shall be

subjected to a torsional load of 55Nm. The torsional strength test shall be
made with test specimen adequately secured to the testing machine. The
torsional load shall be applied to the test specimen through a torque member
so constructed that the test specimen is not subjected to any cantilever
stress. The insulator after torsion test must pass the Dye Penetration Test as
per IEC 61109.
o) Accelerated ageing test of 5000hrs as described in appendix-C of IEC 61109

or Test at multiple stresses of 5000 hrs as described in Annex-B of IEC -
62217
2.4.3.2 Acceptance Tests:
For Composite Long Rod Polymer Insulators
a. Verification of dimensions IEC : 61109-2008

b. Galvanizing test IEC : 60383
c. Verification of end fittings IEC : 61109-2008
d. Recovery of Hydrophobicity As per Cl. 2.4.3.1.2.m)
above
e. Verification of tightness of interface IEC : 61109-2008
between end fittings and insulator
housing and of specified mechanical load
f. Silicone content test As per Cl. 2.4.3.1.2.l)
above
g. Brittle fracture resistance test As per Cl. 2.4.3.1.2.e)
above
h. Dye penetration test IEC : 61109-2008
i. Water diffusion test IEC : 61109-2008
In the event of failure of the sample to satisfy the acceptance test(s) specified in
2.4.3.2 above, the re-test procedure shall be as per IEC 61109.
2.4.3.3 Routine Tests
For Composite Long Rod Polymer Insulator Units

a) Visual Examination As per IEC:61109-2008
b) Mechanical routine test As per IEC:61109 -2008
2.4.4 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Composite Long Rod Polymer

Insulators
The technical parameters for composite long rod polymer insulator string
shall be same of the insulator string specified in clause 2.3.2 of this
section.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
3.0 AAC / ACSR CONDUCTOR
3.1 Details of AAC Conductor
3.1.1 The Conductor shall conform to IEC: 61089/IS: 398 (Part V) - 1992 except where
otherwise specified herein.
The contractor shall supply the conductor as per the standard guaranteed technical
particulars enclosed in Annexure-E of the technical specification, Section –
Switchyard Erection and separate approval for guaranteed technical particulars is
not required during detailed engineering.
3.2 Details of ACSR Conductor
3.2.1 The Conductor shall conform to IEC: 61089/IS: 398 (Part V) - 1992 except where
otherwise specified herein.
3.2.2 The details of the ACSR Bersimis, ACSR Moose, ACSR Zebra and ACSR Panther
conductors shall be as per the standard guaranteed technical particulars enclosed in
Annexure-E of the technical specification, Section – Switchyard Erection and
separate approval for guaranteed technical particulars is not required during
detailed engineering.
3.3 Workmanship
3.3.1 The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact, uniform and free from all
imperfections including kinks (protrusion of wires), wire cross over, over riding,
looseness (wire being dislocated by finger/hand pressure and/or unusual bangle
noise on tapping), material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spot (on
account of reaction with trapped rain water etc.), dirt, grit etc.
3.3.2 All the Aluminium and steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all
imperfections, such as spills and splits, diemarks, scratches, abrasions, etc., after
drawing.
3.3.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanised and shall have a minimum zinc coating
as indicated in the guaranteed technical particulars. The zinc coating shall be
smooth, continuous and of uniform thickness, free from imperfections and shall
withstand minimum three dips in standard Preece test. The steel wire rods shall be of
such quality and purity that, when drawn to the size of the strands specified and
coated with zinc, the finished strands and the individual wires shall be of uniform
quality and have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC:
60888.
3.3.4 The steel strands shall be preformed and post formed in order to prevent spreading
of strands in the event of cutting of composite core wire. Care shall be taken to
avoid, damages to galvanisation during pre-forming and post-forming operation.
3.4 Joints in Wires
3.4.1 Aluminium Wires
3.4.1.1 During stranding, no aluminium wire welds shall be made for the purpose of
achieving the required conductor length.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
3.4.1.2 No joints shall be permitted in the individual wires in the outer most layer of the
finished conductor. However joints are permitted in the inner layer of the conductor
unavoidably broken during stranding, provided such breaks are not associated with
either inherently defective wire or with the use of short lengths of aluminium wires.
Such joints shall not be more than four (4) per conductor length and shall not be
closer than 15 meters from joint in the same wire or in any other aluminium wire of
the completed conductor.
3.4.1.3 Joints shall be made by cold pressure butt welding and shall withstand a stress of
not less than the breaking strength of individual strand guaranteed.
3.4.2 Steel Wires

There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished wire used for the manufacturing
of the strand. There shall also be no strand joints or strand splices in any length of
the completed stranded steel core of the conductor.
3.5 Tolerances
The manufacturing tolerances to the extent indicated in the guaranteed technical

particulars shall be permitted in the diameter of individual aluminium and steel
strands and lay-ratio of the conductor.
3.6 Materials
3.6.1 Aluminium
The aluminium strands shall be hard drawn from electrolytic aluminium rods having
purity not less than 99.5% and a copper content not exceeding 0.04%. They shall
have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC:60889.
3.6.2 Steel
The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel wire rods produced by
either the acid or the basic open-hearth process, the electric furnace process, or the
basic oxygen process and shall conform to the chemical composition indicated in the
guaranteed technical particulars.
The Steel wire strands shall have the same properties and characteristics as
prescribed for regular strength steel wire in IEC: 60888.
3.6.3 Zinc
The zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity.
It shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209 -1979.
3.7 Standard Length
3.7.1 The conductor shall be supplied as required. No joint shall be allowed within a single
span of stringing, jumpers and equipment interconnection.
3.8 Tests:
3.8.1 The following type, acceptance & routine tests and tests during manufacturing shall
be carried out on the conductor.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
3.8.1.1 Type Tests
In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests reports of
the conductor shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.2 of Section -GTR.
a) UTS test on stranded )

conductor. )
)
b) Corona extinction ) As per Annexure-A
voltage test (dry) )
)
(c) Radio Interference )
voltage test (dry) )
)
(d) DC resistance test )
on stranded conductor )
3.8.1.2 Acceptance Tests
a) Visual check for joints, )

scratches etc. and ) As per Annexure - A
lengths of conductor )
b) Dimensional check on )
steel and aluminium )
strands )
)
c) Check for lay ratios ) -do-
of various layers )
)
d) Galvanising test on steel )
strands )
)
e) Torsion and Elongation )
test on steel strands )
f) Breaking load test on )

steel and aluminium )
strands )
)
g) Wrap test on steel and ) As per IEC:60888 & 60889
aluminium strands )
h) DC resistance test on ) As per IEC:60889

aluminium strands )
i) UTS test on welded ) As per Annexure - A

joint of aluminium )
strands )
NOTE:
All the above tests except test mentioned at (a) shall be carried out on aluminium
and steel strands after stranding only.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
3.8.1.3 Routine Tests
a) Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification.
b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.
c) All acceptance tests as mentioned above to be carried out on each

coil/drum (as applicable).
3.8.1.4 Tests During Manufacture
a) Chemical analysis of )
zinc used for galvanising )
)
b) Chemical analysis of )
aluminium used for ) As per Annexure - A
making aluminium strands )
)
c) Chemical analysis of )
steel used for making )
steel strands )
4.0 Galvanised Steel Earth wire

4.1 Details of Earth wire
4.1.1 The galvanised steel earth wire shall generally conform to the specification of ACSR
core wire as mentioned in IEC:60888/IS: 398 (Part-II)-1976 except where otherwise
specified herein.
The contractor shall supply the earthwire as per the standard guaranteed technical
particulars enclosed in Annexure-E of the technical specification, Section –
Switchyard Erection and separate approval for guaranteed technical particulars is
not required during detailed engineering.
4.2 Workmanship
4.2.1 All steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all imperfections, such as
spills and splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after drawing and also
after stranding.
4.2.2 The finished material shall have minimum brittleness as it will be subjected to
appreciable vibration while in use.
4.2.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip qalvanised and shall have minimum Zinc coating
after stranding, as stipulated in guaranteed technical particulars attached with. The
zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous, of uniform thickness, free from
imperfections. The steel wire rod shall be of such quality and purity that, when drawn
to the size of the strands specified and coated with zinc, the finished strands shall be
of uniform quality and have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in
ASTM designation B498-74.
4.2.4 The steel strands shall be preformed and post formed in order to prevent spreading
of strands while cutting of composite earth wire. Care shall be taken to avoid damage
to galvanisation during preforming and postforming operation.
4.2.5 To avoid susceptibility towards wet storage stains (white rust), the finished material
shall be provided with a protective coating of boiled linseed oil.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
4.3 Joints in Wires

There shall be no joints of any kind in the finished steel wire strand entering into the
manufacture of the earth wire. There shall be no strand joints or strand splices in any
length of the completed stranded earth wire.
4.4 Tolerances
The manufacturing tolerance to the extent of the limits as stipulated in guaranteed
Technical Particulars attached with this specification shall only be permitted in the
diameter of the individual steel strands and lay length of the earth wire.
4.5 Materials
4.5.1 Steel
The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel rods and the chemical
composition shall conform to the requirements as stipulated in Guaranteed Technical
Particulars attached with.
4.5.2 Zinc
The zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc. It shall conform
to and satisfy all the requirements of IS: 209 -1979.
4.6 Standard Length
4.6.1 The standard length of the earth wire shall be as stipulated in Guaranteed Technical
Particulars attached with, with the specified tolerance on standard length.
4.8 TESTS
4.8.1 The following type, routine & acceptance tests and tests during manufacturing shall
be carried out on the earthwire.
4.8.2 TYPE TESTS
In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests reports
of the earthwire shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.2 of Section -
GTR.
a) UTS test )
) As per Annexure - B
b) DC resistance test )
4.8.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
a) Visual check for joints, )

scratches etc. and )
length of Earthwire )
)
b) Dimensional check ) As per Annexure - B
)
c) Galvanising test )
)
d) Lay length check )
)

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
e) Torsion test )
f) Elongation test )
)
g) Wrap test )
h) DC resistance test )
) IS:398 (Part-III) - 1976
i) Breaking load test )
)
j) Chemical Analysis of )
steel
4.8.4 ROUTINE TESTS
a) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.
b) Check for correctness of stranding.
4.8.5 TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE
a) Chemical analysis of ) As per Annexure - B

zinc used for galvanising )
)
b) Chemical analysis of steel )
5.0 ALUMINIUM TUBE
5.1 General
Aluminium used shall be grade 63401 WP (range 2) conforming to IS:5082.
The contractor shall supply the aluminium tubes as per the standard guaranteed
technical particulars enclosed in Annexure-E of this section and separate
approval for guaranteed technical particulars is not required during detailed
engineering.
5.2 Constructional Features
5.2.1 For outer diameter (OD) & thickness of the tube there shall not be any negative
tolerance, other requirements being as per IS: 2678 and IS: 2673.
5.2.2 The welding of aluminium tube shall be done by the qualified welders duly
approved by the Employer.
5.3 Tests
In accordance with stipulations of the specification, Routine tests shall be

conducted on tubular bus conductors as per IS:5082. Also the wall thickness and
ovality of the tube shall be measured.
5.4 Technical Parameters
Sl. Description 3” AL. 4” AL. 4.5” AL. 5” AL.

No. TUBE TUBE TUBE TUBE
1. Type 3" IPS 4" IPS 4.5" IPS 5" IPS

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
(EH Type) (EH Type) (EH Type) (H Type)

2. Outer diameter 88.9 mm 114.2 mm 120.00 mm 141.30 mm
3. Thickness 7.62 mm 8.51 mm 12.00 mm 9.53 mm
4. Cross-sectional 1945.76 2825.61 4071.50 3945.11
area of sq.mm sq.mm sq.mm sq.mm
aluminium
5. Weight 5.25 kg/m 7.7 kg/m 11.034 kg/m 10.652 kg/m
Sl. Description 6” AL. TUBE 8” AL. TUBE 10” AL. TUBE

No.
1. Type 6‖ IPS 8‖ IPS 10‖ IPS
(H Type) (H Type) (H Type)
2. Outer diameter 150 mm 202 mm 252 mm
3. Thickness 10 mm 16 mm 17 mm
4. Cross-sectional 4398.2 9349.3 12550.6
area of Sq mm sq.mm sq.mm
aluminium
5. Weight 11.875 kg/m 25.243 kg/m 33.887 kg/m
6.0 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
6.1 General
All conductors burried in earth and concrete shall be of mild steel. All conductors
above ground level and earthing leads shall be of galvanised steel, except for
cable trench earthing. The minimum sizes of earthing conductor to be used are
as indicated in clause 9.4 of this Section.
6.2.1 Galvanised Steel
a) Steel conductors above ground level shall be galvanised according to

IS:2629.
b) The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq.m for normal
area and 900 gm/sq.m for coastal area as specified in Section-
Project and minimum thickness shall be 85 microns.
c) The galvanised surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniformly thick

coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surfaces of steel. The finished
surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from defects like
discoloured patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is
loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surfaces,
flaking or peeling off etc. The presence of any of these defects noticed
on visual or microscopic inspection shall render the material liable to
rejection.
6.3 Tests
In accordance with stipulations of the specifications galvanised steel shall be

subjected to four one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IS : 2633.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
7.0 SPACERS
7.1 General
Spacers shall conform to IS: 10162. The spacers are to be located at a suitable
spacing to limit the short circuit forces as per IEC -60865. Wherever Employer‘s
765kV, 400 kV, 220kV & 132kV standard gantry structures are being used, the
spacer span(s) for different conductor / span configurations and corresponding
short circuit forces shall be as per Annexure-D. For strung buses, flexible type
spacers shall be used whereas for jumpers and other connections rigid type
spacers shall be used. All quad/twin conductors between equipments/ bus shall
be provided with at least one spacer.
Wherever Employer‘s 765kV, 400 kV, 220kV & 132kV standard gantry structures
are not being used, necessary spacer span calculation shall be provided by the
contractor during detailed engineering for the approval of Employer.
7.2.1 No magnetic material shall be used in the fabrication of spacers except for GI
bolts and nuts.
7.2.2 Spacer design shall be made to take care of fixing and removing during
installation and maintenance.
7.2.3 The design of the spacers shall be such that the conductor does not come in
contact with any sharp edge.
7.3 Tests
Each type of spacers shall be subjected to the following type tests, acceptance
tests and routine tests:
7.3.1 Type Tests: Following type test reports shall be submitted for approval as
per clause 9.2 of Section - GTR.
a) Clamp slip tests
The sample shall be installed on test span of twin conductor bundle string
or quadruple conductor bundle string (as applicable) at a tension of 44.2
kN. One of the clamps of the sample when subjected to a longitudinal
pull of 2.5 kN parallel to the axis of the conductor shall not slip on the
conductor. The permanent displacement between the conductor and the
clamp of sample measured after removal of the load shall not exceed 1.0
mm. Similar tests shall be performed on the other clamps of the same
sample.
b) Fault current test as per Cl 5.14.2 of IS: 10162. Alternately, the same can
be carried by simulated short circuit method for which compressive forces
shall be based on IEC-60865.
c) Corona Extinction Voltage Test (Dry).
This test shall be performed on 765 kV, 400 kV and 220 kV spacers as
per procedure mentioned at Annexure - C, Minimum Corona Extinction
voltage shall be as per clause 2.3.2.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
d) RIV Test (Dry)
This test shall be performed as per procedure mentioned at Annexure - C,

Maximum RIV levels shall be as per clause 2.3.2.
e) Resilience test (if applicable)
f) Tension Test
g) Log decremant test (if applicable)
h) Compression test
i) Galvanising test
7.3.2 Acceptance Test (As per IS:10162)
a) Visual examination
b) Dimensional verification
c) Movement test
d) Clamp slip test
e) Clamp bolt torque test (if applicable)
f) Assembly torque test
g) Compression test
h) Tension test
i) Galvanising test
j) Hardness test for neoprene (if applicable)
The shore hardness of different points on the elastometer surface of

cushion grip clamp shall be measured by shore hardness meter. It shall
be between 65 to 80.
k) Ultimate Tensile Strength Test
The UTS of the retaining rods shall be measured. It shall not be less than
35 kg/Sq. mm.
7.3.3 Routine test
a) Visual examination
b) Dimensional verification
8.0 BUS POST INSULATORS
The post insulators shall conform in general to latest IS: 2544, IEC-60168, IEC
60273 and IEC-60815.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
8.1.1 Bus Post insulators shall consist of a porcelain part permanently secured in a
metal base to be mounted on the supporting structures. They shall be capable of
being mounted upright. They shall be designed to withstand any shocks to which
they may be subjected to by the operation of the associated equipment. Only
solid core insulators will be acceptable.
8.1.2 Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from lamination, cavities and other
flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and
shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture.
8.1.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be of uniform brown in colour, free from blisters,
burrs and other similar defects.
8.1.4 The insulator shall have alternate long and short sheds with aerodynamic profile,
The shed profile shall also meet the requirements of IEC-60815 for the specified
pollution level.
8.1.5 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge
between conductor and insulators which would cause corrosion or damage to
conductors or insulators by the formation of substance produced by chemical
action.
8.1.6 The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
8.1.7 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the latest edition
of IS: 2633, & IS: 2629. The zinc used for galvanising shall be grade Zn 99.95 as
per IS: 209. The zinc coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably
bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux ash, rust stains, bulky
white deposits and blisters. The metal parts shall not produce any noise
generating corona under the operating conditions.
8.1.8 a) Every bolt shall be provided with a hop dip galvanised steel washer under
the nut so that part of the threaded portion of the bolts is within the
thickness of the parts bolted together.
b) Flat washer shall be circular of a diameter 2.5 times that of bolt and of
suitable thickness. Where bolt heads/nuts bear upon the beveled
surfaces they shall be provided with square tapered washers of suitable
thickness to afford a seating square with the axis of the bolt.
c) All bolts and nuts shall be of steel with well formed hexagonal heads
forged from the solid and shall be hot dip galvanised. The nuts shall be
good fit on the bolts and two clear threads shall show through the nut
when it has been finally tightened up.
8.1.9 Bidder shall furnish drawings for the essential design features of assembly of
shells and metal parts, and number of shells per insulator.
8.2 Tests
In accordance with the stipulations of the specification, the post insulators shall
be subjected to type, acceptance, sample and routine tests as per IEC-60168.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
8.2.1 In accordance with the stipulation of specification, the following type tests
reports of the post insulators shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.2 of
Section - GTR.
a) Power frequency withstand test (dry & wet)
b) Lightning impulse test (dry)
c) Switching impulse test (wet) (For 420 kV and above class Insulator only)
d) Measurement of R.I.V (Dry) (As per Annexure – C)
e) Corona extinction voltage test (Dry) (As per Annexure – C)

.
f) Test for deflection under load
g) Test for mechanical strength.
8.2.2 In addition to acceptance/sample/routine tests as per IEC-60168, the following

tests shall also be carried out.
a) Soundness test, metallurgical tests and magnetic particle Inspection

(MPI) test on MCI/SGI caps as acceptance test.
b) All hot dip galvanised components shall be subjected to check for

uniformity of thickness and weight of zinc coating on sample basis as an
acceptance test.
c) The bending test shall be carried out at 50% minimum cantilever strength
load in four directions as a routine test and at 100% minimum cantilever
strength load in four directions as an acceptance test.
d) Acceptance norms for visual defects allowed at site and also at works
shall be agreed in the Quality plan.
8.3 Technical Parameters of Bus Post Insulators.
Sl. Description 800 kV 420 kV 245 kV 145 kV

No.
a) Type Solid Solid Solid Solid
Core Core Core Core
b) Voltage Class (kV) 800 420 245 145
c) Dry and wet one minute 830 680 460 275
power frequency
withstand voltage (kV
rms)
d) Dry lightning impulse ±2100 ±1425 +1050 +650
withstand Voltage (kVp)
e) Wet switching surge ±1550 ±1050 —- —-
withstand voltage (kVp)
f) Max. radio interference 1000 500 500 500
voltage (in microvolts) - at 508 kV at 305 kV at 156 kV at 105 kV
Dry
g) Corona extinction voltage 508 320 156 105
(kV rms) (min.)

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
h) Cantilever Strength
(i) Total minimum cantilever 800 800 800 600
strength (Kg)
i) Minimum torsional As per As per As per As per
moment IEC- IEC- IEC- IEC-
60273 60273 60273 60273
j) Total height of insulator 5700 3650 2300 1500
(mm)
k) P.C.D Top (mm) 225 127 127 127
Bottom (mm) 325 300 254 254
l) No. of bolts
Top 4 4 4 4
Bottom 8 8 8 8
m) Diameter of bolt/holes
(mm)
Top M16 M16 M16 M16
Bottom dia 18 18 18 18
n) Pollution level as per Heavy(III) Heavy(III) Heavy(III) Heavy(III)
IEC-60815
o) Minimum total creepage 20000 10500 6125 3165
distance for Heavy
Pollution (mm)
8.3.1 If corona extinction voltage is to be achieved with the help of corona ring or any
other similar device, the same shall be deemed to be included in the scope of the
Contractor. Aluminium used for corona ring shall be of grade 63401 or 19501
conforming to IS:5082.
9.0 EARTHING
9.1 The earthing shall be done in accordance with requirements given hereunder and
drawing titled ‗Earthing Details‘ enclosed with the specification. The spacing for
the main earthmat shall be provided by the Employer and the earthmat layout
drawings shall be prepared by the contractor based on the spacing provided by
the Employer. The resistivity of the stone for spreading over the ground shall be
considered as 3000 ohm-m under wet condition. The resistivity measurement of
stone (to be used for stone spreading) shall also be done by the Contractor to
confirm the minimum resistivity value of stone considered in earth mat design.
For measurement purpose, one sample of stones from each source (in case
stones are supplied from more than one source) shall be used. The main
earthmat shall be laid in the switchyard area in accordance with the approved
earthmat layout.
9.2 Neutral points of systems of different voltages, metallic enclosures and frame
works associated with all current carrying equipments and extraneous metal
works associated with electric system shall be connected to a single earthing
system unless stipulated otherwise.
9.3 Earthing and lightning protection system installation shall be in strict accordance
with the latest editions of Indian Electricity Rules, relevant Indian Standards and
Codes of practice and Regulations existing in the locality where the system is
installed.
a) Code of practice for Earthing IS: 3043

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
b) Code of practice for the protection of Building and allied structures

against lightning IS: 2309.
c) CEA Safety Regulations 2010 & Indian Electricity Act 2003 with latest
amendments.
d) National Electricity Safety code IEEE-80.
9.4 Details of Earthing System
Sl. Item Size Material

No.
a) Main Earthing Conductor to be 40mm dia Mild Steel rod
buried in ground as per IS:2062/
SAE1018
b) Conductor above ground& 75x12mm G.S. flat Galvanised
earthing leads (for equipment) Steel
c) Conductor above ground& 75x12mm G.S. flat Galvanised
earthing leads(for columns & aux. Steel
structures)
d) Earthing of indoor LT panels, 50x6 mm G.S. flat Galvanised
Control panels and outdoor Steel
marshalling boxes, Junction
boxes& Lighting Panels etc.
e) Rod Earth Electrode 40mm dia, Mild Steel
3000mm long as per IS:2062/
SAE1018
f) Pipe Earth Electrode (in treated 40mm dia, Galvanised
earth pit) as per IS. 3000mm long steel
g) Earthing for motors 25x3mm GS flat Galvanised
steel
h) Earthing conductor along outdoor 50x6mm MS flat Mild steel
cable trenches as per IS:2062/
SAE1018
I) Earthing of Lighting Poles 40 mm dia 3000 Mild steel rod
(for lighting poles outside mm long as per IS:2062/
switchyard) SAE1018
j) Isolator MOM Box 75X12 mm GS flat Galvanised
& Flexible copper steel and
braid copper braid
The sizes of the earthing conductor indicated above are the minimum sizes.
9.5 Earthing Conductor Layout
9.5.1 Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be buried at least 600 mm below
finished ground level unless stated otherwise.
9.5.2 Wherever earthing conductor crosses cable trenches, underground service

ducts, pipes, tunnels, railway tracks etc., it shall be laid minimum 300 mm below
them and shall be circumvented in case it fouls with equipment/structure
foundations.
9.5.3 Tap-connections from the earthing grid to the equipment/structure to be earthed

shall be terminated on the earthing terminals of the equipment/structure as per
―Standard Earthing Details – Drg No. C/ENG/STD/EARTHINGS/09‖ enclosed.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
9.5.4 Earthing conductors or leads along their run on cable trench, ladder, walls etc.
shall be supported by suitable welding/cleating at intervals of 750 mm. Wherever
it passes through walls, floors etc., PVC sleeves shall be provided for the
passage of the conductor and both ends of the sleeve shall be sealed to prevent
the passage of water through the sleeves.
9.5.5 Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum
distance of 1500 mm from the outer boundary of the building.
9.5.6 Earthing conductors crossing the road shall be laid 300mm below road or at
greater depth to suit the site conditions.
9.5.7 Earthing conductors embeded in the concrete shall have approximately 50mm
concrete cover.
9.6 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC FIELD CONTROL
The contractor shall provide galvanised steel earth wire at 8m level in the
area where three interconnection levels (equipment interconnection, bus &
jack bus interconnection) are present at 765kV switchyard to limit electric
and magnetic field within permissible limit.
9.7 Equipment and Structure Earthing
9.7.1 Earthing pads shall be provided for the apparatus/equipment at accessible

position. The connection between earthing pads and the earthing grid shall be
made by two short earthing leads (one direct and another through the support
structure) free from kinks and splices. In case earthing pads are not provided on
the item to be earthed, same shall be provided in consultation with Employer.
9.7.2 Whether specifically shown in drawings or not, steel/RCC columns, metallic stairs
etc. shall be connected to the nearby earthing grid conductor by two earthing
leads. Electrical continuity shall be ensured by bonding different sections of
hand-rails and metallic stairs.
9.7.3 Metallic pipes, conduits and cable tray sections for cable installation shall be
bonded to ensure electrical continuity and connected to earthing conductors at
regular interval. Apart from intermediate connections, beginning points shall also
be connected to earthing system.
9.7.4 Metallic conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor.
9.7.5 Wherever earthing conductor crosses or runs along metallic structures such as
gas, water, steam conduits, etc. and steel reinforcement in concrete it shall be
bonded to the same.
9.7.6 Light poles, junction boxes on the poles, cable and cable boxes/glands, lockout
switches etc. shall be connected to the earthing conductor running alongwith the
supply cable which in turn shall be connected to earthing grid conductor at a
minimum two points whether specifically shown or not.
9.7.7 Railway tracks within switchyard area shall be earthed at a spacing of 30m and
also at both ends.
9.7.8 Earthing conductor shall be buried 2000 mm outside the switchyard fence. All the
gates and every alternate post of the fence shall be connected to earthing grid.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
The stone spreading shall also be done 2000 mm outside switchyard fence. The
criterian for stone spreading shall be followed in line with requirement specified
elsewhere in the specification
9.7.9 Flexible earthing connectors shall be provided for the moving parts.
9.7.10 All lighting panels, junction boxes, receptacles fixtures, conduits etc. shall be
grounded in compliance with the provision of I.E. rules
9.7.11 A continuous ground conductor of 16 SWG GI wire shall be run all along each
conduit run. The conductor shall be connected to each panel ground bus. All
junction boxes, receptacles, switches, lighting fixtures etc. shall be connected to
this 16 SWG ground conductor.
9.7.12 50mm x 6mm MS flat shall run on the top tier and all along the cable trenches
and the same shall be welded to each of the racks. Further this flat shall be
earthed at both ends and at an interval of 30 mtrs. The M.S. flat shall be finally
painted with two coats of Red oxide primer and two coats of Zinc riched enamel
paint.
9.7.13 One number 40 mm dia, 3000 mm long MS earth electrode with test link, CI
frame and cover shall be provided to connect each down conductor of surge
arresters, capacitive voltage transformers, lightning masts and towers with peak.
9.8 Jointing
9.8.1 Earthing connections with equipment earthing pads shall be bolted type. Contact
surfaces shall be free from scale, paint, enamel, grease, rust or dirt. Two bolts
shall be provided for making each connection. Equipment bolted connections,
after being checked and tested, shall be painted with anti corrosive
paint/compound.
9.8.2 Connection between equipment earthing lead and main earthing conductors and
between main earthing conductors shall be welded type. For rust protections, the
welds should be treated with red oxide primer and afterwards coated with two
layers bitumen compound to prevent corrosion.
9.8.3 Steel to copper connections shall be brazed type and shall be treated to prevent
moisture ingression.
9.8.4 Resistance of the joint shall not be more than the resistance of the equivalent
length of the conductor.
9.8.5 All ground connections shall be made by electric arc welding. All welded joints
shall be allowed to cool down gradually to atmospheric temperature before put-
ting any load on it. Artificial cooling shall not be allowed.
9.8.6 All arc welding with large dia. conductors shall be done with low hydrogen
content electrodes.
9.8.7 The 75x12mm GS flat shall be clamped with the equipment support structures at
1000mm interval.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
9.9 Power Cable Earthing
Metallic sheaths and armour of all multi core power cables shall be earthed at
both equipment and switchgear end. Sheath and armour of single core power
cables shall be earthed at switchgear end only.
9.10 Specific Requirement for Earthing Systems
9.10.1 Each earthing lead from the neutral of the power transformer/Reactor shall be
directly connected to two numbers pipe electrodes in treated earth pit (as per IS)
which in turn, shall be buried in Cement Concrete pit with a ISI marked cast iron
cover hinged to a cast iron frame to have an access to the joints. All accessories
associated with transformer/reactor like cooling banks, radiators etc. shall be
connected to the earthing grid at minimum two points.
9.10.2 Earthing terminal of each lightning arrester & capacitor voltage transformer shall
be directly connected to rod earth electrode which in turn, shall be connected to
station earthing grid.
9.10.3 Auxiliary earthing mat comprising of 40mm dia M.S. rods closely spaced (300
mm x 300 mm) conductors shall be provided at depth of 300mm from ground
level below the operating handles of the M.O.M. Box of the isolators. M.O.M.
boxes shall be directly connected to the auxiliary earthing mat. Flexible copper
braid connection to be provided between MOM box and GI flat to take care of soil
sagging. The size of auxiliary earthing mat shall be of 1500mmx1500mm size for
220kV and above voltage class isolators and 900mmx900mm size for 132kV and
below voltage class isolators. Factory welded auxiliary earthmat is preferable.
9.11 Insulating mats
9.11.1 The scope covers supply and laying of insulating mats of ―class A‖ conforming to
IS: 15652-2006.
9.11.2 These insulating mats shall be laid in front of all floor mounted AC and DC
switchboards and control & relay panels located in control room building/
Switchyard panel room.
9.11.3 The insulating mats shall be made of elastomer material free from any insertions
leading to deterioration of insulating properties. It shall be resistant to acid, oil
and low temperature.
9.11.4 Upper surface of the insulating mats shall have small aberration (rough surface
without edges) to avoid slippery effects while the lower surface shall be plain or
could be finished slip resistant without affecting adversely the dielectric property
of the mat.
9.11.5 Insulating mat (wherever applicable) shall be of pastable type, to be fixed

permanently on the front of the panels except for the chequered plate area which
shall not be pasted as per requirement. The insulating mats shall generally be
fixed and joints shall be welded as per recommendations in Annexure-A of IS:
15652.
9.11.6 Width of insulating mats shall generally be of 1.5 meters or as per site
requirements. Length shall be supplied as per site requirements.
9.11.7 The insulating mats offered shall conform to IS: 15652-2006.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
10.0 Bus Bars
The brief description of the bus switching scheme, bus bar layout and equipment
connection to be adopted are indicated elsewhere in the specification. The bus
bar arrangements are shown in electrical layout drawings enclosed with the bid
documents.
10.1 The Contractor shall furnish supporting calculations where the design is to be
done by the contractor for the bus bars/conductors to show adequacy of design
parameters for:
a) Fibre-stress (applicable for aluminum tube)
b) Cantilever strength of post insulators (applicable for aluminum tube)
c) Aeolain vibrations (applicable for aluminum tube)
d) Vertical deflection of bus bars (applicable for aluminum tube)
e) Short circuit forces in bundle conductor and spacer location for each span
of ACSR conductor stringing as per layout drawings.
10.1.1 The welds in the aluminium tubes shall be kept to the minimum and there shall
not be more than one weld per span. The procedure and details of welding shall
be subject to Employer‘s approval. Material for welding sleeve shall be same as
that of Aluminium tube. Welding sleeve shall be of 600mm length
10.1.2 Corona bells shall be provided wherever the bus extends beyond the clamps and
on free ends, for sealing the ends of the tubular conductor against rain and
moisture and to reduce the electrostatic discharge loss at the end points. There
shall be a small drain hole in the corona bell. The material of Corona bell shall be
Aluminium alloy similar to that of clamps & connectors.
10.1.3 To minimise the vibrations in the aluminium tubes, damping conductor shall be
provided inside the aluminium tubes. For this purpose, the cut pieces of ACSR
conductor which otherwise are considered wastages, shall be used as damping
conductor.
10.1.4 Details of past experience of the persons proposed to be employed for
Aluminium tube welding and the test reports of the welded pieces to prove the
electrical and mechanical characteristics shall also be furnished to Employer.
Welding at site shall be done by adopting a qualified procedure and employing
qualified welders as per ASME-Section IX.
10.1.5 Joints shall be avoided in strung bus to avoid joint failure / hot spots and
hardwares to be designed accordingly.
11.0 BAY EQUIPMENT
11.1 The disposition of various bay equipments shall be as per single line diagrams
and layout drawings.
11.2 Bay Marshalling Kiosk:-
Bay marshalling kiosk shall be fabricated from 304 grade stainless steel of
minimum thickness of 1.6mm. For other constructional details, technical
specification of section-GTR shall be referred. Further, for stainless steel
type bay marshaling kiosk, no painting is envisaged.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
One no. of bay marshalling kiosk shall be provided for each 765 kV, 400 kV, 220
kV and 132 kV bay under present scope. For one and half breaker scheme, one
number bay marshalling kiosk shall be provided for each controlling feeder (Line/
transformer/ bus reactor etc) of the diameter and no bay marshalling kiosks are
required to be provided for the tie bays. In addition to the requirements specified
elsewhere in the specification, the bay marshalling kiosk shall have two distinct
compartments for the following purpose:-
A. For 765kV , 400 kV & 220 kV Bays
(i) To receive two incoming 415V, 3 phase, 63Amps, AC supply with auto
changeover and MCB unit and distribute minimum nine (9) numbers
outgoing 415V, 3 phase, 16 Amps AC supplies controlled by MCB.
(ii) To distribute minimum two numbers outgoing 415V, 63Amps three phase
supplies to be controlled by MCB to be drawn from above 3 phase
incomers for supply to switchyard panel rooms.
(iii) To distribute minimum ten numbers outgoing 240V, 10 Amps single

phase supplies to be controlled by MCB to be drawn from above 3 phase
incomers.
(iv) Necessary Terminal Blocks for terminating cables from ACDB and
necessary heating circuits.
B. For 132kV & 66 kV Bays
(i) To receive two incoming 415V, 3 phase, 63Amps, AC supply with auto
changeover and MCB unit and distribute minimum four (4) number
outgoing 415V, 3 phase, 16 Amps AC supplies controlled by MCB.
(ii) To distribute minimum six (6) numbers outgoing 240V, 10 Amps single
phase supplies to be controlled by MCB to be drawn from above 3 phase
incomers.
(iii) 100 nos. terminal blocks in vertical formation for interlocking facilities for
substations without automation system.
(iv) Necessary Terminal Blocks for terminating cables from ACDB and
necessary heating circuits.
11.3 Further, all Bay Marshalling Kiosks shall be erected such that a minimum height
of 1000mm is maintained between FGL & bottom of the marshalling box. Size of
Marshalling box shall be such that cables are properly terminated and wires are
dressed with provision of loop.
11.4 BAY AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION
11.4.1 The name plate for the bays shall be provided by the contractor as per standard
drawing (Drawing no. C/ENG/STD/BAY NAME PLATE) enclosed in this technical
specification.
11.4.2 All the phases are to be identified by painting the structures Red, Yellow and
Blue by reflecting colour as per as built condition. Phase identification colour is to
be provided around the top of the structure with colour band of 100 mm width at
a height of approximately 2000mm from the finished ground level.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
12.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

12.1 Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the EHV switchyard
by lightning masts and shield wires. The layout drawings enclosed indicate the
tentative arrangement. The final arrangement shall be decided after approval of
the DSLP calculations.
12.2 The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground
metallic service ducts and cables.
12.3 Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the
conductors of the safety earthing system above ground level.
12.4 Down conductors shall be cleated on the structures at 2000 mm interval.
12.5 Connection between each down conductor and rod electrodes shall be made via
test joint (pad type compression clamp) located approximately 1500 mm above
ground level. The rod electrode shall be further joined with the main earthmat.
12.6 Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits.
12.7 Lightning protection shall also be provided for various buildings like control
building, FFPH, Township buildings as per relevant standard.
13.0 EQUIPMENT ERECTION DETAILS
13.1 All circuit breaker and isolator erection shall be done under the supervision of
equipment manufacturer and erection of all switchyard equipments shall be done
as per POWERGRID approved Field Quality Plan (FQP) and as per provision of
Technical Specification.
13.2 For equipment interconnection, the surfaces of equipment terminal pads,

Aluminium tube, conductor & terminal clamps and connectors shall be properly
cleaned. After cleaning, contact grease shall be applied on the contact surfaces
of equipment terminal pad, Aluminium tube/conductor and terminal clamps to
avoid any air gap in between. Subsequently bolts of the terminal pad/terminal
connectors shall be tightened and the surfaces shall be cleaned properly after
equipment interconnection.
13.3 Muslin or leather cloth shall be used for cleaning the inside and outside of hollow
insulators.
13.4 All support insulators, circuit breaker interrupters and other fragile equipment
shall preferably be handled with cranes having suitable booms and handling
capacity.
13.5 Bending of Aluminium tube and compressed air piping if any should be done by a
bending machine and through cold bending only. Bending shall be such that
inner diameter of pipe is not reduced.
All welding done at site for equipment and structures, shall be painted with zinc
rich paint immediately to avoid corrosion.
13.6 Cutting of the pipes wherever required shall be such as to avoid flaring of the
ends. Hence only a proper pipe cutting tool shall be used. Hack saw shall not be
used.
13.7 Handling of equipment shall be done strictly as per manufacturer‘s/supplier‘s

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
instructions/instruction manual.
13.8 Handling equipment, sling ropes etc. should be tested periodically before
erection for strength.
13.9 The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid any damage to insulator due to
excessive swing, scratching by sling ropes etc.
14.0 STORAGE
14.1 The Contractor shall provide and construct adequate storage shed as per the
Filed Quality Plan for proper storage of equipments, where sensitive equipments
shall be stored indoors. All equipments during storage shall be protected against
damage due to acts of nature or accidents. The storage instructions of the
equipment manufacturer/Employer shall be strictly adhered to. POWERGRID
approved Field Quality Plan shall be followed alongwith the provision of
Technical Specification for storage.
15.0 CABLING MATERIAL
15.1 CABLE TAGS AND MARKERS
15.1.1 Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the
cable and conduit schedule.
15.1.2 The tag shall be of aluminium with the number punched on it and securely
attached to the cable conduit by not less than two turns of 20 SWG GI wire
conforming to IS:280. Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for power cables
and of circular shape for control cables.
15.1.3 Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with cable
route marker made of galvanised iron plate.
15.1.4 Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable route marker
with an additional inscription ―Cable joints‖.
15.1.5 The cable route marker shall project 150 mm above ground and shall be spaced
at an interval of 30 meters and at every change in direction. They shall be
located on both sides of road and drain crossings as per relevant standard.
15.1.6 Cable tags shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering the
equipment enclosure), on both sides of a wall or floor crossing, on each
duct/conduit entry and at each end & turning point in cable tray/trench runs.
Cable tags shall be provided inside the switchgear, motor control centres, control
and relay panels etc., wherever required for cable identification, where a number
of cables enter together through a gland plate.
15.2 Cable Supports and Cable Tray Mounting Arrangements
15.2.1 The Contractor shall provide embedded steel inserts on concrete floors/walls to
secure supports by welding to these inserts or available building steel structures.
15.2.2 The supports shall be fabricated from standard structural steel members.
15.2.3 Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 750 mm wherever cables are to be
supported without the use of cable trays, such as in trenches, while at all other

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
places these will be at an interval of 2000 mm.
15.2.4 Vertical run of cables on equipment support structure shall be supported on

perforated cable trays of suitable width which shall be suitably bolted/clamped
with the equipment support structure.
.
15.3 Cable Termination and Connections
15.3.1 The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly in accordance
with cable and termination kit manufacturer‘s instructions, drawing and/or as
directed by the Employer.
15.3.2 The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, drilling,
cutting, taping, heat shrinking (where applicable), connecting to cable terminal,
shorting and grounding as required to complete the job.
15.3.3 Supply of all consumable material shall be in the scope of Contractor.
15.3.4 The equipment will be generally provided with undrilled gland plates for
cables/conduit entry. The Contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland
plates, painting and touching up. Holes shall not be made by gas cutting.
15.3.5 Control cable inside control panel/switchgear/MCCB/MCC/ miscellaneous panels

shall be neatly bunched, clamped and tied with nylon strap or PVC perforated
strap to keep them in position.
15.3.6 The Contractor shall use printed ferrules for control cable cores at all
terminations, as instructed by the Employer. Each cable wire shall be identified
with a number and detailed cable schedule may be prepared indicating the wire
numbers.
15.3.7 Spare cores shall be similarly encaped & tagged with cable numbers and coiled
up with end cap.
15.3.8 All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused
openings shall be effectively closed.
15.3.9 Double compression type nickel plated (coating thickness not less than 10
microns) brass cable glands shall be provided by the Contractor for all power and
control cables to provide dust and weather proof terminations.
15.3.10 The cable glands shall conform to BIS:6121. They shall comprise of heavy duty
brass casting, machine finished and nickel plated, to avoid corrosion and oxida-
tion. Rubber components used in cable glands shall be neoprene and of tested
quality. Cable glands shall be of approved make.
15.3.11 The cable glands shall also be suitable for dust proof and weather proof
termination.
15.3.12 If the cable-end box or terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is found
unsuitable and requires modification, the same shall be carried out by the
Contractor, as directed by the Employer.
15.3.13 Crimping tool used shall be of approved design and make.
15.3.14 Control Cable lugs shall be tinned copper solderless crimping type conforming to

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
IS-8309 & 8394. Aluminium Bimetallic lugs for power cables as required shall be
used depending upon type of cables and terminations.
15.3.15 Solderless crimping of terminals shall be done by using corrosion inhibitory

compound. The cable lugs shall suit the type of terminals provided.
15. 4 Storage and handling of Cable Drums
15.4.1 Cable drums shall be unloaded, handled and stored in an approved manner and
rolling of drums shall be avoided as far as possible. For short distances, the
drums may be rolled provided they are rolled slowly and in proper direction as
marked on the drum.
16.0 DIRECTLY BURIED CABLES
16.1 The Contractor shall construct the cable trenches required for directly buried
cables. The scope of work shall include excavation, preparation of sand bedding,
soil cover, supply and installation of brick or concrete protective covers, back
filling and ramming, supply and installation of route markers and joint markers.
16.2 The cable (power and control) between LT station, DG set location and fire
lighting pump house and control room shall be laid in the burried cable trenches.
In addition to the above, for lighting purpose also, buried cable trench can be
used in outdoor area.
16.3 Power cables from Main Switchboard to colony shall be laid in burried cable
trench. Location of cable termination point at colony shall be as per site condition
and shall be decided in consultation with Employer‘s site-in-charge. Power
Cables for oil filtration plant shall be laid in open cable trench or burried trench
upto transformer/reactor area and can be looped from adjacent receptacles
provided for power supply of oil filtration plant.
16.4 Cable route and joint markers and RCC warning covers shall be provided
wherever required. The voltage grade of cables shall be engraved on the marker.
Cable markers shall be grounded in a concrete base.
17.0 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
17.1 Cabling in the control room shall be done on ladder type cable trays for vertical
runs while cabling in switchyard area shall be done on angles in the trench.
17.2 All cables from bay cable trench to equipments including and all interpole cables
(both power and control) for all equipment, shall be laid in PVC pipes of minimum
50 mm nominal outside diameter of class 4 as per IS 4985 which shall be buried
in the ground at a depth of 250mm below finish formation level. Separate PVC
pipes shall be laid for control and power cables. Cable pull boxes of adequate
size shall be provided if required. For vertical runs on equipments, perforated
cable trays shall be provided for all equipments under scope of the
contract or any equipment to be provided by the owner (including for
owner supplied circuit breakers).
17.3 Cables shall be generally located adjoining the electrical equipment through the
pipe insert embedded in the floor. In the case of equipments located away from
cable trench either pipe inserts shall be embedded in the floor connecting the
cable trench and the equipment or in case the distance is small, notch/opening
on the wall shall be provided. In all these cases necessary bending radius as

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
recommended by the cable manufacturer shall be maintained. Embedded pipes

shall be dressed properly at the equipment termination points.
17.4 Cable racks and supports shall be painted after installation with two coats of
metal primer (comprising of red oxide and zinc chromate in a synthetic medium)
followed by two finishing coats of aluminium paint. The red oxide and zinc
chromate shall conform to IS:2074.
17.5 Suitable arrangement should be used between fixed pipe/cable trays and
equipment terminal boxes, where vibration is anticipated.
17.6 Power and control cables in the cable trench shall be laid in separate tiers. The
order of laying of various cables shall be as follows, for cables other than directly
buried.
a) Power cables preferably on top tiers.
b) Control instrumentation and other service cables in bottom tiers.
c) For cabling from control room to switchyard in main cable trench, cable
shall be laid such that bottom tiers are preferably filled first and top tiers
are kept for filling future cables as per the instructions of Engineer-In-
Charge.
17.7 For Single core cables in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of three
times the diameter of cable between trefoil centre lines. Further, for horizontal
cables a minimum centre to centre distance equal to twice the diameter of the
cable of higher size of cables shall be maintained.
17.8 Trefoil clamps for single core cables shall be of pressure die cast aluminium (LM-
6), Nylon-6 or fibre glass and shall include necessary fixing GI nuts, bolts,
washer etc. These are required at every 2 metre of cable runs.
17.9 Power and control cables shall be securely fixed to the trays/supports with self
locking type nylon ties with de-interlocking facility at every 5 metre interval for
horizontal run. Vertical and inclined cable runs shall be secured with 25 mm
wide and 2 mm thick aluminium strip clamps at every 2m.
17.10 Cables shall not be bent below the minimum permissible limit. The permissible
limits are as follows:
Table of Cable and Minimum bending radius
Power cable 12 D
Control cable 10 D
D is overall diameter of cable
17.11 Where cables cross roads, drains and rail tracks, these shall be laid in reinforced
spun concrete or steel pipes buried at not less than one metre depth. The size of
hume/steel pipe shall be such that approximately 70% area is only occupied. For
meeting future requirement, additional hume/steel pipe shall be laid for future bay
provision.
17.12 In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable
one (for LT cables)/ two (for H.T. cables) straight through joints to be made in
case the cable develop fault at a later date.
17.13 Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to avoid using
straight through joints. Cable splices will not be permitted except where called for

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
by the drawings, unavoidable or where permitted by the Employer. If straight

through joints are unavoidable, the Contractor shall use the straight through
joints kit of reputed make.
17.14 Control cable terminations inside equipment enclosures shall have sufficient
lengths so that changing of termination in terminal blocks can be done without
requiring any splicing.
17.15 Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of
the station, wherever required by the Employer.
17.16 Rollers shall be used at intervals of about two metres while pulling cables to
avoid damage.
17.17 All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to
avoid damage due to twist, kinks, sharp bends, etc.
17.18 Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage. In cable vault, fire resistant
seal shall be provided underneath the panels.
17.19 Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in

accordance with IS:1255 and other Indian Standard Codes of practices.
17.20 Wherever cable pass through floor or through wall openings or other partitions,
GI/PVC wall sleeves with bushes having a smooth curved internal surface so as
not to damage the cable, shall be supplied, installed and properly sealed by the
Contractor at no extra charges.
17.21 In case the outer sheath of a cable is damaged during handling/installation, the
Contractor shall repair it at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Employer. In
case any other part of a cable is damaged, the same shall be replaced by a
healthy cable at no extra cost to the Employer, i.e. the Contractor shall not be
paid for installation and removal of the damaged cable.
17.22 All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and
reliable connections. The Contractor shall cover the exposed part of all cable
lugs whether supplied by him or not with insulating tape, sleeve or paint.
17.23 Cable trays
i) The cable trays shall be of G.S Sheet and minimum thickness of sheet
shall be 2mm.
ii) The Contractor shall perform all tests and inspection to ensure that
material and workmanship are according to the relevant standards.
Contractor shall have to demonstrate all tests as per specification and
equipment shall comply with all requirements of the specification.
a) Test for galvanising (Acceptance Test)

The test shall be done as per approved standards.
17.24 Conduits, Pipes and Duct Installation
17.24.1 Contractor shall supply and install all rigid conduits, mild steel pipes, flexible
conduits, hume pipes etc. including all necessary sundry materials such as tees,
elbows, check nuts, bushing, reducers, enlargers, coupling cap, nipples, gland

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
sealing fittings, pull boxes etc as required. The size of the conduit/pipe shall be
selected on the basis of 40% fill criterion.
17.24.2 Contractor shall have his own facility for bending, cutting and threading the
conduits at site. Cold bending should be used. All cuts & threaded ends shall be
made smooth without leaving any sharp edges. Anticorrosive paint shall be
applied at all field threaded portions.
17.24.3 All conduit/pipes shall be extended on both sides of wall/floor openings. The
fabrication and installation of supports and the clamping shall be included in the
scope of work by Contractor.
17.24.4 Installation of optical cables/ special cables:
GI pipe (light grade) of suitable size (minimum 25 mm) along with required
bends, joints etc. shall be used for special cables such as cables for visual
monitoring system (VMS), substation automation system (SAS). Further,
single pipe can be used for laying multiple cables.
17.24.5 All conduits/pipes shall have their ends closed by caps until cables are pulled.
After cables are pulled, the ends of conduits/pipes shall be sealed in an approved
manner to prevent damage to threaded portions and entrance of moisture and
foreign material.
17.24.6 All unarmoured cables shall run within the conduits from lighting panels to
lighting fixtures, receptacles etc.
17.24.7 Size of conduit for lighting shall be selected by the Contractor during detailed
engineering.
17.24.8 Exposed conduits shall be run in straight lines parallel to building columns,
beams and walls. Unnecessary bends and crossings shall be avoided to present
a neat appearance.
17.24.9 Conduit supports shall be provided at an interval of 750mm for horizontal runs
and 1000mm for vertical runs.
17.24.10 Conduit supports shall be clamped on the approved type spacer plates or
brackets by saddles or U- bolts. The spacer plates or brackets in turn, shall be
securely fixed to the building steel by welding and to concrete or brick work by
grouting or by nylon rawl plugs. Wooden plug inserted in the masonary or
concrete for conduit support is not acceptable.
17.24.11 Embedded conduits shall be securely fixed in position to preclude any

movement. In fixing embedded conduit, if welding or brazing is used, extreme
care should be taken to avoid any injury to the inner surface of the conduit.
17.24.12 Spacing of embedded conduits shall be such as to permit flow of concrete

between them.
17.24.13 Where conduits are placed alongwith cable trays, they shall be clamped to
supporting steel at an interval of 600mm.
17.24.14 For directly embedding in soil, the conduits shall be coated with an asphalt-base
compound. Concrete pier or anchor shall be provided wherever necessary to
support the conduit rigidly and to hold it in place.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
17.24.15 Conduit shall be installed in such a way as to ensure against trouble from
trapped condensation.
17.24.16 Conduits shall be kept, wherever possible, at least 300mm away from hot pipes,
heating devices etc. when it is evident that such proximity may reduce the
service life of cables.
17.24.17 Slip joints shall be provided when conduits cross structural expansion joints or
where long run of exposed conduits are installed, so that temperature change will
cause no distortion due to expansion or contraction of conduit run.
17.24.18 For long conduit run, pull boxes shall be provided at suitable intervals to facilitate
wiring.
17.24.19 Conduit shall be securely fastened to junction boxes or cabinets, each with a lock
nut inside and outside the box.
17.24.20 Conduits joints and connections shall be made thoroughly water-tight and rust
proof by application of a thread compound which insulates the joints. White lead
is suitable for application on embedded conduit and red lead for exposed conduit.
17.24.21 Field bends shall have a minimum radius of four (4) times the conduit diameter.
All bends shall be free of kinks, indentations of flattened surfaces. Heat shall not
be applied in making any conduit bend. Separate bends may be used for this
purpose.
17.24.22 The entire metallic conduit system, whether embedded or exposed, shall be
electrically continuous and thoroughly grounded. Where slip joints are used,
suitable bounding shall be provided around the joint to ensure a continuous
ground circuit.
17.24.23 After installation, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned by compressed air
before pulling in the wire.
17.24.24 Lighting fixtures shall not be suspended directly from the junction box in the main
conduit run.
17.25 Cable Sealing System
Modular multi-diameter cable sealing system consisting of frames, blocks and

accessories shall be installed where the underground and over ground cables
enter or leave concrete bay kiosks/switchyard panel room & control rooms in the
substations. Cable sealing system shall consist of multi-diameter type peel-able
or adjustable blocks of different sizes to suit the various cables. It should be
simple, easy and quick to assemble & re-assemble the cable sealing system.
Solid blocks shall not be used on frame. Frames & stay-plate material shall be of
galvanized steel and for compression, single piece wedge with galvanized steel
bolts shall be used. 30% spare blocks on the frame shall be provided for
expansion in future. Cable sealing system should have been tested for
fire/water/smoke tightness.
Cable sealing system having earthing strip can alternately be used in place
of cable gland arrangement for indoor panels such as LCC, C&R, PLCC
panels etc.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
18.0 LIGHTING JUNCTION BOX
The Contractor shall supply and install ISI marked junction boxes complete with
terminals as required. The brackets, bolts, nuts, screws etc required for erection
are also included in the scope of the Contractor.
19.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
19.1 All pre/commissioning activities and works work for substation equipment
shall be carried out in accordance with Employer's ''Pre- Commissioning
procedures for Switchyard Equipments (Doc. No. D-2-01-03-01-03)" by the
contractor. This document shall be provided to the successful contractor
during detailed engineering stage. Test results in the prescribed formats
shall be duly filled by the contractor and shall be submitted to the Owner in
soft form (CD or Pen Drive)
The Contractor shall arrange all equipments instruments and auxiliaries required
for testing and commissioning of equipments alongwith calibration certificates.
19.2 GENERAL CHECKS
(a) Check for physical damage.
(b) Visual examination of zinc coating/plating.
(c) Check from name plate that all items are as per order/specification.
(d) Check tightness of all bolts, clamps and connecting terminals using
torque wrenches.
(e) For oil filled equipment, check for oil leakage, if any. Also check oil level
and top up wherever necessary.
(f) Check ground connections for quality of weld and application of zinc rich
paint over weld joint of galvanised surfaces.
(g) Check cleanliness of insulator and bushings.
(h) All checks and tests specified by the manufacturers in their drawings and
manuals as well as all tests specified in the relevant code of erection.
(i) Check for surface finish of grading rings (Corona control ring).
19.3 STATION EARTHING
a) Check soil resistivity
b) Check continuity of grid wires
c) Check earth resistance of the entire grid as well as various sections of the
same.
d) Check for weld joint and application of zinc rich paint on galvanised
surfaces.
e) Dip test on earth conductor prior to use.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
19.4 AAC/ACSR STRINGING WORK, TUBULAR BUS WORK AND POWER

CONNECTORS
a) Physical check for finish
b) Electrical clearance check
c) Testing of torque by torque wrenches on all bus bar power connectors

and other accessories.
d) Millivolt drop test on all power connectors.
e) Sag and tension check on conductors.
19.5 ALUMINIUM TUBE WELDING
a) Physical check
b) Millivolt drop test on all joints.
c) Dye penetration test & Radiography test on 10% sample basis on weld
joints.
c) Test check on 5% sample joints after cutting the weld piece to

observe any voids etc.
19.6 INSULATOR
Visual examination for finish, damage, creepage distance etc.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE “A”
(Testing Procedure for ACSR/AAC Conductor)
1.0 UTS Test on Stranded Conductor
Circles perpendicular to the axis of the conductor shall be marked at two places
on a sample of conductor of minimum 5m length suitably compressed with dead
end clamps at either end. The load shall be increased at a steady rate upto 50%
of minimum specified UTS and held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not
be distorted due to Relative movement of strands. Thereafter the load shall be
increased at a steady rate to 100% of minimum specified UTS and held for one
minute. The conductor sample shall not fail during this period. The applied load
shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
2.0 Corona Extinction Voltage Test
Two samples of conductor of 5m length shall be strung with a spacing of 450 mm

between them at a height not exceeding 8.0 m above ground. This assembly
shall be tested as per Annexure-C, Corona extinction voltage shall not be less
than 510 kV (rms) & 320 KV (RMS) Line to ground for 765 kV & 400 kV
respectively.
3.0 Radio Interference Voltage Test
Under the conditions as specified under (2.0) above, the conductor samples shall
have radio interference voltage as indicated in the guaranteed technical
particulars enclosed with. This test may be carried out with corona control rings
and arcing horns. The test procedure shall be in accordance with IEC-60437.
4.0 D.C Resistance Test on Stranded Conductor
On a conductor sample of minimum 5 m length two contact clamps shall be fixed

with a pre-determined bolt torque. The resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin
double bridge by placing the clamps initially zero metre and subsequently one
metre apart. The test shall be repeated at least five times and the average value
recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the value at 20°C as per
clause no. 12.8 of IS:398 (Part V)-1982. The resistance corrected at 20°C shall
conform to the requirements of this specification.
5.0 Chemical Analysis of Zinc
Samples taken from the zinc ingots shall be chemically/spectrographically

analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements stated in this
specification.
6.0 Chemical Analysis of Aluminium and Steel
Samples taken from the Aluminium ingots/coils/strands shall be chemically/

spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the require-
ments stated in this specification.
7.0 Visual Check for Joints, Scratches etc.
Conductor drums shall be rewound in the presence of the inspector. The

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
inspector shall visually check for scratches, joints, etc. and that the conductor
generally conform to the requirements of this specification. The length of
conductor wound on the drum shall be measured with the help of counter meter
during rewinding.
8.0 Dimensional Check for Steel and Aluminium Strands.
The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they

9.0 Check for Lay-ratios of various Layers.
The lay-ratios of various layers shall be checked to ensure that they conform to
the requirements of this Specification.
10.0 Galvanising Test
The test procedure shall be as specified in IEC:60888. The material shall conform
to the requirements of this Specification. The adherence of zinc shall be checked
by wrapping around a mandrel four times the diameter of steel wire.
11.0 Torsion and Elongation Tests on Steel Strands
The test procedures shall be as per clause No. 10.3 of IEC:60888. In torsion test,
the number of complete twists before fracture shall not be less than that indicated
in the GTP. In case test sample length is less or more than 100 times the
stranded diameter of the strand, the minimum number of twists will be
proportioned to the length and if number comes in the fraction then it will be
rounded off to next higher whole number. In elongation test, the elongation of the
strand shall not be less than 4% for a gauge length of 250 mm.
12.0 Procedure Qualification test on welded Aluminium strands
Two Aluminium wires shall be welded as per the approved quality plan and shall
be subjected to tensile load. The breaking strength of the welded joint of the wire
shall not be less than the breaking strength of individual strands.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE “B”
(Testing procedure for Galvanised Steel Earthwire)
1. UTS TEST
Circles perpendicular to the axis of the earthwire shall be marked at two places
on a sample of earthwire of minimum 5m length suitably compressed with dead
end clamps at either end. The load shall be increased at steady rate upto 50% of
UTS and held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not be distorted due to
relative movement of strands. Thereafter, the load shall be increased at a steady
rate to 100% of UTS and held for one minute. The earthwire sample shall not fail
during this period. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load
is reached and value recorded.
2. D.C. RESISTANCE TEST
On an earthwire sample of minimum 5m length, two contact clamps shall be fixed

with a predetermined Bolt torque. The resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin
double-bridge by placing the clamps initially zero meter and subsequently one
meter apart. The test shall be repeated at least five times and the average value
recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the value at 20°C shall
3. Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and length of earthwire
Earthwire drums shall be rewound in the presence of the inspector. The

inspector shall visually check for joints, scratches etc. and see that the earthwire
generally conforms to the requirements of this specification. The length of
earthwire wound on the drum shall be measured with the help of counter meter
during rewinding.
4. TORSION TEST
The minimum number of twists which a single steel strand shall withstand during
torsion test shall be eighteen for a length equal to 100 times the standard
diameter of the strand. In case the test sample length is less or more than 100
times the standard diameter of the strand, the minimum number of twists will be
proportionate to the length and if number comes in the fraction then it will be
rounded off to next higher whole number.
5. DIMENSIONAL CHECK
The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they

6. LAY LENGTH CHECK
The lay length shall be checked to ensure that they conform to the requirements
of this specification.
7. GALVANISING TEST
The test procedure shall as specified in IS:4826-1968. The material shall

conform to the requirements of this specification. The adherence of zinc shall be

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
checked by wrapping around a mandrel four times the diameter of steel wire.
8. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF ZINC USED FOR GALVANIZING
Samples taken from zinc ingots shall be chemically/spectrographically analysed.

The same shall be in conformity to the requirements stated in this specification.
9. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF STEEL
Samples taken from steel ingots/coils/strands shall be chemically/

spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements
stated in this specification.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-C
1. General
Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated connectors,
where applicable, shall be tested for external corona both by observing the voltage
level for the extinction of visible corona under falling power frequency voltage and by
measurement of radio interference voltage (RIV).
2. Test Levels:
3.2 Alternatively, RIV tests shall be in accordance with NEMA standard Publication No.
107-1964, except otherwise noted herein.
3.4 Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure
that there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest
ambient noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be
measured at increasing and decreasing voltages of 85%, 100% and 110% of the
specified RIV test voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The
specified RIV test voltage for 765kV, 400kV, 220kV is listed in the detailed
specification together with maximum permissible RIV level in microvolts.
3.5 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent
device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.
3.6 The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration procedure of
the frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall establish the ratio of voltage
at the high voltage terminal to voltage read by noisel meter.
4. Test Methods for Visible Corona [applicable for 400kV and above]
connectors etc. The test shall be carried out in the same manner as RIV test
described above with the exception that RIV measurements are not required during
test and a search technique shall be used near the onset and extinction voltage,
when the test voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise values. The
test voltage shall be raised to 110% of RIV test voltage and maintained there for five
minutes. In case corona inception does not take place at 110%, test shall be
stopped, otherwise test shall be continued and the voltage will then be decreased
slowly until all visible corona disappears. The procedure shall be repeated at least 4

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
times with corona inception and extinction voltage recorded each time. The corona
extinction voltage for purposes of determining compliance with the specification shall
be the lowest of the four values at which visible corona (negative or positive polarity)
disappears. Photographs with laboratory in complete darkness shall be taken under
test conditions, at all voltage steps i.e. 85%, 100%, and 110%. Additional
photographs shall be taken at corona inception and extinction voltages. At least two
views shall be photographed in each case using Panchromatic film with an ASA
daylight rating of 400 with an exposure of two minutes at a lens aperture of f/5.6 or
equivalent. The photographic process shall be such that prints are available for
inspection and comparison with conditions as determined from direct observation.
Photographs shall be taken from above and below the level of connector so as to
show corona on bushing, insulators and all parts of energised connectors. The
photographs shall be framed such that test object essentially, fills the frame with no
cut-off.
In case corona inception does not take place at 110%, voltage shall not be
increased further and corona extinction voltage shall be considered adequate.
4.1 The test shall be recorded on each photograph. Additional photograph shall be
taken from each camera position with lights on to show the relative position of test
object to facilitate precise corona location from the photographic evidence.
4.2 In addition to photographs of the test object preferably four photographs shall be
taken of the complete test assembly showing relative positions of all the test
equipment and test objects. These four photographs shall be taken from four points
equally spaced around the test arrangement to show its features from all sides.
Drawings of the laboratory and test set up locations shall be provided to indicate
camera positions and angles. The precise location of camera shall be approved by
Purchaser‘s inspector, after determining the best camera locations by trial
energisation of test object at a voltage which results in corona.
4.3 The test to determine the visible corona extinction voltage need not be carried out
4.4 However, both test shall be carried out with the same test set up and as little time
between tests will be allowed. Simultaneous RIV and visible corona extinction
voltage testing may be permitted at the discretion of Purchaser‘s inspector if, in his
opinion, it will not prejudice other test.
5. Test Records:
In addition to the information previously mentioned and the requirements specified
as per CISPR or NEMA 107-1964 the following data shall be included in test report:
f) Onset and extinction of visual corona for each of the four tests required shall
be recorded.

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE – D
A. SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 765kV GANTRY STRUCTURE
Sl. Max. Span Conductor Ph-Ph Normal SCF per Spacer

No. Configuration Spacing Tension Phase span
I. For Fault Level of 40kA/50 kA for 1 sec.
1. 54.0 mtr QUAD AAC BULL 15 mtr 3.96 T 5.98 T 3.5 mtr
B. SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 400kV GANTRY STRUCTURE

I. For Fault Level of 40 kA for 1 sec.
1. 54 mtr QUAD ACSR 7 mtr 4T 5.64 T 6 mtr

2. 70 mtr TWIN ACSR 7 mtr 4T 5.64 T 5 mtr
3. 54 mtr QUAD ACSR 6 mtr 4T 5.10 T 5 mtr
4. 70 mtr TWIN ACSR 6 mtr 4T 5.10 T 5 mtr
5. 48 mtr QUAD ACSR 6 mtr 4T 4.82T 5 mtr
6. 52.5 mtr QUAD ACSR 6 mtr 4T 4.85T 5 mtr
7. 56.5 mtr QUAD ACSR 6 mtr 4T 4.88T 5 mtr
8. 52.5 mtr TWIN ACSR 6 mtr 4T 4.97T 5 mtr
9. 56.5 mtr TWIN ACSR 6 mtr 4T 5.00 T 5 mtr
II. For Fault Level of 50 kA for 1 sec.
1. 48 mtr QUAD AAC BULL 6 mtr 4T 5.10 T 4 mtr

2. 52.5 mtr QUAD ACSR 6 mtr 4T 5.18 T 4 mtr
III. For Fault Level of 63 kA for 1 sec.
1. 48 mtr QUAD AAC BULL 6 mtr 4T 6.00 T 4 mtr


SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE – D
C. SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 220 kV GANTRY STRUCTURE

I. For Fault Level of 40 kA for 1 sec.
1. 54 mtr QUAD ACSR 4.5 mtr 4T 5.00 T 2.5 mtr

2. 54 mtr TWIN ACSR 4.5 mtr 2T 3.50 T 2.5 mtr
II. For Fault Level of 50 kA for 1 sec.

NOTE: ACSR conductor as mentioned above indicates that it is suitable for both ACSR
MOOSE as well as ACSR BERSIMIS conductor.
D. SHORT CIRCUIT FORCES AND SPACER SPAN FOR 132 kV GANTRY STRUCTURE

I. For Fault Level of 31.5kA for 1 sec.
1. 36 mtr Twin Moose/ 3 mtr 1T 2.15 T 2.5 mtr

Zebra ACSR
2. 31.5 mtr Twin Moose/ 2.7mtr 1T 2.15 T 2.5 mtr
Zebra ACSR
3. 48 mtr Single Moose/ 3 mtr 1T 2.05 T NA
Zebra ACSR
4. 42 mtr Single Moose/ 2.7 mtr 1T 2.03 T NA
Zebra ACSR

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E
STANDARD TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS FOR AAC/ACSR CONDUCTORS,

GS EARTHWIRE AND ALUMINIUM TUBE
1.0 GENERAL
Employer has stardardised the guaranteed technical particulars for the following
AAC/ACSR conductors, Galvanised steel earthwire and aluminum tube. The
contractor shall supply the conductors as per the standard GTP mentioned below.
Any deviation to the following GTP shall be clearly brought out by the bidder in
their bid.
1.1 Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP) for conductors:

A. GTP of AAC BULL and AAC TARANTULA conductor:
Sl. Description Unit AAC BULL AAC
TARANTULA
1.0 Applicable Standard IS:398
2.0 Raw Materials
2.1 Steel Wire / Rods
2.1.1 Aluminium
a) Minimum purity of % 99.50 99.50
Aluminium
b) Maximum copper % 0.04 0.04
content
3.0 Aluminum strands after stranding
3.1 Diameter
a) Nominal mm 4.25 5.23
b) Maximum mm 4.29 5.28

c) Minimum mm 4.21 5.18
3.2 Minimum breaking load of strand
a) Before stranding KN 2.23 3.44
b) After stranding KN 2.12 3.27
c) Maximum D.C. Ohm 3.651 3.627
resistance of strand at /KM
20 deg. Centigrade
3.3 Maximum resistance of Ohm 0.00203 0.001341
1 m length of strand at
20 deg. C
4.0 AAC Conductor
4.1. a) Stranding Al – 61/4.25 mm Al – 37/ 5.23 mm
b) Number of Strands
i. 1st Aluminium Layer Nos. 1 1
ii. 2nd Aluminium Layer Nos. 6 6

C / ENGG / SPEC / ERC REV. NO: 10 (Apr’16)
SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E

TARANTULA
iii. 3rd Aluminium Layer Nos. 12 12
iv. 4th Aluminium Layer Nos. 18 18
v. 5th Aluminium Layer Nos. 24 -
4.2 Sectional Area of Sq. 865.36 794.80
aluminium mm
4.3 Total sectional area Sq. 865.36 794.80
mm
4.4 Approximate Weight Kg/m 2.4 2.191
4.5 Diameter of the mm 38.25 36.60
conductor
4.6 UTS of the conductor kN 139 (Min.) 120 (Min.)
4.7 Lay ratio of the mm Max Min Max Min
conductor
a) 6 wire Aluminium layer mm 16 10 16 10
b) 12 wire Aluminium mm 16 10 16 10
layer
c) 18 wire Aluminium mm 16 10 14 10
layer
d) 24 wire Aluminium mm 14 10 - -
layer
4.8 DC resistance of the ohm/ 0.03340 0.03628
conductor at 20°C km
4.9 Standard length of the m 1000 1000
conductor
4.10 Tolerance on Standard % (+/-) 5 (+/-) 5
length
4.11 Direction of lay of Right Hand Right Hand
outer layer
4.12 Linear mass of the conductor
a) Standard kg/ 2400 2192
km
b) Minimum kg/ 2355 2150
km
c) Maximum kg/ 2445 2234
km
4.13 Modulus of Elasticity Kg/sq 4709 (Initial) 4709 (Initial)
.mm 5869 (Final) 5869 (Final)
4.14 Co-efficient of Linear Per 23.0x10-6 23.0x10-6
Expansion Deg.
C
4.15 Minimum Corona KV 508 320
Extinction Voltage (rms)
4.16 RIV at 1 Mhz Micro Less than 1000 Less than 1000 at
volts at 508 kV (rms) 320 kV (rms)
5.0 Drum Dimensions Generally conforms to IS:1778

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E

TARANTULA
a) Flange Diameter mm 1855 1855
b) Traverse width mm 925 925
c) Barrel Diameter mm 850 850
d) Flange thickness mm 50x50 50x50
B. GTP of ACSR BERSIMIS and ACSR MOOSE conductor:

Sl. Description Unit ACSR ACSR MOOSE
BERSIMIS
1.0 Applicable Standard IS:398 / IEC - 61089
2.0 Raw Materials
2.1 Aluminium
Aluminium
content
2.2 Steel wires/ rods
a) Carbon % 0.50 to 0.85 0.50 to 0.85
b) Manganese % 0.50 to 1.10 0.50 to 1.10
c) Phosphorous % Not more than Not more than
0.035 0.035
d) Sulphur % Not more than Not more than
0.045 0.045
e) Silicon % 0.10 to 0.35 0.10 to 0.35
(Max.) (Max.)
2.3 Zinc
a) Minimum purity of Zinc % 99.95 99.95
3.1 Diameter

c) Maximum D.C. Ohm/ 1.738 2.921
resistance of strand at KM
20 deg. Centigrade
20 deg. C

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E

BERSIMIS
4.0 Steel strand after stranding
4.1 Diameter
4.3 Galvanising
a) Minimum weight of gm 260 260
zinc coating per sq.m.
b) Minimum number of Nos. 2 dips of one 2 dips of one
dips that the minute & 1 dip of minute & 1 dip of
galvanised strand can half minute half minute
withstand in the
standard preece test
c) Min. No. of twists in Nos 16 (After stranding) 16 (After stranding)
guage length equal 18 (Before 18 (Before
100 times the dia. of stranding) stranding)
wire which the strand
can withstand in the
torsion test (after
stranding)
5.0 ACSR Conductor
5.1.a) Stranding Al -42/4.57 mm+ Al -54/3.53 mm+
Steel-7/2.54 mm Steel-7/3.53 mm
i. Steel centre Nos. 1 1
ii. 1st Steel Layer Nos. 6 6
iii. 1st Aluminium Layer Nos. 8 12
iv. 2nd Aluminium Layer Nos. 14 18
v. 3rd Aluminium Layer Nos. 20 24
aluminium mm
mm
5.5 Diameter of the mm 35.05 31.77
conductor
5.6 UTS of the conductor kN 154 (Min.) 161.20 (Min.)
conductor

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E

BERSIMIS
a) Outer Steel layer mm 24 16 18 16
b) 8/12 wire Aluminium mm 17 10 14 12

layer
c) 14/ 18 wire Aluminium mm 16 10 13 11
layer
d) 20/24 wire Aluminium mm 13 10 12 10
layer
conductor
length
5.11 Direction of lay of - Right Hand Right Hand
outer layer
km
km
km
5.13 Modulus of Elasticity Kg/sq 6860
(Final State) .mm
Expansion Deg.
C
5.16 RIV at 1 Mhz under Micro Max. 1000 at Max. 1000 at 320
dry condition volts 320 kV (rms) kV (rms)
C. B. GTP of ACSR ZEBRA and ACSR PANTHER conductor:

Sl. Description Unit ACSR ZEBRA ACSR PANTHER
1.0 Applicable Standard IS:398 / IEC-61089
2.0 Raw Materials
2.1 Aluminium
Aluminium

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E

content
2.2 Steel wires/ rods
a) Carbon % 0.50 to 0.85 0.50 to 0.85
b) Manganese % 0.50 to 1.10 0.50 to 1.10
c) Phosphorous % Not more than Not more than
0.035 0.035
d) Sulphur % Not more than Not more than
0.045 0.045
e) Silicon % 0.10 to 0.35 0.10 to 0.35
(Max.) (Max.)
2.3 Zinc
a) Minimum purity of Zinc % 99.95 99.95
3.1 Diameter

20 deg. C
4.0 Steel strand after stranding
4.1 Diameter
4.3 Galvanising
a) Minimum weight of gm 260 260
zinc coating per sq.m.
b) Minimum number of Nos. 2 dips of one 2 dips of one
dips that the minute & 1 dip of minute & 1 dip of
galvanised strand can half minute half minute
withstand in the
standard preece test

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E

c) Min. No. of twists in Nos 16 (After 16 (After stranding)
guage length equal stranding) 18 (Before
100 times the dia. of 18 (Before stranding)
wire which the strand stranding)
can withstand in the
torsion test (after
stranding)
5.0 ACSR Conductor
5.1.a) Stranding Al -54/3.18 mm+ Al -30/3.00 mm+
Steel-7/3.18 mm Steel-7/3.00 mm
i. Steel centre Nos. 1 1
ii. 1st Steel Layer Nos. 6 6
iii. 1st Aluminium Layer Nos. 12 12
iv. 2nd Aluminium Layer Nos. 18 18
v. 3rd Aluminium Layer Nos. 24 NA
aluminium mm
mm
5.5 Diameter of the Mm 28.62 21.00
conductor
5.6 UTS of the conductor kN 130.32 (Min.) 89.67 (Min.)
conductor
a) Outer Steel layer mm 28 13 28 16
b) 12 wire Aluminium mm 17 10 16 10
layer
c) 18 wire Aluminium mm 16 10 14 10
layer
d) 24 wire Aluminium mm 14 10 NA
layer NA
conductor
length
5.11 Direction of lay of Right Hand Right Hand
outer layer
km

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E

km
km
5.13 Modulus of Elasticity Kg/sq 8158
.mm
Expansion Deg.
C
5.16 RIV at 1 Mhz Micro Less than 1000 Less than 500
volts at 154 kV (rms) at 92 kV (rms)
1.2 Guaranteed technical particulars of Galvanised Steel Earthwire

Description Sl. no. Unit Standard Values
1.0 Raw Materials
1.1 Steel wires / rods
a) Carbon % Not more than 0.55
b) Manganese % 0.40 to 0.90
c) Phosphorous % Not more than 0.04
d) Sulphur % Not more than 0.04
e) Silicon % 0.15 to 0.35
1.2 Zinc
a) Minimum purity of Zinc % 99.95
2.0 Steel strands
2.1 Diameter
a) Nominal mm 3.66
b) Maximum mm 3.74
c) Minimum mm 3.58
2.2. Minimum breaking load of strand
a) After stranding KN 10.58
2.3 Galvanising
a) Minimum weight of zinc coating gms. 275
per sq.m. after stranding
b) Minimum number of dips that the Nos. 3 dips of 1 minute and
galvanized strand can withstand

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E
in the standard preece test one dip of ½ minute

c) Minimum number of twists in a Nos. 18
gauge length equal to 100 times
diameter of wire which the
strand can withstand in the
torsion test, after stranding
3.0 Stranded Earth wire
3.1 UTS of Earth wire KN 68.4 (min.)
3.2 Lay length of outer steel layer
a) Standard mm 181
b) Maximum mm 198
c) Minimum mm 165
3.3 Maximum DC resistance of Ohm/km 3.375
earth wire at 200 C
3.4 Standard length of earth wire M 2000 or actual quantity
whichever is less.
3.5 Tolerance on standard length % ±5
3.6 Direction of lay for outside Right hand
layer
3.7 Linear mass
a) Standard Kg/km 583
b) Maximum Kg/km 552
c) Minimum Kg/km 600
3.8 Overall diameter mm 10.98
1.3 Guaranteed Technical Parameters of Aluminum Tube

A. GTP for 3” IPS & 4” IPS AL. TUBE
Sl. No. Description 3” AL. TUBE 4” AL. TUBE

1. Size 3" IPS (EH Type) 4" IPS (EH Type)
2. Material Aluminium Alloy 6101 T6 confirms to
63401 WP (range 2) of IS 5082 : 1998
3. Chemical Composition
i) Cu 0.05 Max
ii) Mg 0.4 to 0.9
iii) Si 0.3 to 0.7
iv) Fe 0.5 Max
v) Mn 0.03 Max
Vi) Al Remainder
4. Outer diameter 88.90 mm 114.2 mm
5. Tolerance on outer +2.2 mm, - 0.0 mm +2.2 mm, - 0.0 mm
diameter
6. Thickness 7.62 mm 8.51 mm
7. Tolerance on thickness +2.2 mm, - 0.0 mm +2.2 mm, - 0.0 mm
8. Cross-sectional area 1945.76 sq.mm 2825.61 sq.mm
9. Weight 5.25 kg/m 7.7 kg/m
10. Moment of Inertia 1621589.99 mm4 3972577.97 mm4
11. Section Modulus 36481.21 mm3 69572.29 mm3

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E
12. Minimum Ultimate Tensile 20.5 Kg/sq.mm

Strength
13. Temperature co-efficient of 0.00364 per Deg.C
resistance
14. Minimum Electrical 55% of IACS
Conductivity at 20 deg.C
15. Linear Temperature Co- 0.000023
efficient of Expansion (20
Deg.C -200 Deg.C)
16. Modulus of Elasticity 6700 Kg/sq.mm
17. Minimum Elongation on 50 10%
mm
18. Thermal Conductivity at 100 0.43 Calories/sec/sq.mm/cm/deg.C
Deg.C
19. Minimum 0.2% proof stress 17.34 Kg/sq.mm
20 Minimum Yield point 17.50 Kg/sq.mm 17.50 Kg/sq.mm
21 Minimum Breaking Strength 20.42 Kg/sq.mm 20.42 Kg/sq.mm
B. GTP for 4.5” IPS & 5” IPS AL. TUBE
Sl. No. Description 4.5” AL. TUBE 5” AL. TUBE

1. Size 4.5" IPS (EH Type) 5" IPS
2. Material Aluminium Alloy 6101 T6 confirms to
63401 WP (range 2) of IS 5082 : 1998
3. Chemical Composition
i) Cu 0.05 Max
ii) Mg 0.4 to 0.9
iii) Si 0.3 to 0.7
iv) Fe 0.5 Max
v) Mn 0.03 Max
Vi) Al Remainder
4. Outer diameter 120.0 mm 141.3 mm
5. Tolerance on outer +1.5 mm, +2.8 mm,
diameter - 0.0 mm - 0.0 mm
6. Thickness 12.0 mm 9.53 mm
7. Tolerance on thickness +1.0 mm, +0.8 mm,
- 0.0 mm - 0.0 mm
8. Cross-sectional area 4071.50 sq.mm 3945.11 sq.mm
9. Weight 10.993 kg/m 10.652 kg/m
10. Moment of Inertia 6011958.58 mm4 8610787.65 mm4
3
11. Section Modulus 100199.31 mm 121879.51 mm3
12. Minimum Ultimate Tensile 20.5 Kg/sq.mm
Strength
13. Temperature co-efficient of 0.00364 per Deg.C
resistance
14. Minimum Electrical 55% of IACS
Conductivity at 20 deg.C
15. Linear Temperature Co- 0.000023
efficient of Expansion (20
Deg.C -200 Deg.C)
16. Modulus of Elasticity 6700 Kg/sq.mm
17. Minimum Elongation on 50 10%

SECTION - (SE)
SWITCHYARD ERECTION
ANNEXURE-E
mm
18. Thermal Conductivity at 100 0.43 Calories/sec/sq.mm/cm/deg.C
Deg.C
19. Minimum 0.2% proof stress 17.34 Kg/sq.mm
20 Minimum Yield point 14.50 Kg/sq.mm 17.50 Kg/sq.mm
21 Minimum Breaking Strength 17.50 Kg/sq.mm 20.42 Kg/sq.mm

800 mm
450 mm
2 mm thick MS Plate
1000 mm
40 mm dia pipe
GROUND LEVEL
600 mm
NOTE : DIMENSIONS ARE INDICATIVE ONLY.

IT MAY VARY AS PER SITE REQUIREMENT.
( A Government of India Enterprise )
18/02/2008 Drawing No.: Rev.

C/ENG/STD/BAY NAME PLATE 00
CKD BY PRPD BY Date
Annexure-II
SCOPE of Work of Supply & Retro-fitment of 37 Nos. 420KV CBs, 8 Nos. 245KV CBs of
POWERGRID SR-I
The scope of work under the subject package covers supply & retro fitment of 37 Nos. 420KV CBs,
8 Nos. 245KV CBs. with new circuit breakers, including support structure, terminal connectors and
as specified in detailed BOQ and technical specification on FOR destination basis
420KV CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Supply Portion
Supply of 400KV, 3150A, 50KA for 1 sec with & without PIR SF6 circuit Breaker, including
support structure, terminal connectors as per technical specification
Rated continuous current (A) at design ambient temperature: 3150A

Rated short circuit current breaking capacity at rated voltage: 50KA
Symmetrical interrupting capability (KA rms): 50KA rms
Rated short circuit making current (kAp):125 kAp
Short time current carrying capability for 01 sec (kA rms):50 kA rms
245KV CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Supply Portion
Supply of 245KV, 2500A, 50KA for 1 sec with & without PIR SF6 circuit Breaker, including
support structure, terminal connectors as per technical specification
Rated continuous current (A) at design ambient temperature: 2500A

Rated short circuit current breaking capacity at rated voltage: 50KA
Symmetrical interrupting capability (KA rms): 50KA rms
Rated short circuit making current (kAp):125kAp
Short time current carrying capability for 01 sec (kA rms):50kArms
The CB shall be complete with support structure, terminal connectors, operating mechanism,
control cabinets, piping, inter pole cables, cable accessories like glands, terminal blocks, marking
ferrules, lugs, pressure gauges, density monitors (with graduated scale), galvanized support
structure for CB and control cabinets their foundation bolts, if required, and all other accessories
required for carrying out all the functions the CB is required to perform.
The Bidder shall submit POWEGRID valid approved type test report of offered model of circuit
breaker
Service Portion:-
Erection, testing and commissioning of 400KV Sf6 Gas Circuit Breakers, Interlia, including the
following activities (completed in all respect as per technical specification) at various substations:-
i. Existing foundation for CB is to be utilized. Any modification/preparation required in

the existing foundation or new foundation may also be considered with approval of
POWERGRID. In case of requirement of new foundation proper concreting with M25
grade and proper compaction of earth to be ensured.
ii. Arrangement of crane, Hydra etc.
iii. Dismantling of existing: breaker along with accessories
iv. Removing of existing cable between control room & Marshaling Box, (removing from
MB with proper Identification). Removing of inter phase cabling etc.
v. Fitment of same cable (control circuit) and remote wires in newly installed MB
vi. Erection, testing & commissioning of new CB including earthing. The Supply of
earthing materials shall be in the scope of bidder.
vii. Wiring to existing CSD in the switchyard is in the scope of Bidder, wherever it is
available. Wherever applicable, existing CSDs will be used. If re commissioning of CSD
is required, it will be in the scope of POWERGRID
viii. Arrangement of all tools/tackles/slings/wire ropes etc.
ix. Fixing of IPS Tubes along with modification if any suit the new breaker. Supply of
additional IPS tube, if required shall be in the scope of POWERGRID.
x. Shifting of existing breakers to the place suggested by POWERGRID in same Sub-
Station
xi. The Sf6 Gas Handling plant shall be provided by POWERGRID
xii. Storage cum erection insurance of the equipment
xiii. Advance planning for shutdown to be done and timely request (1st week of the month)
should be sent to POWERGRID site for approval in OCC meeting for shutdown in the
next month for retrofitting work.
xiv. Pre commissioning testing of the CB is in POWERGRID scope.
The Details of existing 400KV CB, 220KV is as follows
Station-
Name of Sub-
Sl.No Name of the bay/Line Make Model No wise
Station
Qty
A) 400KV CBS
1 Gajuwaka BR1 W/o PIR ABB ELF-SL6-2 1
2 Gajuwaka 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR CGL 400-SFM-40A 2
3 Gajuwaka VMG PG (LILO of VJA-1) W/o PIR CGL 400-SFM-40A 2
4 Gajuwaka JEYPORE LR-1 W/O PIR BHEL 3AT2 1
5 Gajuwaka JEYPORE LR-1 W/O PIR BHEL 3AT2 1
6 Gooty 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR CGL 400-SFM-40A 2
7 Gooty Somanahalli With PIR CGL 400-SFM-40A 2
8 Gooty KLN (LILO of NSR) W/o PIR CGL 400-SFM-40A 2
9 Hyderabad 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-III w/o PIR ABB EL(V)FSL6-2,ELF-SL6-2 2
10 Hyderabad 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-II w/o PIR ABB ELF-SL6-2 2
11 Hyderabad GAJWEL w/o PIR +1 spare CB ABB EL(V)FSL6-2 2
12 Hyderabad 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR ABB ELF-SL6-2 2
13 Kadapa Bus REACTOR 1 MAIN BAY w/o PIR ABB ELF-SL6-2 2
14 Khammam 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR ABB ELF SL6-2 2
15 Nagarjunsagar KADAPA1-FUTURE TIE BAY with PIR ABB ELF SL6-2 1
16 Nagarjunsagar ICT3-BUSREACTOR TIE BAY w/o PIR ABB ELF(V) SL6-2 1
17 Nagarjunsagar BUS REACTOR MAIN BAY w/o PIR ABB ELF SL6-2 1
18 Nagarjunsagar ICT-3 MAIN BAY w/o PIR BHEL 3AT2 1
19 Vijayawada 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR CGL 400-SFM-40A 2
VMG PG (LILO of GWK-1) W/o PIR+
20 Vijayawada 1 spare CGL 400-SFM-40A 3
21 Vijayawada NELLORE 1 with PIR+1 spare CB BHEL 3AT3 2
22 Vijayawada NELLORE 2 with PIR BHEL 3AT3 1
B) 220KV CBS
1 Gajuwaka 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR CGL 200-SFM-40A 1
2 Gooty 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR CGL 200-SFM-40A 1
400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-III w/o
3 Hyderabad PIR+1 spare CB ABB ELF-SL4-1 2
4 Hyderabad 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-II w/o PIR CGL 200-SFM-40A 1
5 Khammam 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR ABB ELF-SL4-1 1
6 Munirabad 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR ABB ELF-SL4-1 1
7 Vijayawada 400/220kV 315 MVA ICT-I w/o PIR CGL 200-SFM-40A 1
The above said scope of work is only indicative; the scope of work shall also include all such items
which are not specifically mentioned in the scope of work but necessary for successful, efficient
and reliable performance of the equipment.
The Bidder is advised to visit the site before submission of Quotations

ANNEXURE-VI
1. 400/220 KV KADAPA SUBSTATION

Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.
CHINAKAMPALLI VILLAGE & PO,
KADAPA – 516003
ANDHRA PRADESH
CONTACT: Shri M. MALLIKARJUNA, DGM, P.H NO: 9490690301
GST NO: 37AAACP0252G1ZS
2. 400/220 KV HYDERABAD SUBSTATION

POST BAG No.2, GHANAPURAM Village
GHATKESAR-Post, R.R. Dist
HYDERABAD - 501301
TELANGANA
CONTACT: Shri M Venkateswarulu, M, PH NO: 9440908968
GST NO: 36AAACP0252G1ZU
3. VIZAG HVDC STATION & 400/220 KV SUBSTATION

SECTOR – 10,
UKKU NAGARAM
VISAKHA PATNAM – 530032
ANDHRA PRADESH
CONTACT: Shri AVLN RAO, Sr.GM, PH NO: 9440908968
4. 400/220 KV MUNIRABAD SUBSTATION

GULADAHALLI VILLAGE,
VIA-GINIGERA, KOPPAL TQ & DIST – 583228
KARNATAKA
CONTACT: Shri Mohan Kishore, DGM, PH NO: 8331931076
GST NO: 29AAACP0252G1ZP
5. 400/220 KV VIJAYAWADA SUBSTATION
NUNNA POST,
NUZVID ROAD
VIJAYAWADA – 521212
ANDHRA PRADESH
CONTACT: RSVLN Nageswar Rao, Sr.DGM, PH No: 9490611044
6. 400/220 KV NAGARJUNA SAGAR SUBSTATION

TALLAPALLI Village,
MACHERLA MANDAL
GUNTUR DIST – 522426
ANDHRA PRADESH
CONTACT: SRI Y S Sai Prasad, DGM PH NO: 9490634149
7. 400/220 KV GOOTY SUBSTATION

GOOTY – KURNOOL ROAD,
GOOTY – 515402
ANANTHAPUR DIST
ANDHRA PRADESH
CONTACT: SRI YVPKS Rao, GM, PH NO: 9423076641
8. 400/220 KV KHAMMAM SUBSTATION

BUDIDAMPADU Village,
Kominepalli Post
Khammam District – 507182
TELANGANA
CONTACT: SRI SDCS RAO, GM, PH NO: 9440908940
GST NO: 36AAACP0252G1ZU

Technical Specification Section: Switchgear-Cb Revision-11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specification Section: Switchgear-Cb Revision-11

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specification Section: Switchgear-Cb Revision-11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

3) Some duty requirements parameters added/modified (refer clause 2.0)

8) Included Technical parameters for 72.5kV CB (refer clause 16.0)

Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

Clause.No. Description Page No.

2.0 Duty requirements 4

2.6 Controlled Switching Device (CSD) 7

3.0 Total Break Time 9

4.0 Constructional Features 9

5.0 Sulphur Hexafluoride Gas (SF6 Gas) 11

7.0 Spare Parts and Maintenance Equipment 11

8.0 Operating Mechanism and Control 12

9.0 Support Structure 15

10.0 Terminal Connector Pad 16

11.0 Inter-pole Cabling 16

12.0 Fittings and Accessories 17

13.0 Additional Data to be Furnished 18

14.0 Dead Tank Type Circuit Breaker 19

16.0 Technical Parameters for Circuit Breaker 21

17.0 Pre-commissioning tests 24

18.0 Actions required for defects observed during defect

9.b) drg: Indicative drawing for Platform details of 400kV&

Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

1.2 800/420/245/145/72.5kV circuit breakers offered would be of sulphur

All necessary parts to provide a complete and operable circuit breaker

2.0 DUTY REQUIREMENTS

Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

ii) RECLOSING AGAINST TRAPPED CHARGES

iii) OUT OF PHASE CLOSING

2.3 The breaker shall be capable of:

i) Interrupting the steady and transient magnetizing current corresponding

Voltage rating of CB Type of Transformer Rating (in MVA)

800kV 765/400kV 250 to 1500

420kV 765/400kV 250 to 1500

400/220kV 250 to 630

400/132kV 160 to 315

245kV 400/220kV 200 to 630

Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

145kV 220/132kV 50 to 200

ii) Interrupting line/cable charging current as per IEC without use of

iv) Withstanding all dielectric stresses imposed on it in open condition

Voltage rating of Reactor Rating Max. rise of over

420kV 50 to 150 2.3

a. Capability of 400 kV circuit breakers to interrupt inductive

Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

c. To validate the results of above said simulation study/analysis

d. Laboratory test/ field test reports shall be submitted for 400 kV

2.6 CONTROLLED SWITCHING DEVICE (CSD) :

Circuit Breakers shall be equipped with controlled switching device with

- Switching of transformer (from 765kV and 400kV side circuit

2.6.1 Technical Requirement for controlled switching device:

b) The CSD shall meet the requirements of IEC-61000-4-16 class IV for HF

Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

i) The CSD shall have time setting resolution of 0.1 ms or better.

j) The CSD shall have sufficient number of output/input potential free

l) The provision for bypassing the Controlled switching device shall be

Technical Specification, Section: Switchgear-CB, REV.11

m) The CSD shall be provided with a communication port to facilitate